Risk Curves Manual

TNO Safety software
RISKCURVES
Version 10
Quick Start Guide and User Manual
TNO Built Environment & Geosciences

Department of Industrial and External Safety
Princetonlaan 6
PO. 80015
NL-3508 TA Utrecht, the Netherlands
Fax. +31 88 86 62050
Email:helpdesk.riskcurves@tno.nl
© 2018 TNO
RISKCURVES
© 2018 TNO
All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the
written permission of the publisher.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no
responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this
document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and
the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused
directly or indirectly by this document.
Contents 3
Table of Contents
Foreword 0
Chapter I Introduction 15
1 TNO software
...................................................................................................................................
products 15
2 Installation
................................................................................................................................... 16
System requirem..........................................................................................................................................................
ents 16
The protection ..........................................................................................................................................................
key 16
Installation and
..........................................................................................................................................................
de-installation 17
Upgrading from ..........................................................................................................................................................
version 9 17
Upgrading from ..........................................................................................................................................................
older versions 19
3 What ...................................................................................................................................
is RISKCURVES 22
Which task can..........................................................................................................................................................
RISKCURVES perform 22
What is the required
..........................................................................................................................................................
input 23
What kind of results
..........................................................................................................................................................
are obtained? 23
4 What's
...................................................................................................................................
new in version 10 32
Chem ical database
..........................................................................................................................................................
structure 33
Mixtures .......................................................................................................................................................... 37
Limitations .........................................................................................................................................................
for mixtures 37
Calculation.........................................................................................................................................................
of properties of mixtures 38
Evaluating .........................................................................................................................................................
mixture properties 39
Usage of Projection
..........................................................................................................................................................
system s 41
New and adapted..........................................................................................................................................................
m odels 44
Support for tile
..........................................................................................................................................................
servers 45
Chapter II Quick Start Guide 49

1 The Graphical
...................................................................................................................................
User Interface 49
2 The concepts
...................................................................................................................................
behind the tree nodes 50
3 Quick...................................................................................................................................
start: Create a new project 62
1 Add a background
..........................................................................................................................................................
m ap 63
2 Verify calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
settings 67
3 Define m eteorological
..........................................................................................................................................................
conditions 68
4 Define population
..........................................................................................................................................................
distribution 69
5 Define Stationary
..........................................................................................................................................................
or Transport equipm ent locations 75
6 Add Scenarios
..........................................................................................................................................................
to equipm ent location 76
7 Entering consequence
..........................................................................................................................................................
m odel set data 78
8 Perform ing ..........................................................................................................................................................
the risk calculation 81
9 Evaluate results
..........................................................................................................................................................
of the calculation 82
10 Add a Consequence
..........................................................................................................................................................
risk calculation 83
11 The use of ..........................................................................................................................................................
Cum ulation sets 85
12 The use of ..........................................................................................................................................................
Com parison sets 85
13 The use of ..........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis points 86
Chapter III The user interface in detail 89

1 Menu...................................................................................................................................
bar 90
2 Toolbar
................................................................................................................................... 91
3 Project
...................................................................................................................................
tree 93
4 CalculationSet
...................................................................................................................................
definition 95
5 Equipment
...................................................................................................................................
definition 96
© 2018 TNO
4 RISKCURVES
6 Scenario
...................................................................................................................................
definition 97
7 Analysis
...................................................................................................................................
points 100
8 Consequence
...................................................................................................................................
Risk 101
9 Result
...................................................................................................................................
panel tabs 103
10 Graph
...................................................................................................................................
display panel 103
Presenting Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
Results 105
Base functionality
..........................................................................................................................................................
graphs 105
11 (Autohide)
...................................................................................................................................
Scenario selection panel 108
12 Command
...................................................................................................................................
button panel 109
13 Node...................................................................................................................................
input panel 110
14 Graph
...................................................................................................................................
selection box 112
15 Profile
...................................................................................................................................
expert button 112
16 Map...................................................................................................................................
display panel 113
Presenting geographic
..........................................................................................................................................................
calculation results 115
Positioning equipm
..........................................................................................................................................................
ent 118
Map functionality
.......................................................................................................................................................... 118
Map legend options
.......................................................................................................................................................... 120
17 Report
...................................................................................................................................
panel 124
18 Model
...................................................................................................................................
log panel 127
19 Legend
...................................................................................................................................
panel 129
Chapter IV Advanced features 131

1 Options
................................................................................................................................... 131
2 Display
...................................................................................................................................
units 133
3 Presentation
...................................................................................................................................
settings 135
4 Expert
...................................................................................................................................
Parameter settings 139
5 Meteorological
...................................................................................................................................
distribution 141
6 Vulnerability
...................................................................................................................................
settings 142
7 Environment
...................................................................................................................................
settings 143
8 Accuracy
...................................................................................................................................
settings 144
9 Chemical
...................................................................................................................................
Databases 145
Chem ical database
..........................................................................................................................................................
m anager 146
Chem ical databases
..........................................................................................................................................................
sources 147
Selecting a chem
..........................................................................................................................................................
ical from the database 149
View ing/Editing
..........................................................................................................................................................
properties of chem icals 151
Creating chem..........................................................................................................................................................
ical m ixtures 156
Converting Vs9
..........................................................................................................................................................
user chem icals 159
10 Mass...................................................................................................................................
and volume calculator 160
11 Mortality/probit
...................................................................................................................................
calculator 161
12 Geo-referencing
...................................................................................................................................
images 161
13 Risk ...................................................................................................................................
transects 165
14 Exporting
...................................................................................................................................
consequence data 166
15 Exporting
...................................................................................................................................
contour dimensions 168
Chapter V Technical backgrounds 171

1 QRA...................................................................................................................................
Definitions 171
© 2018 TNO
Contents 5
Calculation Set.......................................................................................................................................................... 171

Calculation Settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 171
Accuracy param ..........................................................................................................................................................
eters 172
Vulnerability..........................................................................................................................................................
param eters 174
Environm ent..........................................................................................................................................................
param eters 181
Meteorological ..........................................................................................................................................................
data 183
Population .......................................................................................................................................................... 184
Equipm ent .......................................................................................................................................................... 185
Scenario .......................................................................................................................................................... 185
Modelset .......................................................................................................................................................... 188
Consequence ..........................................................................................................................................................
Risk definitions 189
Cum ulation sets
.......................................................................................................................................................... 191
Com parison..........................................................................................................................................................
sets 191
Analysis points.......................................................................................................................................................... 193
Footprint definitions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 194
Consequence.........................................................................................................................................................
footprint definition 197
Lethality footprint
.........................................................................................................................................................
definition 198
Societal Risk.......................................................................................................................................................... 202
Individual Risk.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Iso Risk Contours
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Societal Risk..........................................................................................................................................................
(FN) Curve 204
Project file .......................................................................................................................................................... 205
SR Maps .......................................................................................................................................................... 205
2 The ...................................................................................................................................
consequence models within a modelset 210
Gas release .......................................................................................................................................................... 211
Gas release
.........................................................................................................................................................
from a vessel or pipe 211
Gas release
.........................................................................................................................................................
from a long pipeline 212
Liquefied gas..........................................................................................................................................................
release 213
DIERS top.........................................................................................................................................................
venting (vessel only) 214
Vapour release
.........................................................................................................................................................
from vessel or pipe 215
Pressurized
.........................................................................................................................................................
liquefied gas release from vessel or pipe 215
Spray release
.........................................................................................................................................................
of pressurized liquefied gas from vessel or pipe 216
Instantaneous
.........................................................................................................................................................
flashing liquid release 218
Liquefied .........................................................................................................................................................
gas from long pipeline 219
Liquid release
.......................................................................................................................................................... 220
Pool evaporation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 221
Atm ospheric..........................................................................................................................................................
dispersion 223
3 Combined
...................................................................................................................................
models 226
4 Cumulation
...................................................................................................................................
of sources 228
5 Model
...................................................................................................................................
input parameters 230
Absorption speed
.......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Absorption surface
.......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Adiabatic vapour
..........................................................................................................................................................
flash fraction 231
Accuracy .......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Air relative hum
..........................................................................................................................................................
idity 232
Alw ays use fast
..........................................................................................................................................................
dispersion m odel 232
Am bient pressure
.......................................................................................................................................................... 232
Am bient relative
..........................................................................................................................................................
hum idity 232
Am bient tem..........................................................................................................................................................
perature 232
Am ount of CO2..........................................................................................................................................................
in atm osphere 232
Angle betw een..........................................................................................................................................................
hole and flam e axis (?) 233
Area of LFL contour
.......................................................................................................................................................... 233
at distance .......................................................................................................................................................... 233
at distance to..........................................................................................................................................................
the source 233
at tim e t .......................................................................................................................................................... 234
Atm ospheric..........................................................................................................................................................
pressure 234
Atm ospheric..........................................................................................................................................................
transm issivity 234
© 2018 TNO
6 RISKCURVES
Average m ass ..........................................................................................................................................................

flow rate 234
Average release
..........................................................................................................................................................
rate (1st 20%) 234
Average release
..........................................................................................................................................................
rate (2nd 20%) 235
Axial distance..........................................................................................................................................................
from release (Sd) 235
Based upon tim..........................................................................................................................................................
e 236
Blast w ave shape
..........................................................................................................................................................
at Xd 236
BLEVE calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
type 236
Burst pressure..........................................................................................................................................................
vessel 237
Calculate contours
..........................................................................................................................................................
for 237
Calculate toxic
..........................................................................................................................................................
contour by 237
Case description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 237
Cause of vessel
..........................................................................................................................................................
failure 238
Chem ical nam ..........................................................................................................................................................
e 238
Cloud cover .......................................................................................................................................................... 239
Cloud passage ..........................................................................................................................................................
tim e 239
Com bustion..........................................................................................................................................................
rate 239
Com bustion..........................................................................................................................................................
product to show 240
Concentrating ..........................................................................................................................................................
averaging tim e flam m ables 241
Concentrating ..........................................................................................................................................................
averaging tim e toxics 241
Concentration ..........................................................................................................................................................
at (Sd, Yd) 241
Concentration ..........................................................................................................................................................
at (Xd, Yd, Zd, t) 241
Concentration ..........................................................................................................................................................
at m axim um plum e rise 241
Concentration ..........................................................................................................................................................
at plum e touch-dow n 242
Concentration ..........................................................................................................................................................
at plum e's centre-line at Xd 242
Concentration ..........................................................................................................................................................
averaging tim e 242
Concentration ..........................................................................................................................................................
indoors at tim e t 243
Concentration ..........................................................................................................................................................
reduction at t 243
Congested area.......................................................................................................................................................... 244
Convective heat
..........................................................................................................................................................
production 244
Contour dim..........................................................................................................................................................
ensions 244
Confined m ass..........................................................................................................................................................
in explosive range 245
Contour levels.......................................................................................................................................................... 245
Contour plot..........................................................................................................................................................
accuracy 246
Cross-sectional
..........................................................................................................................................................
area of the tank 247
Curve Num ber .......................................................................................................................................................... 247
CurveNum ber ..........................................................................................................................................................
for ME 248
Dam age (general
..........................................................................................................................................................
description) at Xd 249
Dam age to brick
..........................................................................................................................................................
houses at Xd 249
Dam age to structures
..........................................................................................................................................................
(em pirical) at Xd 249
Dam age to typical
..........................................................................................................................................................
Am erican-style houses at Xd 250
Day Month Year..........................................................................................................................................................
num ber 250
Default m ixingheight
.......................................................................................................................................................... 251
Define population
..........................................................................................................................................................
by 251
Density at tim..........................................................................................................................................................
eT 251
Density gas at..........................................................................................................................................................
pipe exit at tim e t 251
Diam eter of expanded
..........................................................................................................................................................
jet 251
Diam eter of the
..........................................................................................................................................................
tank 252
Discharge coefficient
.......................................................................................................................................................... 252
Distance from ..........................................................................................................................................................
center of the pool (Xd) 253
Distance from ..........................................................................................................................................................
centre m ass of confined explosive cloud to point of study 253
Distance from ..........................................................................................................................................................
centre m ass of the cloud at w hich threshold overpressure is reached 253
Distance from ..........................................................................................................................................................
centre of vessel (Xd) 253
Distance from ..........................................................................................................................................................
release (Xd) 254
Distance perpendicular
..........................................................................................................................................................
to w ind direction (Yd) 255
Distance to plum
..........................................................................................................................................................
e touch-dow n 255
Distance to plum
..........................................................................................................................................................
e touch-dow n_2 255
Distance to toxic
..........................................................................................................................................................
dose D or fraction of m ortality F 256
Dose at (Xd, Yd,
..........................................................................................................................................................
Zd) 256
© 2018 TNO
Contents 7
Dose reduction..........................................................................................................................................................
at t 256
Duration of the
..........................................................................................................................................................
fire 256
Duration of the
..........................................................................................................................................................
release 257
Effective release
..........................................................................................................................................................
height 257
Equivalency factor
.......................................................................................................................................................... 257
Equivalent TNT..........................................................................................................................................................
m ass 258
Evacuation tim..........................................................................................................................................................
e 258
Evaporation from
..........................................................................................................................................................
Land or Water 258
Exit vapor m ass
..........................................................................................................................................................
fraction 258
Exit vapour m..........................................................................................................................................................
ass fraction at tim e t 258
Expansion type.......................................................................................................................................................... 259
Explosive Mass.......................................................................................................................................................... 259
Explosive m ass
..........................................................................................................................................................
at tim e t 259
Exposure duration
.......................................................................................................................................................... 259
Exposure duration
..........................................................................................................................................................
to heat radiation 260
Extrapolated..........................................................................................................................................................
tim e to em pty pipeline 260
Filling degree..........................................................................................................................................................
(liquid volum e/tank volum e) 261
Filling degree..........................................................................................................................................................
at tim e t 261
Fixed indoors ..........................................................................................................................................................
outdoors toxic ratio 261
Flam e path length
.......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Flam e tem perature
.......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Flam e tilt .......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Flow rate inlet
..........................................................................................................................................................
feed 263
Form ation rate
..........................................................................................................................................................
chem icals 263
Fraction com..........................................................................................................................................................
bustion heat radiated 263
Fraction confined
..........................................................................................................................................................
m ass in ME 264
Fraction of CO2
..........................................................................................................................................................
in Atm osphere 264
Fraction of flam
..........................................................................................................................................................
m able cloud confined 264
Fraction of liberated
..........................................................................................................................................................
energy going to kinetic energy 265
Fraction of m..........................................................................................................................................................
ortality at (Xd, Yd, Zd) 265
Fraction of the
..........................................................................................................................................................
flam e covered by soot 265
Fragm ent distribution
.......................................................................................................................................................... 266
Froude Num ber.......................................................................................................................................................... 266
Frustum lift off
..........................................................................................................................................................
height (b) 266
GAME equivalent
..........................................................................................................................................................
curve num ber 267
GAME expansion..........................................................................................................................................................
type 267
Graph Area of ..........................................................................................................................................................
the cloud above LEL at release level vs. Tim e 267
Graph Circle ..........................................................................................................................................................
circum scribed to m axim um distance to threshold concentration at Zd 268
Graph Concentration
..........................................................................................................................................................
Contour Plot 268
Graph Concentration
..........................................................................................................................................................
in the plum e vs Distance 268
Graph Concentration
..........................................................................................................................................................
vs Axial distance at Yd 269
Graph Concentration
..........................................................................................................................................................
vs. Dow n-w ind distance at tim e t and (Yd, Zd) 269
Graph Concentration
..........................................................................................................................................................
vs. Tim e at (Xd, Yd, Zd) 269
Graph Distance..........................................................................................................................................................
from rupture to interface vs Tim e (COPY) 269
Graph Dynam..........................................................................................................................................................
ic pressure vs Distance 270
Graph Explosive
..........................................................................................................................................................
m ass vs. Tim e 270
Graph Filling..........................................................................................................................................................
degree vs Tim e 271
Graph Fraction..........................................................................................................................................................
of m ortality vs. Dow n-w ind distance at (Yd, Zd) 271
Graph Height..........................................................................................................................................................
of the liquid inside the vessel vs Tim e 271
Graph Jet velocity
..........................................................................................................................................................
vs Axial distance at Yd 271
Graph Mass ..........................................................................................................................................................
flow rate vs Tim e 272
Graph Mass ..........................................................................................................................................................
of liquid rem aining in the vessel vs Tim e 272
Graph Mass ..........................................................................................................................................................
of vapour rem aining in the vessel vs Tim e 272
Graph Maxim..........................................................................................................................................................
um concentration vs Dow nw ind distance 272
Graph Maxim..........................................................................................................................................................
um range contour plot 273
Graph Overpressure
..........................................................................................................................................................
contour plot 273
Graph Overpressure
..........................................................................................................................................................
vs Distance 273
Graph Plum e..........................................................................................................................................................
sideview 274
© 2018 TNO
8 RISKCURVES
Graph Positive ..........................................................................................................................................................

phase duration vs Distance 274
Graph Pressure ..........................................................................................................................................................
at pipe exit vs Tim e 275
Graph Pressure ..........................................................................................................................................................
im pulse vs Distance 275
Graph Quality..........................................................................................................................................................
outflow at pipe exit vs Tim e 275
Graph Tem perature
..........................................................................................................................................................
Graph Tem perature
..........................................................................................................................................................
vs Axial distance 276
Graph Total m ..........................................................................................................................................................
ass released vs Tim e 276
Graph Toxic Contour
..........................................................................................................................................................
Plot 276
Graph Toxic dose
..........................................................................................................................................................
vs. Dow n-w ind distance at (Yd, Zd) 277
Graph Vessel ..........................................................................................................................................................
pressure vs Tim e 277
Graph Vessel ..........................................................................................................................................................
tem perature vs Tim e 277
Graph Void fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Grid resolution.......................................................................................................................................................... 278
Ground / Surface/
..........................................................................................................................................................
Bund tem perature 278
Heat em ission ..........................................................................................................................................................
from fire surface 278
Heat flux from ..........................................................................................................................................................
solar radiation 278
Heat of reaction
..........................................................................................................................................................
per kg product 278
Heat radiation ..........................................................................................................................................................
at Xd 279
Heat radiation ..........................................................................................................................................................
dam age probits 279
Heat Radiation ..........................................................................................................................................................
Exposure Duration 280
Heat radiation ..........................................................................................................................................................
level total destruction 280
Heat radiation ..........................................................................................................................................................
levels in contour plot 280
Height (Zd) .......................................................................................................................................................... 280
Height bottom ..........................................................................................................................................................
of the fire ball 280
Height difference
..........................................................................................................................................................
betw een pipe entrance and exit 281
Height leak above
..........................................................................................................................................................
tank bottom 281
Height of confined
..........................................................................................................................................................
pool above ground level 282
Height of congested
..........................................................................................................................................................
area 282
Height of construction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 283
Height of liquid
..........................................................................................................................................................
at tim e t 283
Height of observer
..........................................................................................................................................................
above ground level 283
Height of pool ..........................................................................................................................................................
at T=0 284
Height of the..........................................................................................................................................................
plum e's centre-line at Xd 284
Height to LEL..........................................................................................................................................................
at tim e t 284
Hole contraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
coefficient 284
Hole diam eter .......................................................................................................................................................... 285
Hole rounding .......................................................................................................................................................... 285
Hole type .......................................................................................................................................................... 285
Include overpressure
..........................................................................................................................................................
effects 285
Indoor Ventilation
..........................................................................................................................................................
ratio 286
Initial density.......................................................................................................................................................... 286
Initial height ..........................................................................................................................................................
of the liquid above release point 286
Initial jet pressure
.......................................................................................................................................................... 286
Initial jet tem..........................................................................................................................................................
perature 286
Initial liquid m
..........................................................................................................................................................
ass fraction 287
Initial m ass in
..........................................................................................................................................................
vessel 287
Initial plum e ..........................................................................................................................................................
density 287
Initial pressure
..........................................................................................................................................................
in pipeline 287
Initial pressure
..........................................................................................................................................................
in vessel 287
Initial source..........................................................................................................................................................
strength 288
Initial speed ..........................................................................................................................................................
of fragm ent 288
Initial tem perature
..........................................................................................................................................................
in pipeline 288
Initial tem perature
..........................................................................................................................................................
in vessel 288
Inside fraction.......................................................................................................................................................... 288
Integration tolerance
.......................................................................................................................................................... 288
Inverse Monin-Obukhov
..........................................................................................................................................................
Length (1/L) 289
Is the vessel..........................................................................................................................................................
elevated? 289
Jet velocity at..........................................................................................................................................................
(Sd, Yd) 290
© 2018 TNO
Contents 9
Latitude .......................................................................................................................................................... 290

Length cylinder
.......................................................................................................................................................... 290
Length of cloud
..........................................................................................................................................................
(betw een LEL) 291
Length of frustum
..........................................................................................................................................................
(flam e) (Rl) 291
Length of rectangular
..........................................................................................................................................................
pool 292
Length of toxic
..........................................................................................................................................................
contour 292
Length source ..........................................................................................................................................................
in w ind (x), crossw ind (y) and z-direction 292
Length-Diam..........................................................................................................................................................
eter ratio of the vessel 294
Lethal fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
dam age report 294
Lethal fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
flam e contour 294
Lethal fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
flashfire 294
Lethal fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure indoors dam age 294
Lethal fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
pressure total destruction zone 294
Liberated energy
.......................................................................................................................................................... 295
Lim it of m om..........................................................................................................................................................
entum region 295
Liquid m ass ..........................................................................................................................................................
fraction in cloud 295
Mass flow rate..........................................................................................................................................................
at tim e t 296
Mass flow rate..........................................................................................................................................................
of the source 296
Mass of em pty..........................................................................................................................................................
vessel 296
Mass of fragm ..........................................................................................................................................................
ent 296
Mass of heaviest
..........................................................................................................................................................
piece 296
Mass of liquid..........................................................................................................................................................
in vessel at tim e t 297
Mass of vapour..........................................................................................................................................................
Maxim um area ..........................................................................................................................................................
of explosive cloud 297
Maxim um Averaging
..........................................................................................................................................................
Tim e 297
Maxim um concentration
..........................................................................................................................................................
at (Yd, Zd) 298
Maxim um Diam ..........................................................................................................................................................
eter Poolfire 298
Maxim um distance
..........................................................................................................................................................
of source to LEL 298
Maxim um distance
..........................................................................................................................................................
to threshold 298
Maxim um evaluation
..........................................................................................................................................................
tim e 298
Maxim um explosive
..........................................................................................................................................................
m ass 299
Maxim um m ass..........................................................................................................................................................
flow rate 299
Maxim um plum ..........................................................................................................................................................
e height 299
Maxim um range..........................................................................................................................................................
of fragm ent 299
Maxim um release
..........................................................................................................................................................
duration 299
Maxim um tem ..........................................................................................................................................................
perature difference 299
Meteorological..........................................................................................................................................................
Data 300
Minim um Averaging
..........................................................................................................................................................
Tim e 300
Mixing Height .......................................................................................................................................................... 301
Model valid until
..........................................................................................................................................................
tim e 301
Molecular Form..........................................................................................................................................................
ula 301
n value .......................................................................................................................................................... 302
Net m ass rained
..........................................................................................................................................................
out 302
NO2 conversion..........................................................................................................................................................
rate 302
Num ber of pieces
.......................................................................................................................................................... 303
Offset betw een
..........................................................................................................................................................
release location and LEL 303
Offset betw een
..........................................................................................................................................................
release point and cloud centre 303
Outcom e Phenom
..........................................................................................................................................................
ena 303
Outdoor concentration
.......................................................................................................................................................... 304
Outflow angle ..........................................................................................................................................................
in XZ plane (0°=horizontal ; 90°=vertical) 304
Outflow tim e.......................................................................................................................................................... 304
Output m essage
..........................................................................................................................................................
level 304
Overpressure ..........................................................................................................................................................
above liquid 305
Pasquill stability
..........................................................................................................................................................
class 305
Peak dynam ic ..........................................................................................................................................................
pressure at Xd 306
Peak overpressure
..........................................................................................................................................................
at Xd 306
Peak pressure ..........................................................................................................................................................
inside dam age 306
Penetration factor
.......................................................................................................................................................... 306
© 2018 TNO
10 RISKCURVES
Percentage of..........................................................................................................................................................
m ortality 306
Perform m axim
..........................................................................................................................................................
um concentration vs. distance graph 306
Perform tim e-dependent
..........................................................................................................................................................
explosive graphs 307
Perform toxic..........................................................................................................................................................
contour plot 307
Perform toxic..........................................................................................................................................................
indoors calculation 307
Pipe contraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
coefficient 307
Pipeline diam..........................................................................................................................................................
eter 307
Pipeline length
.......................................................................................................................................................... 308
Pipeline roughness
.......................................................................................................................................................... 309
Pipeline volum
..........................................................................................................................................................
e 309
Plum e shape.......................................................................................................................................................... 309
Pool surface.......................................................................................................................................................... 310
Pool tem perature
.......................................................................................................................................................... 310
Pool thickness
.......................................................................................................................................................... 310
Poolfire calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
type 311
Population polygon
.......................................................................................................................................................... 312
Positive phase
..........................................................................................................................................................
duration at Xd 312
Predefined concentration
.......................................................................................................................................................... 313
Predefined w..........................................................................................................................................................
ind direction 313
Pressure at pipe
..........................................................................................................................................................
exit at tim e t 313
Pressure at tim
..........................................................................................................................................................
eT 313
Pressure dam ..........................................................................................................................................................
age based on 314
Pressure dam ..........................................................................................................................................................
age Probits 314
Pressure lethality
..........................................................................................................................................................
relation 315
Pressure im..........................................................................................................................................................
pulse at Xd 315
Pressure in vessel
..........................................................................................................................................................
at tim e t 315
Pressure inside
..........................................................................................................................................................
vessel determ ination 316
Pressure level
..........................................................................................................................................................
total destruction 316
Pressure level
..........................................................................................................................................................
indoors dam age (glass) 316
Probabilty FlashAndExplosion
.......................................................................................................................................................... 316
Projection System
..........................................................................................................................................................
s 316
Protection factor
..........................................................................................................................................................
clothing 317
Radial distance
..........................................................................................................................................................
from release (Yd) 317
Radius at m axim
..........................................................................................................................................................
um plum e rise 318
Radius of flashfire
.......................................................................................................................................................... 318
Radius of the..........................................................................................................................................................
fireball 318
Rainout m ass.......................................................................................................................................................... 319
Related lethal
..........................................................................................................................................................
fraction for peak overpressure 319
Related lethal
..........................................................................................................................................................
fraction for peak overpressure_2 319
Release location
.......................................................................................................................................................... 320
Reporting tim..........................................................................................................................................................
e cloud 320
Representative
..........................................................................................................................................................
density 320
Representative
..........................................................................................................................................................
outflow duration 320
Representative
..........................................................................................................................................................
pool radius 321
Representative
..........................................................................................................................................................
pressure 321
Representative
..........................................................................................................................................................
release rate 321
Representative
..........................................................................................................................................................
tem perature 321
Representative
..........................................................................................................................................................
vapour m ass fraction 322
Response fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
indoors 322
Response fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
outdoors 322
Room volum..........................................................................................................................................................
e 322
Roughness length
..........................................................................................................................................................
description 322
Shape Definition
.......................................................................................................................................................... 323
Solar Radiation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Flux 324
Sound speed..........................................................................................................................................................
in liquid phase 325
Speed of released
..........................................................................................................................................................
chem ical at the source 325
Spray calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
type 325
Standard deviation
..........................................................................................................................................................
of turbulent velocity in vertical and horizontal direction 326
© 2018 TNO
Contents 11
Standard pipe ..........................................................................................................................................................

roughness 326
Start of exposure
..........................................................................................................................................................
(after m om ent of release) 326
Step size for..........................................................................................................................................................
contour searching 327
Subsoil / w ater
..........................................................................................................................................................
tem perature 328
Subsoil Roughness
.......................................................................................................................................................... 328
Subsoil type .......................................................................................................................................................... 328
Surface area..........................................................................................................................................................
of a cylinder 328
Surface area..........................................................................................................................................................
of shape 329
Surface em issive
..........................................................................................................................................................
pow er (actual) 330
Surface em issive
..........................................................................................................................................................
pow er (m ax) 330
Take protective
..........................................................................................................................................................
effects of clothing into account? 331
Tem perature..........................................................................................................................................................
after release 331
Tem perature..........................................................................................................................................................
at pipe exit at tim e t 331
Tem perature..........................................................................................................................................................
at Sd 331
Tem perature..........................................................................................................................................................
at tim e T 332
Tem perature..........................................................................................................................................................
Tem perature..........................................................................................................................................................
of the pool 332
Tem perature..........................................................................................................................................................
vapour/liquid 332
Threshold concentration
.......................................................................................................................................................... 333
Threshold fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
of m ortality F 333
Threshold heat..........................................................................................................................................................
radiation level 333
Threshold overpressure
.......................................................................................................................................................... 333
Threshold toxic
..........................................................................................................................................................
dose D 334
Tilt angle central
..........................................................................................................................................................
axis flare (ab) 334
Tim e needed..........................................................................................................................................................
to em pty pipe (extrapolated) 334
Tim e needed..........................................................................................................................................................
to em pty vessel 335
Tim e pool has..........................................................................................................................................................
evaporated 335
Tim e pool spreading
..........................................................................................................................................................
ends 335
Tim e t after cloud
..........................................................................................................................................................
arrival 335
Tim e t after start
..........................................................................................................................................................
release 335
Total com bustion
..........................................................................................................................................................
energy 335
Total m ass in..........................................................................................................................................................
cloud 336
Total m ass in..........................................................................................................................................................
explosive range 336
Total m ass in..........................................................................................................................................................
vessel 336
Total m ass involved
..........................................................................................................................................................
in BLEVE 336
Total m ass of..........................................................................................................................................................
decom posable chem ical in vessel 337
Total m ass released
.......................................................................................................................................................... 337
Total m ass released
..........................................................................................................................................................
at tim e t 337
Toxic dose indoors
.......................................................................................................................................................... 337
Toxic dose outdoors
.......................................................................................................................................................... 338
Toxic Exposure..........................................................................................................................................................
Duration 338
Toxic Exposure..........................................................................................................................................................
Duration based on 339
Toxic Inhalation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Heigth 340
Transition tim..........................................................................................................................................................
e to vapour flow 340
Turbulent Free..........................................................................................................................................................
Jet Pressure 341
Type of calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 341
Type of confinem
..........................................................................................................................................................
ent 341
Type of flow ..........................................................................................................................................................
inside the vessel 342
Type of flow ..........................................................................................................................................................
of the jet 342
Type of pool.......................................................................................................................................................... 343
Type of release
.......................................................................................................................................................... 343
Type of spreading
.......................................................................................................................................................... 344
Type of subsoil
.......................................................................................................................................................... 344
Type of vapour..........................................................................................................................................................
release calculation 345
Type of TNT equivalency
.......................................................................................................................................................... 345
Typical obstacle
..........................................................................................................................................................
diam eter 345
Use 50% LEL.......................................................................................................................................................... 346
Use dynam ic..........................................................................................................................................................
concentration 346
© 2018 TNO
12 RISKCURVES
Use doublesided
..........................................................................................................................................................
outflow 346
Use Gam e overpressure
.......................................................................................................................................................... 346
Use m ass betw..........................................................................................................................................................
een LEL and UEL 347
Use Singapore ..........................................................................................................................................................
block m ode 347
Use w hich representative
..........................................................................................................................................................
step 349
Used sauter ..........................................................................................................................................................
m ean diam eter 350
User com m ent.......................................................................................................................................................... 350
Vapour tem perature
..........................................................................................................................................................
after expansion 350
Ventilation rate
..........................................................................................................................................................
at daytim e 351
Ventilation rate
..........................................................................................................................................................
at nighttim e 351
Ventilation ratio
.......................................................................................................................................................... 351
Vessel em ptying
..........................................................................................................................................................
duration 351
Vessel Type.......................................................................................................................................................... 351
Vessel Volum ..........................................................................................................................................................
e 352
View factor .......................................................................................................................................................... 352
Volum e Blockage
..........................................................................................................................................................
Ratio 353
Volum etric fraction
..........................................................................................................................................................
of chem ical at release point 354
Water tem perature
.......................................................................................................................................................... 354
Weight ratio ..........................................................................................................................................................
of CO2/chem ical 354
Weight ratio ..........................................................................................................................................................
of H2O/chem ical 354
Weight ratio ..........................................................................................................................................................
of HCl/chem ical 354
Weight ratio ..........................................................................................................................................................
of NO2/chem ical 354
Weight ratio ..........................................................................................................................................................
of SO2/chem ical 354
Width of cloud..........................................................................................................................................................
(betw een LEL) 354
Width of frustum
..........................................................................................................................................................
base (W1) 355
Width of frustum
..........................................................................................................................................................
tip (W2) 355
Width of toxic..........................................................................................................................................................
contour 356
Wind com es ..........................................................................................................................................................
from (North = 0 degrees) 356
Wind direction..........................................................................................................................................................
for dam age 356
Wind speed at ..........................................................................................................................................................
10m height 357
X or Z offset ..........................................................................................................................................................
dispersion 357
X, Y - coordinates
..........................................................................................................................................................
of release 357
Z - coordinate..........................................................................................................................................................
(height) of release 357
6 Risk ...................................................................................................................................
parameters 357
Base frequency.......................................................................................................................................................... 357
Bleve fraction.......................................................................................................................................................... 358
Cell size for ..........................................................................................................................................................
risk grids 358
Cell size for ..........................................................................................................................................................
population grids 358
Chance delayed..........................................................................................................................................................
ignition 359
Chance direct ..........................................................................................................................................................
ignition 359
Create Societal
..........................................................................................................................................................
Risk Maps 360
Cum ulate transport
..........................................................................................................................................................
routes 360
Fraction frequency
..........................................................................................................................................................
in daytim e hours 360
Fraction w ith..........................................................................................................................................................
explosion phenom ena 361
Frequency Correction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Factor 361
Frequency equally
..........................................................................................................................................................
distributed day/night 361
Inter accident..........................................................................................................................................................
distance FN 361
Inter accident..........................................................................................................................................................
distance FX 362
Is tem porary..........................................................................................................................................................
(population) 362
Level interpolation
..........................................................................................................................................................
m ethod 362
Low est significant
..........................................................................................................................................................
frequency 363
Maxim um accident
..........................................................................................................................................................
points per route 363
Maxim um toxic..........................................................................................................................................................
exposure duration 363
Meteorological..........................................................................................................................................................
Daytim e Fraction 364
Num ber subsectors
..........................................................................................................................................................
FN 364
Num ber subsectors
..........................................................................................................................................................
FX 364
Perform societal
..........................................................................................................................................................
risk calculation 365
.......................................................................................................................................................... 365
© 2018 TNO
Contents 13
Utilisation fraction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 365
Chapter VI Appendices 367

1 List of
...................................................................................................................................
chemicals 367
2 Low ...................................................................................................................................
level error messages 368
3 Known
...................................................................................................................................
limitations 370
Index 371
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 15
1 Introduction
This manual is delivered in Adobe’s PDF-format and as CHM help file format. You are free to
print the manual for your own use with respect to the license conditions of the software.
You can access this manual directly from within the software from the “Help” menu or via the
installed entry in the Windows START-menu.
If you discover any omissions, errors or inconsistencies, we kindly ask you to contact us
directly via email (helpdesk.riskcurves@tno.nl) or use the built-in email feature accessible
from the “About” box.
1.1 TNO software products

TNO Department of Industrial and External Safety delivers two different software products:
EFFECTS and RISKCURVES. This manual describes the RISKCURVES version 10 product
that is currently available for Quantitative Risk Analysis.
EFFECTS
EFFECTS performs calculations to predict the physical effects (gas concentrations, heat
radiation levels, peak overpressure's etc.) of the escape of hazardous materials. Results are
presented in either textual or graphical format. Furthermore it is equipped with an internal GIS
viewer (Geographic Information System) that enables the user to present the calculation
results of effect and consequence calculations on a map background.
Models in EFFECTS are based upon the Yellow Book, third edition, second print 2005 [1] or
may have been adapted to more recent theoretical insights. Background information about the
source of the model is provided through the menu option "Help"- "Model documentation".
EFFECTS can also model complex releases by linking individual models in such a way that
they describe all physical phenomena that may occur during that release. For example a
liquid release will consist of a release model, connected to an evaporation model, which is
then linked to a dispersion model that calculates the concentration profiles in the environment.
Finally it might be linked to an explosion model to calculate the ultimate effects due to peak
overpressure's or heat radiation if the chemical is flammable and ignites.
RISKCURVES
RISKCURVES is a full-featured computer program to perform Quantitative Risk Analysis
(QRA). It is capable of calculating geographical risk, offsite societal risk, injury risk, onsite
societal risk and personal individual risk. Transport risk is supported for all types of risk.
RISKCURVES can analyse risk by means of the most dominant contributor, construct all
types of societal and individual risk curves, display risk contours, calculate transport risk per
kilometer of route and export relevant data to GIS (Geographical Information Systems) like
ArcView and ArcInfo.
More information about RISKCURVES can be obtained from our sales department.
Contact via email: info.riskcurves@tno.nl or http://www.tno.nl/RISKCURVES.
© 2018 TNO
16 RISKCURVES
YAWS and licensed DIPPR database

EFFECTS and RISKCURVES both come with a standard database, containing YAWS and
(licensed) DIPPR chemical substance properties. The DIPPR database, with over 2000
chemicals, is licensed and contains DIPPR 2010 and DIPPR 2015 sources. TNO
recommends the use of the latest extended DIPPR database, but be aware that, because
values of typical properties (like LEL, Lower Explosion Limits) may have changed in
subsequent versions, it is possible that the latest database version will create slightly different
answers.
DIPPR includes "Non ideal gas" behaviour
Because the DIPPR database contains a "Second Virial Coefficient", which describes the non
ideal (compressibility) behaviour of a chemical, results of calculation with the DIPPR
databases may differ from YAWS based calculation, especially in the case of gas release
calculations.
Throughout this manual, the acronym DIPPR is used to denote the extended database. The
Design Institute for Physical Property Data and its acronym DIPPR® are registered
trademarks of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers (AIChE®) and are used by
permission.
1.2 Installation
1.2.1 System requirements
RISKCURVES 10 is developed for the Windows 7/8/10 OS platforms. There are no special
requirements with respect to memory or disk space other than a free USB-port to
accommodate the protection key. For more complex calculations, RISKCURVES benefits
from additional internal memory and a faster processor. RISKCURVES 10 runs on Windows
7/8/10 64-bit as a 32 bit application and has been thoroughly tested on 64 bit environment.
1.2.2 The protection key

To prevent unauthorised use, the software is protected with a special protection key
(“dongle”). The dongle should be connected to a free USB-port of the PC during use of
RISKCURVES. The protection key represents the ownership of the license and will only be
replaced by TNO if proven defective. In case of loss or theft of the key, replacement is the
sole responsibility of the user.
The protection key is remotely programmable by TNO and contains information about the
owner and specification of the granted license (program, version, options etc.). Before its first
use or if the license conditions change (due to the purchase of an upgrade or additional
option), the key will need to be reprogrammed once. This process requires access to email
functionality and instructions will be included with the delivery of the software.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 17
1.2.3 Installation and de-installation

Installing and de-installing the software needs sufficient administrative rights to do so. You
may need to contact your IT-department for support on this requirement. Apart from
installation, administrative right are not required.
The software comes with a full-featured setup program. Please follow the instructions
carefully and make sure the protection key is NOT inserted during installation. The default
driver for the protection key that is installed is from “Hasp/Sentinel”. If the same driver but in a
newer version is required by another software program, the installation for RISKCURVES can
be omitted. If in that situation RSIKCURVES does not recognise the protection key correctly,
please contact the TNO helpdesk: helpdesk.riskcurves@tno.nl
De-installation is done by selecting the appropriate entry in the installed program group under
the Windows START menu. Alternatively, one can use the "Uninstall" option within the
"Programs" group in the windows control panel.
1.2.4 Upgrading from version 9

RISKCURVES 10 uses a slightly modified project file structure, which is recognized by its
new file extension <.RISX> . In the file load dialog, it is possible to select the file type old
<Riskcurves> file extension, enabling an automatically translation process, creating a new
file.
However Since RISKCURVES 10 now uses a real world projection system, all location
related data may need to be converted to work correctly. As of version 10, coordinates of
equipment, positioning of background maps etc. are at an absolute position in a specific GIS
projection system. Version 9 was positioning everything relative to a self defined origine,
usually a (0,0) coordinate.
Upon opening a RIKSCURVES 9 project, an import wizard will be opening, guiding the user in
importing, because this translation requires an important decision with respect to the
projection system applicable to the project.
If the version 9 project contains societal risk calculations which are based on an imported
grid, it is strongly advised to use the default recommendation by the software .
The conversion to a known GIS system may lead to some loss of detail of the
population grid.
© 2018 TNO
18 RISKCURVES
Option 1: No conversion: All the coordinates are within the range of 20 km of a (0,0)
coordinate. Everything remains unchanged and a default mercator projection system is used.
Option 2: Move to (0,0): Coordinates withing the project have higher values than
(20000,20000) meters from origin. To avoid any deviation with the original calculations due to
projection system translations, all geographic data is translated to a new (0,0) coordinate
located at the lower left of the study area. After selecting this option, the user has the
possibility to adjust the new origin to a coordinate within the boundaries of the project area.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 19
Option 3: Convert from a known GIS system: In this case, the user have been defining all
equipment locations in a well defined projection system. This will remain the original
coordinates and utilize a fixed system.
1.2.5 Upgrading from older versions

To import projects that were created with version 7, two steps are necessary to convert the
project to the format towards RISKCURVES 9. Note that the previously stored calculation
results will not be included in the converted project. In cases where a calculation model has
newly added input parameters in the converted version, these fields will show up empty.
Pressing “Defaults” will fill-in the default values without overwriting the already entered fields.
Upgrading from RISKCURVES 7
Projects
RISKCURVES differs in project file format from RISKCURVES 7. The new files are identified
by their “.riskcurves” extension. The RISKCURVES 7 project files use the “.clc” extension.
To use RISKCURVES 7 projects in RISKCURVES 9, they need to be converted with the

RISKCURVES Project Converter. The converter can be started from the Windows START
menu under “RISKCURVES ”, or in the Windows file explorer by right-clicking on an
RISKCURVES 7 project file and selecting “convert”.
Once the required RISKCURVES 7 project file is selected, clicking the “Convert” button will
create a new project file suitable for RISKCURVES in a definable project folder. The original
RISKCURVES 7 file will not be overwritten. All input needed to recalculate will be included,
including population and meteo definition. Rresults are not converted since they are probably
not valid since the calculation accuracy and method has changed.
Note that some models in RISKCURVES 9 require additional parameters compared to

RISKCURVES 7. Furthermore, the damage definitions have more strict checking on the
definitions than the previous consequence interfaces. The new RISKCURVES now requires
to use increasing distances for decreasing lethality levels. Due to this test, some translated
scenario's might be presented in red, indicating wrong or missing input.
By default all scenarios with input data will be converted.
© 2018 TNO
20 RISKCURVES
User defined chemicals

RISKCURVES 9 uses a new database model. User chemicals defined in previous versions
have to be converted using the Database Converter. This converter can be found in the start-
menu "Chemicals Converter".
To convert user defined chemicals from your old database (.rdb file), start the converter and
click 'Open File'. Select the database file with your user defined chemicals and click 'Open'.
You can now select chemicals in the left-hand list, and drag them (or click the '>>' button) to
the right-hand list: this will import the selected chemicals into the new database labeled as
user-defined chemical. The right-hand list will show you all chemicals in the new user
database.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 21
The filter field can be used to search for chemicals.
If you've imported too much chemicals by mistake, you can delete them later in the Database
Editor.
Upgrading from RISKCURVES 4 (DOS version)
There is no build-in support for RISKCURVES project older than version 7.
To be able to use version 4 input files, it is advised to convert these input files by the update
procedure of RISKCURVES 7 itself. This will provide a RISKCURVES 7 (.clc and .inf) format
file, which can be read within the new RISKCURVES 9.
© 2018 TNO
22 RISKCURVES
1.3 What is RISKCURVES

RISKCURVES is a computer program package to perform a Quantitative Risk Assessment
(QRA) for activities with hazardous materials. “Risk” is defined in this context as the
probability per unit of time (frequency) that humans in the vicinity of the hazardous material
may suffer lethal consequences due to an unwanted release.
A Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA) analyses the risks of accidents involving with
dangerous substances, resulting in lethal victims, injuries and/or material damage to
surroundings. In order to be able to compare risks, quantitative values are given for Individual
Risks and Societal Risk.
RISKCURVES uses an intuitive modular approach, allowing the use of topographic maps or
aerial pictures to define potential “Loss of Containment Scenarios”. Advanced geographic
presentations can be created by using the internal GIS presentation system. Based upon the
Yellow Book [1], Green Book [2], and Purple Book [3], the effect and consequence models
included within RISKCURVES provide a sound, scientific and transparent basis to perform a
QRA.
The number of degrees of freedom for a QRA is huge. The publication CPR 18E (Purple
book: Guidelines for quantitative risk assessment) provides important guidelines on choosing
equipment, (Loss of Containment) scenario’s to be evaluated, effect-calculation models and
background information like meteorological data.
Al information from this Purple Book is implemented within RISKCURVES, providing a

coherent and consistent QRA calculation tool.
1.3.1 Which task can RISKCURVES perform

In a QRA specific accident scenarios are defined, specifying subsequent events. For
example: an outflow, pool formation, evaporation, dispersion eventually leading to lethal
effects.
The calculation of chances and effects of the identified events will lead to quantitative values
for Individual Risks , Consequence Risks and Societal Risks. Individual Risk are usually
presented as “Iso Risk Contours”: lines on a topographic map which represent point with
equal PR value: e.g. the 10-6 contour.
RISKCURVES is capable of performing physical effect, probability and consequence

calculations to calculate individual , consequence and societal risk. It can also calculate risk
caused by the transport of hazardous materials. It facilitates data entry and presentation of
the results by using a highly visual approach. Results are presented by means of individual
risk contours, societal risk curves (FN-curves) and optionally provides Societal Risk Maps. (A
Societal Risk Map is a visualisation of the societal risk at a specific location: illustrating either
absolute level or relative contribution at that location).
The number of degrees of freedom for a QRA is huge. The publication CPR 18E (Purple
book: Guidelines for quantitative risk assessment) provides important guidelines on choosing
equipment (so-called sub selection method), the typical "Loss of Containment" scenario’s to
be evaluated, effect-calculation models and background information like meteorological data.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 23
1.3.2 What is the required input

The typical questions to be raised when performing a QRA are the “What” and “Where”
questions: What are the typical Loss Of Containment (LOC) scenarios, and where are they
situated. The geographic location of the scenario will also determine the specific
environmental parameters: temperature, pressure, humidity, surface roughness (influencing
dispersion) and meteorological data (probability of wind coming from specific direction with
specific speed and specific stability class).
Within CPR-18, it is prescribed which equipments and which scenarios should be evaluated
within a QRA. Within RISKCURVES, the user can simply add any equipment which is present
within the system boundaries of the site to be studied. The location of the equipment needs to
be provided as equipment coordinates or a route. It is strongly advised to use a digital
background map of the area as underground. Once the equipment is positioned,
RISKCURVES can add the corresponding LOC scenarios (G1, G2, G3), including the failure
rate frequencies and event or phenomena dependent probabilities.
A LOC scenario is provided as a pre-calculated consequence zone, called footprint definition

(previous version used the indistinctive term “Consequence Interface”) or as a consequence
calculation model. For the latter case, EFFECTS consequence models are being used within
the calculation core of RISKCURVES. It is also possible to copy / paste EFFECTS end model
calculations into a RISKCURVES scenario.
In general, the following information is required to perform a QRA:
1. Definition of one or more accident scenario(s) which includes the applicable frequencies of
the accident scenarios. RISKCURVES distinguishes an equipment: containing the location
of a possible event, the possible scenario's at that equipment: defining the frequencies,
and an underlying modelset: defining the damage zones.
2. Definition of Meteorological probability distributions: this includes stability class / wind

directions; for multiple stability classes (Pasquill A..F) and wind sectors. When unknown,
a standard (equal) distribution can be used.
3. It is very convenient (but not obliged) to use a digital background map to position the
scenarios and use as a background layer when presenting results.
4. Environmental conditions typical for the location of the study area (temperatures, humidity,
solar radiation) need to be provided.
5. Vulnerability conditions describe relations between phenomena and resulting damage

(lethality).
6. In case of societal risk calculations you will need a population distribution
1.3.3 What kind of results are obtained?

RISKCURVES will perform all chance, effect- and damage/consequence calculations
according to CPR 18E, and will calculate the Individual Risk and Societal Risk.
A person who is on a specific location will have a chance to be a lethal victim of an accident
at installation A and an accident at location B. Both chances can be added together and
presented on a geographic map as Iso Risk Contours.
© 2018 TNO
24 RISKCURVES
The individual risk criteria assumes 100% presence and an unprotected situation outside. A
so-called “Iso Risk Contour” can be drawn by connecting all points with equal Individual Risk.
The Individual Risk can also be presented in a so-called FX curve, which presents the fraction
lethal versus distance from the release point, for different wind-directions.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 25
Risk contours are available on the level of a calculation set, cumulation sets, comparison sets
and individual equipments.
A Risk transect can be provide for a specific line track. Such a transect will provide the risk as
a function of the place along this track.
Apart from illustrating the the chance on lethality, it is also possible to show the chance of a
specific consequence level occurring, as shown in Consequence Risks.
The Consequence Risk (CR) is defined as the chance per year that specified threshold
levels for a combination of physical effects (overpressure, exceeding heat radiation, toxic load
or being exposed to a flammable cloud) are being exceeded. The resulting CR Contours on a
map present locations were the CR has identical values.
Where individual risk contours illustrate the chance of lethality on a location, consequence
level contours illustrate the chance that either a specific pressure level, heat radiation level,
toxic concentration threshold or flammability limit is getting exceeded. This particular
information is used in facility siting (positioning of buildings and constructions showing the
chance of them being exposed to a specific effect level) and potential injury risk evaluation.
© 2018 TNO
26 RISKCURVES
As of version 10.1, the risks for heat radiation, overpressure, toxic concentration and LFL
exposure are being aggregated, IF multiple phenomena are being selected. Furthermore, it is
possible to define multiple (independent) consequence risks, with different threshold levels.
Each consequence definition should be given a unique descriptive name, which will be used
in the legend
A consequence risk calculation can be added to the project by selecting the "Consequence
risk" node and <right mouse> selecting "Add consequence risk".
This will add a specific consequence risk definition node allowing to define the specific
threshold levels, for which exceeding contours are generated.
The specific levels of interest to be shown in the contours must be defined as a

Consequence risk definition where heat load, overpressure and toxic risks can be
aggregated.
The associated risk contours will be presented on the map using the same color codes as
individual risk.
If the associated contour dimensions of specified weatherclasses need to be reported, the

same threshold values can be entered in presentation settings. Each individual weather
class model will show associated contours and contour dimensions.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 27
So called analysis points can be added a any location to present Risk Ranking reports at that
spot. Such a report will present a ranking of all scenarios based on their contribution to the
(individual) risk at that point.
The Societal Risk Curve (FN-curve) presents the cumulated risk that a group of specific size
will be killed. The FN curve is depicted as a two dimension graph, using a logarithmic scale
on frequency F (Y-axis) and number of victims N (X-axis) axis’s. The curve is interpreted
using a “Guide value”, which is a line that should preferably not be crossed. RISKCURVES
will present a “Guide Ratio R” value, indicating the distance to this guide value (a guide ratio
>1 implies exceeding the guide line), and also presents the “Expected value E” which is the
size of the area below the FN curve.
A FN curve appears to be not very easy to understand or explain. The curve is the result of
spatially distributed risk sources that may influence a geographically distributed population
distribution, whereas the result only present a curve. Questions that often raise are: “Do we
have a problem” and “Where is this problem” or “What is causing this problem”. To be able
to answer these kind of questions, a Societal Risk Map was developed and these
presentations are now available within RISKCURVES.
Two different maps can be presented: the SR area map, which indicates whether the guide
ratio is higher than one on a specific spot. The SR area map illustrates affected zones, and
height of the societal risk at a specific spot.
© 2018 TNO
28 RISKCURVES
SR (Societal Risk) Maps is basically a geographical "Area Specific Societal Risk"

presentation of a societal risk, being a two dimensional curve.
As a result of the demand for a visualization of the societal risk, a new type of presentation
was developed in 2007. The question was raised when a societal risk calculation is fed with
geographical based information on population, and geographical based scenario locations,
why can we not see a geographical distribution of the societal risk.
Such a presentation would be very convenient for emergency response (were are the people
who are threatened by accident) or urban planning activities (how much space left for
population without exceeding societal risk limits: the guide value)
To provide answers to both question two types of graphs were developed: the Societal Risk
Area Map and the Societal Risk Contribution map.
The Societal Risk Area map gives an indication of which areas are affected and
the height of the risk
whereas
The Societal risk Contribution Map gives an indication which cells contribute
to the societal risk
The bases for the presentation is that every grid cell from the population grid has its own FN
curve. In the case of the Contribution map, this curve relates to the victims within this
population cell. The higher the risk of this cell (expressed as the expected value of the curve)
the more red the color will be.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 29
For the contribution map, the expected value is used to translate the two dimensional FN
graph into a color. The type of coloring can be adjusted, it appears that using a 6 color levels
(use legend ) provides the best contrast, but other coloring might improve the visualization.
© 2018 TNO
30 RISKCURVES
This way the curve represents the full societal risk of scenario's for the area. Note that this
area bounded FN curve will never exceed the overall FN curve for all cells.
For the societal Risk Maps it is important to understand that the risk is determined from the
receivers point of view (instead of from source).
Furthermore, because of the nature of the method, cumulating of various risk sources is
possible: transport & stationary installations, small & large scenario’s
The idea behind this new type of visualisation is that this provides a supplementary view of
what is happening, and the maps facilitate considering societal risk in early stage of planning
process:
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 31
- the SR Area map shows areas with restrictions
- the SR Contribution map shows which areas contribute most (emergency response)
© 2018 TNO
32 RISKCURVES
The underlying FN graphs per location, that are use to derive these map presentations, are
presented for every "Analysis (risk ranking) point". The societal risk at the location will display
the FN curve of all scenarios that are affecting this location, the contribution FN graph will
display the FN curve for the population within the population grid cell.
1.4 What's new in version 10

RISKCURVES 10 was revised in a number of fields. Note that the file extension is now .RISX
and version 9 files will be automatically upgraded into the new file format.
First of all, the GIS presentation system (MAP view) now supports the use of coordinate
projection systems which means that when loading existing Vs 9 projects, a decision needs
to be made which system to use.
See Upgrading from version 9 for choices to make during upgrading.
Apart from background maps that are loaded from file background maps can now be
streamed from internet based tile servers .
Secondly, some important features were added to the consequence models , most
significantly the possibility to work with Mixtures, and the corresponding new Chemical
database structure now separating user defined chemicals from "official records" and
allowing to include records various user or company specific files.
Apart from the additions of coordinate projection systems and possibility of defining chemical
mixtures, several consequence models have been adapted as well
The reporting of results has been improved by adding a fully customizable "export
consequence data" and "export contour dimensions" tool.
In version 10.1 the consequence risk calculation has been extended with the possibility to
derive consequence risks for multiple levels, and the possibility to aggregate risk of heat
radiation, overpressure, toxic concentration or LFL cloud exposure. Some countries use
these combined consequence risks as "Injury risk" or "Escalation risk"
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 33
Furthermore, version 10.1 renamed the "damage definition" to a "lethality definition". Apart
from this lethality (footprint) definition, users can now also add a "consequence definition"
which allows to define distance to physical threshold levels. These new consequence
definitions can be applied to calculate both individual risk (using vulnerability settings to
translate into lethality) AND consequence risks. The previous available option to use "block
level" footprint has moved to an option in vulnerability settings to select "Use Singapore block-
mode"
1.4.1 Chemical database structure

One of the biggest enhancements of RISKCURVES 10 is its ability to work with chemical
mixtures, including the support for multiple user defined databases. To be able to provide
these features, the chemical editor layout has been redesigned.
The first thing to be aware of, when starting to work with version 10, is the fact that settings
(<Edit>,<Options>) now contains a chemical database manager that potentially allows
multiple selections for database files to use!
© 2018 TNO
34 RISKCURVES
Upon selecting the browse buttons indicated above, the list of database files will be
presented. By default, the software will be equipped with a file called "ChemicalDatabase.tci"
containing all official DIPPR and YAWS substances.
However, the user should always add at least one "user definable" file, on a location where
write access is available! All modifications on existing chemicals, or additions of mixtures, will
be stored in this user specific file.
Note: When multiple user defined storage files are provided, the last (bottom) one in this list
will act as the active storage file for standard modifications and is illustrated in bold
characters. Chemical records from other files will be available for selection, but standard
modifications (additions, copies or defined mixtures) will be put in this bold active "user file".
When using multiple database locations, the active user file can be selected using the <up>
<down> buttons on the right of the screen.
All database that have an asterisk in front of the name are potentially writable, and can be
used to store user defined copies (use copy chemical to.. to store into specific user files). If a
user database file is write protected, it cannot be used to store modifications and copies of
chemicals . Any modifications to records that are already in a writable database will be made
in the original database. If a specific user database needs to be protected (for instance
because it is a company specific list), the administrator should add a "Read only" property to
these databases. This will result in having modifications stored in the remaining active "User
file" (bold name), and not in the original data file.
The idea behind the possibility to include multiple chemical databases is that users can share
company specific files (e.g. from network locations) whereas user modifications will be stored
in user specific files.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 35
If a user has been defining "user defined chemicals" in RISKCURVES version 9, these
records can be transferred to the new separated user file. Please refer to the chapter
"Converting version 9 user chemicals" if user defined chemical definitions need to be
translated into version 10.
New layout for Chemical Editor
Once the chemical editor is opened (by selecting the toolbar button or clicking the browse
button behind a chemical input field) a modified database editor will be presented.
First of all, the interface now contains a selection possibility to define the "sources" of
chemicals to be displayed. The standard database will contain DIPPR 2010, DIPPR 2015,
and YAWS (1999) databases. Apart from these, a dedicated TNO source containing water
and air (used inside models) is provided. As soon as the user changes or add properties to
existing DIPPR or YAWS records, "User defined [date]" sources will be created and
selectable.
Secondly, mixtures can be now defined in this editor: Either by selecting chemicals and
selecting "Add to mixture" or be defined by dragging a chemical to the "Mixture" panel at the
bottom of the screen.
User can also create "copies" of existing chemicals, or "create" mixtures. These new
chemicals will be added to a "User Defined" source. When using the right mouse button, a
popup menu will appear showing "Copy chemical", "Add to Mixture", "Add Property", "Add
Synonym" or "Change F2":
© 2018 TNO
36 RISKCURVES
The Name box allows the user to enter a text (e.g. "chlori") part to use as a filter on the
chemicals.
The Show field is expandable and allows selecting "Flammables", "Toxics" or "All" also
filtering sets of chemicals.
Sources provide check boxes can be used to limit the sources to include in the search.
The user can expand the selected chemical by pressing the tree node, which will reveal the
typical properties.
A Mixture can also be defined by dragging a chemical to the "Mixture" panel at the bottom of
the screen. If components have been added to a mixture, the user needs to define the amount
of the component in the mixture. This can be based both on Molar fraction AND on mass
fraction (use right mouse button to select either mass or moles). The parts don't have to
combine to 100 but the fraction will be corrected to the total number of parts.
After selecting <Apply> a name for the mixture needs to be provided and the Chemical
mixture will be stored in the user database.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 37
1.4.2 Mixtures
Mixtures are defined as combinations of chemicals. Many of the substances used in (petro)
chemical operations are no pure substances, but mixtures of multiple components, especially
hydrocarbons, and for that reason play an important role in consequence modelling.
As of RISKCURVES version 10 the functionality for definition and usage of (user defined)
combinations of chemicals components was added.
For this purpose the chemical database editor has been redesigned, now allowing to create
(define) and edit mixtures.
By default, RISKCURVES 10 contains some typical sample mixtures like "Gasoline, Kerosine,
Fuel Oil, Crude, LPG, Low Caloric natural gas". However, because these substances typically
may have locally deviating compositions, it might be required to adjust or redefine those
typical hydrocarbon mixtures.
1.4.2.1 Limitations for mixtures
RISKCURVES uses straightforward mixing rules to derive properties of mixtures. Many

properties will be calculated using an "ideal mixing rule" which means the mixture property
is derived as a ratio of the molar fraction (or mass based if the property is mass based) of
each of the components. Depending on the property value, the mixing rule may be specifically
be tuned (see calculation method properties)
One should keep in mind that these mixing rule DO NOT TAKE INTO ACCOUNT so-called
binary interaction coefficients, nor account for chemical reactions or absorption effects, and
are thus not reliable for typical polar mixtures! This particularly means that mixtures like
Ammonia/Water etc. can still hardly be modelled.
Another limitation is the fact that inside the models, we assume a CONSTANT
COMPOSITION. Especially in (pool) evaporation, one should expect the most volatile
components to be the first to evaporate, eventually leading to a time dependent changing
composition of both the evaporated mass and the remaining pool (liquid) . Please note that
RISKCURVES can not deal with a time varying compositions, so the mixture is to be
assumed to have a constant composition, even for gas and liquid phase.
Furthermore, it appeared that usage of chemical mixtures may also lead to MULTIPHASE
mixtures: one component may be solidified (lower that triple point / melting point) whereas
other components are in liquid or even vapour state. Especially because mixtures typically
have a boiling region, instead of ONE boiling point, liquid vapour equilibrium now can be a
temperature range. Typically, liquid/vapour combinations can be handled, but solid/liquid
mixtures will give a warning, and (pool) evaporation will stop if the "ideal mixing based" melting
point is reached. Smaller amount of solids are accepted in outflow and evaporation, but
viscosity and density are not corrected for occurrence of solid particles.
It also need to be mentioned that the current database equations are based on simple
(quadratic) Equations Of State (EOS): only including compressibility based on second virial
coefficient. This means that calculation in SUPERCRITICAL CONDITIONS will be unreliable,
because density calculations in this region should be based on more complex EOS.
© 2018 TNO
38 RISKCURVES
Warning 1: Although real world mixtures (such as gasoline) may include dozens of unique
component substances, many of these components occur only in very low fractions. Although
it is possible to include all these fragments into the mixture definition, these very low fractions
will hardly influence the thermodynamic behavior. Because of this low influence, and because
complex model calculations (such as TPDIS two phase discharge) will include iterations over
temperature dependent chemical properties, dramatically increasing calculation time, it is
advised to limit the number of components to a maximum of 10.
Warning 2: The database editor to create a mixture of every combination of components,

even practically impossible ones. One could add "Iron" to "Methane" and "Water", creating a
mixture of a solid, liquid and gas, unless at conditions above the boiling point of iron. Also,
some components will always react an cannot exist together. Be aware that any mixture can
be defined, but may lead to errors / warnings inside the model calculation. A phase check is
included a will try to catch potential mismatch in gas/liquid/solid state.
1.4.2.2 Calculation of properties of mixtures
Mixture properties will be calculated using specific mixing rules dependent on the typical
property to be evaluated. By default, "Ideal mixing" is used, however, some properties require
a different approach, as listed below:
- Explosion limits (LEL and UEL) : Are calculated using "Le Chatelier's"rule
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 39
- Viscosity: The liquid and vapour viscosity is calculated using "Kendal-Monroe" relation:
- Boiling points, Critical point temperature, Melting points or Triple point temperature: Highest
or Lowest value:
Because mixtures will have a boiling range, the mixture will start to boil at its lowest boiling
point. Also the first component arriving at its critical point will determine that we don't have a
pure liquid anymore, the first component starting to solidify will create a liquid/solid mixture.
For that reason, a boiling or critical point will be based on the lowest values, and the melting
or triple point are based on highest temperature. Inside pool evaporation, the ideal mixing
based melting point is used to determine to stop liquid evaporation. This is because in
gasoline-like mixtures, it is accepted that some cyclic of parafines may be solid, whereas the
main substance is still a liquid. In these liquid/solid mixture situations, the phase detection
routine give a warning because liquid density and viscosity will be less accurate due to some
components being in a solid state.
- Toxic properties (Probits, Threshold concentrations): Determined by "Most toxic" or

"Fractional value of most toxic":
Because there is no clear rule on how combine multiple toxic substances (toxics can have
different behavior: Narcotic or Irritating) the toxicity of a mixture will be based on the most
toxiccomponent. The most toxic component is defined as that component having the lowest
LD50 (30 min) concentration. The Probit B and Probit N will simply be taken from this
component, the Probit A and all toxic threshold will be corrected for the fraction of this (most
toxic) material available.
1.4.2.3 Evaluating mixture properties
In the Chemical Editor, selecting the specific mixtures property will illustrate both the mixing
rule used, as well as the resulting values:
© 2018 TNO
40 RISKCURVES
For temperature dependent properties, the graph will display all components behavior,
including the resulting mixture relation. The minimum and maximum temperatures are
determined by the highest and lowest occurring values for the individual components. Note
that this may lead to situations where the resulting mixture (red line) has a very small valid
range (because outside those boundaries one component will be either solid or gas):
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 41
1.4.3 Usage of Projection systems

Projected coordinate systems, commonly used in GIS (Geographical Information Systems)
viewers, are coordinate systems designed to represent the spherical earth as a flat surface,
such as a printed map or a computer screen. 2D and 3D Cartesian coordinate systems
provide the mechanism for describing the geographic location and shape of features using x
and y values. Locations of geographic objects are defined relative to the origin, using the
notation (x,y), where x refers to the distance along the horizontal axis, and y refers to the
distance along the vertical axis. The origin is defined as (0,0).
© 2018 TNO
42 RISKCURVES
The projection system contains a strict definition in what units, with which reference system
and which visualization angle (where is North) coordinates should be displayed. Previous
version of EFFECTS and RISKCURVES would always work in local meters, and a pure
North-East oriented Y-X axis system, where the only degree of freedom was the zero-zero
coordinate.
Properties and distortion in map projections
Since the earth is spherical, a challenge faced by cartographers and GIS professionals is how
to represent the real world using a flat or planar coordinate system. To understand their
dilemma, consider how you would flatten half of a basketball; it can't be done without
distorting its shape or creating areas of discontinuity. The process of flattening the earth is
called projection, hence the term map projection. A projected coordinate system is defined on
a flat, two dimensional surface. Projected coordinates can be defined for both 2D (x,y) and 3D
(x,y,z) in which the x,y measurements represent the location on the earth's surface and z
would represent height above or below mean sea level.
Unlike a geographic coordinate system, a projected coordinate system has constant lengths,
angles, and areas across the two dimensions. However, all map projections representing the
earth's surface as a flat map, create distortions in some aspect of distance, area, shape, or
direction. Users cope with these limitations by using map projections that fit their intended
uses, geographic location, and extent.
The GIS functionality of version 10 now allows to transform information between coordinate
systems to support integration of different background maps and allows exchange with to
GOOGLE earth (save as KML, show in maps or earth) and import officially geo-referenced
background maps.
As of version 10, the software support coordinate projection systems, allowing to export and
import geographical material from various sources, without the need to reposition imported
background maps or exported results such as contours and grids.
The standard system to be used has to be defined in "Presentation settings": this offers a
huge list of standardized projection systems. The default choice here is WGS 84 Pseudo
Mercator. This choice defines the coordinate system to be used for all presentations in the
map view. To be able to derive coordinates or distances from this map, the crosshair cursor
or scale bar can be used.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 43
It is important to emphasis that the choice of the project projection system should be the first
thing to decide. Changing the project system after equipment locations and receiving objects
have been placed will change the values associated with the coordinate, and might lead to
rotated or even disappearing maps and locations: because there not "in view" in the changed
system. (For example, a back ground map in Dutch Amersfoort RD system will no longer show up when
the project is changed to Singapore SVY21 and will be rotated when displayed in Swedish National Grid
system).
Note that once a user start with importing a background map, the associated
projection system for this background map needs to be defined. (Except for so-called
GeoTIFFS which already contain a choice for the projection system applied) This also means
that different projections systems can be applied for different background map layers. The
global "presentation settings" project projection system defines the units, and angles that will
be used for the Map display window, potentially resulting in a rotated background map, if that
background map uses a different projection system.
For shape files, a projection system can be included, potentially defined in the associated
.PRJ extension file. For this reason it is required to keep the SHP, DBF, SHX and PRJ files
grouped together.
If the projection system of the background map (selected during import) differs from the
project setting, this can lead to the situation that this background will be presented as a
slightly tilted map, sometimes leading to somehow blurred or un-sharp images. It is advised
to choose the project setting projection system equivalent to the main background maps to be
used.
© 2018 TNO
44 RISKCURVES
1.4.4 New and adapted models

Many models inside RISKCURVES (and EFFECTS) 10 have been improved or revised in this
version. Below is a list of the important enhancements included:
- Outflow models: The spray release model now also contains a new "Statistical spray"
method, which is applicable for CO2 as well (which is a solid/gas equilibrium). Instead of
using one typical droplet size, this model uses a droplet size distribution, where rain-out
fraction is highly dependent of these droplet sizes and height of the release (falling height).
The model can work with different number of samples, influencing the calculation time and
accuracy of the distribution. Compared to the original "Yellow book" model, this model
results in a higher approximation of the rainout fraction. The spray release model now
contains a selection box allowing to choose "Yellow book", "Aminal rule" or "Statistical spray
method".
- The pool evaporation model will provide warnings when being applied with YAWS
chemicals, because the calculation of the Schmidt number uses critical volume which is
highly unreliable when derived for YAWS chemicals.
- Combined models outflow: All G3 "Leak" scenario now allows to used a "fixed flowrate"
instead of a calculated flowrate based on hole size and pressure. This option is available
within Gas, Liquid, Liquefied gas an Unified LOC combined models. When using this "fixed
flowrate" selection, the model will calculate a corresponding required exit pressure to obtain
this flowrate. This exit pressure is often required in many following calculations (like turbulent
jet or spray release). This fixed flowrate can be used in situations where release rate and hole
size are given, such as a specific pumping rate.
- The BLEVE model was originally only used to calculate the fireball phenomenon, although a
BLEVE abbreviation itself refers to an explosion behavior. The BLEVE fireball model can now
also calculate BLEVE overpressure, which is based on "BLEVE blast" calculation method
as published by van der Berg. (see model references). The BLEVE blast calculation is also
available as a separate explosion model.
- The BLEVE fireball model no longer uses a BLEVE mass as input, but asks for storage
conditions like vessel volume and temperature. Depending on these storage conditions a
BLEVE mass incorporated within the phenomenon will be calculated. This BLEVE mass is
based on the generally accepted rule of "3 times the adiabatic flash fraction". This is
particularly important for (pressurized) LNG tanks, were usage of the full vessel contents
would lead to overestimation of the fireball phenomenon.
- All fire models will now report both heat radiation level contours and damage contours.
Furthermore, a heat radiation footprint can be presented for pool fire and jet fire.
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 45
- The pool fire model has been extended with a new "two zone pool fire" method, which is
based on original publication from Rew&Hulbert (see model references). Apart from this new
calculation method, separating the flame in a clear and a sooty part, the model will now
calculate the view factor using a "Discretised Radiation Method", which was already used for
jet fires in version 9. Due to this extension the pool fire can now have any shape: circular,
rectangular, a rim or a user drawn polygon pool shape. The specific burning rate, which
was previously hard-coded for chemicals listed in the Yellow Book, is now added as a
chemical dependent property. The values that are listed here are taken from the more recent
Rew&Hulbert publication. If no data is provided, the Burgess relation is used to calculate the
burning rate.
- The Multi- Energy explosion model can now also use the GAME correlations ("Guidance
on the Application of Multi Energy", see model references) to estimate the blast strength.
Instead of using a fixed ME curve number, the max. overpressure will be calculated based
congestion characteristics: "Volume Blockage Ratio", average diameter of the obstacles,
laminar burning velocity of the chemical and flame path length. These substance dependent
laminar burning velocities have been added to the chemical database as a property.
- The "explosion dispersion" model have been renamed to "flammable cloud" and now also
support presentation of 50% LFL concentration contours.
- Version 10.1 introduced the "Vessel rupture model" as a potential overpressure creating
scenario, and heat radiation models now include the additional lethality risk of clothing being
set to flame (clothing burning distance is only applied for societal risk)
- The dense gas dispersion model has been adapted in version 10.1, leading to potential
differences with previous version calculations (see version info and distributed whitepaper for
adaptations)
1.4.5 Support for tile servers

Apart from incorporating file based background maps, the user can also use background
which are loaded from an internet based "tile server".
Use the <right> mouse button to add background and select "Add tile server" which will open
a dialog window
Note that the usage of tile server usually requires a license of the publisher of these map tiles.
© 2018 TNO
46 RISKCURVES
Note that to be able to combine tile server background with user provided file based
backgrounds, the correct projection system for the file based background needs to be
provided. If this is also chosen as project projection system, tilting of pixel maps is avoided
and server tiles and file based maps can be seamlessly combined:
© 2018 TNO
Introduction 47
© 2018 TNO
Quick Start Guide 49
2 Quick Start Guide

This guide gives you the opportunity to quickly get acquainted with the possibilities of
RISKCURVES by defining some simple examples and tasks, and explaining the operation of
the software from a users’ point of view.
The guide is not a detailed reference guide, nor a complete “how to” user manual but helps
user to quickly understand the concepts of RISKCURVES version 9.
At any time you may refer to the full technical reference manual which is provided with
RISKCURVES, or consult the built in help system by pressing <F1> for more detailed
information.
2.1 The Graphical User Interface

RISKCURVES 10 uses a tree view oriented user interface, which reflects the hierarchy of
input data. Furthermore, the screen layout resembles the GUI of the latest version of our
consequence tool EFFECTS: The left hand side of the screen is input, and right hand side
present (tabbed) results, dependent of the “active” (currently selected) item.
The new interface provides intuitive methods for copying and pasting user definitions (such as
scenarios) but remains uncluttered and clean. Access to standard actions, such as adding or
deleting nodes is provided by context menu’s (popup menu: right mouse click) and standard
shortcuts (Del, Ctrl-C, Ctrl-V).
The standard screen is divided in three parts: a (hierarchical) tree view, an input parameters
panel, and a (tabbed) result panel. The input and results panel always reflect their contents to
the active (selected) node of the tree. Switching from active node will also change the
contents of the input and result panels, eliminating the use of a “present” or “edit” button.
© 2018 TNO
50 RISKCURVES
The top of the main form contains typical menu items, providing conventional access to main
functions and a toolbar. The left bottom side contains the three main buttons < Clear>, <
Defaults> and < Calculate>.
2.2 The concepts behind the tree nodes

The hierarchical tree view which illustrates the input, contains some important concepts or
typical definitions, which will be introduced in more detail below.
© 2018 TNO
The top node, called Riskcurves Project is a typical placeholder of all user input. The project
corresponds to the information stored in a typical file, reflected by the name of the node. The
name of the topnode reflects the current project filename.
The caption style of a node also reflects the current state: italics imply "not calculated yet", a
red caption indicates incomplete or wrong input.
The tree view illustrates the hierarchy which is automatically occurring while defining input for
a QRA:
A calculation set is a typical input definition for a single QRA calculation: it contains all input
that influencing the result. Since users often want to compare the change in risk due a
modification (of population, scenarios), a RISKCURVES project can contain multiple
Calculations Sets in one project (and thus file).
Results of a calculation are influenced by their general parameters, which are combined in
Calculation settings”; these settings will be applied to all scenarios belonging to the
calculation set.
© 2018 TNO
52 RISKCURVES
Furthermore, the calculation of a “Societal Risk” requires the definition of a population

distribution. Population is always associated to a calculation set, and can be defined as a grid
(cell based distribution) or polygons (geometric shapes containing population).
The equipment node is used to define the geographic positioning of scenarios; a typical tank,
vessel, installation or transport route can be defined at this level. Note that the background
map can be used to select a coordinate or define route points.
Each equipment can contain multiple scenarios: for vessels typical scenarios may include a
leak, a full bore rupture, and a catastrophic (instantaneous) release scenario. Each scenario
however, has its own failure frequency, describing the chance of this accident happening, and
consequence description.
RISKCURVES is capable of using its own internal (EFFECTS) consequence model, which
can be a fire model, dispersion model or explosion model, but users can also define a
damage definition. These Damage definitions can be used to enter results from consequence
calculations from external models, or use damage zone definitions which may be
standardised or prescribed by authorities.
Copying and Pasting of Nodes
The use of the hierarchical tree node allows the possibility to copy scenarios (same leak on
another installation), copy equipments (same set of scenarios belonging to a vessel copied to
another location) , or even copy entire calculation sets (same calculation but with altered
frequency, population etc).
A calculation set is a combination of system setting, a meteorological definition, population

and accident (Loss of Containment) scenarios definitions for which Individual Risk and
Societal Risk are being calculated.
A calculation set will have results in terms of Individual Risk Contours and Societal Risk
Graphs and Societal Risk Maps.
modification (of population, scenarios), RISKCURVES can contain multiple Calculations Sets
in one project (and thus file).
A calculation set always contains the sub nodes Calculation settings, a Meteo data node,
Population (if societal risk calculation is required), stationary equipment and transport
equipment, and consequence risk defintions because these contents together determine the
result of a calculation.
© 2018 TNO
A calculation set has a few settings, allowing to either include or exclude the societal risk
calculation, societal risk maps and consequence risk contours.
Calculation settings is a typical collector or grouping node.
It doesn’t have its own parameters, but combines several groups of parameters, to be applied
to all input contained in a calculation set. Typical parameters are “Accuracy” describing
parameters influencing calculation accuracy and speed, “Vulnerability” settings describing the
relation between physical phenomena and damage (lethality), and “Environment” parameters,
describing ambient temperature, humidity, solar radiation etc. for the typical location.
It is also possible to calculate a Consequence Risk, which give the risk of exceeding a
specific consequence level threshold. If this option is activated, additional "consequence risk
threshold levels" need to be set.
The meteorological data definition contains the choice for the meteorological station to be
used. Any meteorological data set contains probabilities for typical weather classes (Pasquill
stability class, wind-speed, day or night) occurring at the location (see meterological
distribution). The number of weather classes defined will determine how many damage
definitions / consequence models are contained under a scenario (e.g only D5 and F2 or 6
different classes!).
The probability of a risk occurring at a specific location is highly influenced by the probability of
the wind blowing from the accident location towards that location. In order to take this into
account, a meteorological definition has to be supplied. Meteo data consists of the definition of
typical Pasquill stability class with a wind speed (e.g. D5 or F2), the probability of that class
occurring, and the probability for the wind-directions for that class and is applicable for the
region where the scenario’s are to be defined. This data is usually supplied by meteorological
station at airports etc. and can be predefined for met-stations at your country.
A new meteo-station definition can be added under menu “Edit”, “Option” “default meteo
distribution” and the browse button:
© 2018 TNO
54 RISKCURVES
All definitions that are provided in “Options” can be selected in the combobox in the input panel of the Meteo data node:
Once a meteo station location has been entered, the red label will turn to black, illustrating
that acceptable input has been provided.
Note that the provided (Dutch) meteo station definitions all contain 6 weather classes, but it is
also possible to use only two any other number of different Pasquill classes. Using only two
classes imply that calculation time will be reduced since the consequence models need to
perform two calculations.
The spatial distribution of occurance of specific wind directions can be visualised in a

windrose view
Population definition node contains the definition of population by means of grids (a matrix
like definition of cells) or polygons (area definition with number of inhabitants).
Population can be added by using the Population Import Wizard, or by manually adding a
polygon and defining an are with population. See defining Population.
The total cumulation of all grids and polygons under the grouping node will be used to create a
total population grid, used within the calculation sets Societal Risk calculation.
Both day an night grid will use a separate "Inside fraction" determining the fraction of the
people that are inside houses and have a some degree of protection (see vulnerability
settings)
When using "temporary polygons", it is possible to use a dedicated "inside fraction" and
"utilisation fraction" (a presence factor).
© 2018 TNO
Temporary population can be used to include the presence of large crowds (e.g. festivals,
sport events) during a FRACTION of the time. This is particular relevant if large numbers of
people are outside (thus unprotected).
Note: When using many (say more than 10) temporary polygons that can be exposed to the
same event (when they are close to one another, so within the potential lethality footprint of a
single event), this procedure can get time consuming because all potential combinations of
these areas need to be evaluated!!. As an example, just for three temporary population area’s
we need to evaluate: A and B and C exposed, A and B exposed, A and C exposed, B and C
exposed, only A, only B , only C, and no area (just base population) exposed, where every
combination has its own probability of occurrence!
Equipment: a location or route on which scenarios are being analysed (distinguishing

STATIONARY and TRANSPORT equipment). Note that these nodes can be expanded, they
are placeholders or grouping nodes for a list of coordinates, or routes.
Scenario: a Loss Of Containment scenario occurring at an equipment (either a stationary

location or a transport route), which has a specific failure frequency, and contains
consequence definitions: a description of the scenario in terms of substance, quantities,
release situation or resulting damage.
Once stationary equipment locations or transport equipment routes have been defined, typical
LOC (Loss Of Containment) scenarios belonging to the equipment can be added. Select the
equipment and press <Right Mouse><Add scenario> and select the type of scenario to be
added from the branch of models:
EFFECT models are consequence calculations performed by single phenomena

consequence models. They can either be based on atmospheric dispersion of toxic or
flammable gasses or based on heat radiation (Bleve , poolfire of jetfire phenomena).
© 2018 TNO
56 RISKCURVES
Combined models support multiple phenomena; if a material is both flammable and toxic, or
direct and delayed iginition can occur, these combined LOC model chains will distinguish
several phenomena.
The combined models are supplied for Gaseous, Liquid and Two phase materials, and are
available for specific release cases. A release can be either an instantaneous release (called
G1 scenario in the Purple Book), a release within 10 minutes (G2 scenario) or a leak scenario
with a specific hole size (G3 scenario). If the user doesn’t know the state of , one can select
the Unified LOC model, which determines the state itself, and provides a choice to evaluate
Damage definition s can be used to enter pre-calculated consequence areas. The damage
models are also dedicated to a specific phenomenon.
Another possibility to add scenario is by using the floating panel: Select an equipment node,
and hover the mouse over the white line on the left border of the RISKCURVES window. A
model selection panel will unfold, illustrating different possibilities by family name:
After the scenario has been added, the definition itself needs to be provided.
A scenario definition consists of two elements: a frequency part and a consequence part.
© 2018 TNO
The tree visualises this as two nodes of the scenario: the scenario node and the
corresponding (consequence) modelset. For a scenario, main parameters are base
frequency (expressed as chance of occurrence per year), a possible correction factor (which
can be used to represent risk reduction actions), and a daytime fraction. The daytime fraction
can be used to express the situation that an activity only takes place during day or night time.
By default, this fraction should be the average occurrence of daytime situation, according to
the meteorological data definition (e.g. for Netherlands 44% is daytime). If another fraction is
used, this implies that the activity is predominantly shifted into day or night time.
Combined models also require entering a fraction for direct ignition, delayed ignition, BLEVE
and explosion phenomenon. For single phenomenon models, is it assumed that this fraction
is already included in the base frequency. Pressing the < Defaults> button will quickly enter
feasible frequency / probability values here, but is not advised because failure frequencies
tend to be very specific for the typical situation.
A Modelset is the placeholder for the actual consequence definition. It contains either a
footprint definition or consequence model calculation, which is defined for a number
meteorological conditions
© 2018 TNO
58 RISKCURVES
It is possible to define altered input values for specific weather class conditions by selecting
the weatherclass from the combobox.
After calculation detailed (sub)model results can be shown , by selecting a specific

weather class. These detailed results includes all graphs, contours and contour dimensions
for the selected sub-model:
© 2018 TNO
in the legend

aggregated.
individual risk.

© 2018 TNO
60 RISKCURVES
A cumulation set can be used to make a dedicated cumulation of risk sources that does not
contain all equipment or all scenario's, presented corresponding SR or IR results.
Very often one is not interested in the fully accumulated results of all scenario’s, but want to
know the contribution of a specific subset of scenario, e.g. only flammable scenario’s or
accumulation of specific vessels or equipments. Such a subset can be made using a
Cumulation Set. Define a new set by selecting the “Cumulation sets” node and selecting
<Right Mouse> <Add cumulation set>. Give it a descriptive name (e.g. “Only Flammables”)
and use the checkboxes to select which equipments or separate scenarios should be
incorporated within this accumulation. After pressing the <Calculate> button, which only
takes a few seconds, the subset results will be presented.
© 2018 TNO
It is important to realise that a Cumulation set can also be used to ADD different calculation
sets. This way, it is possible to combine calculations for different parts of a site, for example
containing different production processes, and add them all together in one result as a
cumulation. This cumulation result will include Iso Risk contours, Societal risk graphs and SR
maps.
A Comparison set allows to compare results for Calculations Sets or Cumulation sets; it will
provide multiple graphs and contours.
RISKCURVES has the possibility to perform multiple QRA calculations, and compare results.
This can be used to validate the influence of a changing population, or generally: a changed
risk situation.
To perform multiple QRA calculations, the most rigorous way would be to copy and paste an
entire calculation set: select the node for the calculation set, press <Ctrl-C> and <Ctrl-V> (or
use edit copy / paste) and a complete calculation set will be added. Again, use descriptive
names for the different calculation sets, e.g. “Larger storage capacity” or “Including new
Urban Development population” and modify the contents of the copied calculation set
accordingly.
After calculation (which may take some time again), these results can be compared using the
comparison Set.
© 2018 TNO
62 RISKCURVES
However, in many cases it is possible to add a new or modified scenario to the standard
calculation set and use a Cumulation set to exclude this from being added to the result. Since
all defined “Cumulation Sets” are also included within a Comparison set, this can be used to
verify the influence of a modified scenario, without the need to copy the entire calculation set.
Realise that copying a full calculation set will result in big projects with many duplicate
scenarios.
To start comparing different calculation sets or cumulation sets, define a “Comparison set” by
selecting the node and selecting <Right mouse> <Add comparison set> . All calculation sets
and cumulation sets of the project will be visible here. Use the checkboxes to include or
exclude a set. When comparing individual risk contours, only one level of interest will be
shown. This particular level can be modified within the presentation settings.
2.3 Quick start: Create a new project

The first step in performing a QRA with RISKCURVES is creating a project.
Start RISKCURVES (see “Installing the software and starting RISKCURVES”) and choose
File | “New” from the main menu or press the “New project” toolbar button. The user is
asked for a project name, and an empty project tree will be created.
To create and run a QRA calculation, the following steps need to be taken:
1. Add a background map
2. Verify Calculation settings
3. Define meteorological conditions
© 2018 TNO
4. Define population distribution
5. Define Stationary or Transport equipment locations
6. Add Scenarios to equipment location
7. Entering consequence model set data
8. Performing the risk calculation
9. Evaluate results of the calculation
10.Potentially add a "consequence risk" calculation
11.Optionally, define Cumulation sets , to make a subset of scenarios
12.Optionally, define Comparison sets , to compare different calculations or cumulations
13.Optionally, define Analysis points, to compare risk at specific locations
2.3.1 1 Add a background map

The use of a topographic background maps is very useful and highly recommended.
Goto the background node and select < Right mouse> < Add background>.
This process is performed on the project tree node "Background maps". Use the right mouse
button and select "Add background map" from the popup-menu.
© 2018 TNO
64 RISKCURVES
This will invoke an "Open file dialog" allowing to browse and select a file of the currently
supported formats: PNG, JPG, TIF, BMP, SHP and DXF.
Note that SHP and DXF are vector based files and already contain a dimensioning coordinate
system, but may require the selection of a projection system. In this case, a blue warning "No
coordinate system found" is displayed, and a corresponding projection system needs to be
selected. By default the "project projection" is proposed, but the system should be match the
internally used coordinate system. If the shape file is accompanied with a PRJ file, containing
projection information, no additional choice is required.
If a pixel oriented file (PNG, JPG, TIF or BMP) is selected, the user MUST select a projection
system an MAY need to also provide dimensions of the map. If a georeference file is found,
the suggested extent will already be shown.
The dimensioning of the map can be checked with the scale bar (which can be moved) or by
using the "show coordinates" checkbox option in the lower left corner.
Note that pixel formats require the use of a ESRI worldfile to be able to determine scale and
location of the image, whereas the vector formats SHP and DWG already include scale and
position information.
RISKCURVES supports the use of multiple backgrounds, so a background can be composed

of adjacent or overlapping images.
If additional Georeferencing is required, this can be activated by selecting < Georeference by

using two point"> or < Georeference by length> . Refer to the Geo-referencing Images
paragraph of the manual for additional information about the built-in Georeferencing methods.
© 2018 TNO
Apart from incorporating file based background maps, the user can also use background
which are loaded from an internet based "tile server".
Use the <right> mouse button to add background and select "Add tile server" which will open
a dialog window
Note that the usage of tile server usually requires a license of the publisher of these map tiles.
© 2018 TNO
66 RISKCURVES
Note that to be able to combine tile server background with user provided file based
backgrounds, the correct projection system for the file based background needs to be
provided. If this is also chosen as project projection system, tilting of pixel maps is avoided
and server tiles and file based maps can be seamlessly combined:
© 2018 TNO
2.3.2 2 Verify calculation settings

Without any additional user input, RISKCURVES will perform calculation with default settings
for “Accuracy” “Vulnerability” and “Environment” parameters.
The “Environment” block is most likely to be modified since it describes typical environmental
conditions applicable for the region were the QRA is to be performed: parameters like
ambient temperature, water temperature, humidity, surface roughness, solar radiation flux,
latitude and cloud cover are country and even location dependent.
© 2018 TNO
68 RISKCURVES
The values that are entered here will be "pushed" into each modelset that will perform a
consequence calculation.
One can define or alter default environment to be used when creating a new project by using
menu “Edit” “Options” “Default environment”.
2.3.3 3 Define meteorological conditions

© 2018 TNO

windrose view
2.3.4 4 Define population distribution

This step is only required if a user wants to calculate societal risk, which includes risk of
actual exposed population. Population always distinguishes separate population during day
and population at night definitions.
To add population, select the <Total population> node and use < Right mouse> <Import
Population> or < Add Population Polygon>.
© 2018 TNO
70 RISKCURVES
Note that as of version 9, it is possible to combine multiple grids or polygons; the resulting end
population will be created on the base of ALL grids an polygons defined in the yotal population
node, using the defined population grid cell size.
Population import Wizard
A population grid can be imported from an ASCII based grid, ESRI grid format (provided by
local authorities) or the previous RISKCURVES Vs 7 .POP file.
Apart from grid based input files, population can be also created from polygons loaded a
shape file.
To import an external grid, select the "import population" from the popup menu at a population
node.
Follow the suggestions by either selecting a Population Grid (cell based distribution) or
select Population Polygons, which are separate area definitions that can be edited
separately after importing. When using highly detailed shape files, containing real "building"
descriptions, it is advised to translate this into a grid (because of the huge number of shapes
these files can contain), when using "region based" shapes, it can be useful to import these
as separate polygons.
For grids, the type of file to import needs to be defined: it can be an ESRI grid , ASCII / CSV
table, or created from a Shape file.
© 2018 TNO
An ESRI grid file can be either an ASCII table (GRD, ASC, CSV) or a proprietary binary FLT
format. An ESRI grid contains a header, describing the dimensions (number of rows,
columns and cell size) and location (position of lower left corner) of the grid, followed by the
grid values themselves. The header also contains a <NoData> value, which is treated as
empty cell, this value is often defined as as -999 or -9999.
An ASCII table assumes the data to be available as separate lines, containing X coordinate,
Y coordinate, Population, possibly separated by spaces or other delimiting characters. The
import screen offer the possibility to define the decimal separator, and a field separator
character, and to skip one or more header lines.
© 2018 TNO
72 RISKCURVES
An important selection for the import of a grid or a shape file involves the choice of the
projection system which is applied for the coordinates within this grid file.
This always has to fit exactly to the definition used within the grid or shapes.
A SHAPE file contains descriptions of polygons with population info about those regions:
When using a shape file as a grid, all shapes will be combined into one grid based definition.
This requires the definition of a grid cell size and selection of fields for daytime / nighttime
population.
After importing the file, the boundary definitions of the grid can be provided by defining lower
left and upper right corner of the grid:
© 2018 TNO
Population Polygons
A population polygon is a definition of areas with specific population information, they can be
created by drawing a shape on the background map or importing a shapes from a SHAPE
file.
Importing polygons from SHAPE file
When importing a shape file as polygons, all shapes will be added separately as population
polygons.When defining by means of a shape file, the fields containing relevant info in the
shape tables need to be defined. Select the name of the field containing the description of the
region, and the field that contains the number of people (day/night). Furthermore, the
population value provided can contain a density (value is population per area: select the
corresponding unit by using the right mouse button on the units description) or an absolute
number of people.
© 2018 TNO
74 RISKCURVES
After importing polygons, it is possible to edit the shapes, and potentially define specific areas
as "temporary population", which implies that a specific utilization fraction can be entered.
These “Temporary populations” are intended for usage in special situations like festivals,
sport events or other situations where non-permanent presence of large amounts of people
can occur during a FRACTION of the time. This is particular relevant if large crowds are
outside and have no protection by houses.
The usage of multiple "temporary" population polygons also implies that that multiple areas
can be affected by an event, leading to the situation of combination of victims. The current
calculation procedure also checks for potential occurrence of MULTIPLE “Temporary” (even if
they have 100% presence) populations, and accounts for the potential PROBABILITY of
multiple polygons being exposed, with potential COMBINED NUMBER OF VICTIMS.
Manual definition:
Zoom in on the area of interest (use mouse wheel for zooming, right mouse drag for moving
the map) and select the edit button. Start pinpointing coordinates on the map, thus defining
the shape (polygon) of the habituated area. Select the edit button when definition is finished
and enter the number of people within this area during day and during night. For standard
usage select “is temporary” as NO.
© 2018 TNO
Give the polygon or grid a specific and recognizable name: select the population polygon, and
click on the text “population polygon” or press <F2> to be able to modify the name of the
branch.
Note: Renaming a tree node can also be used on Calculation Set, Equipment or Scenario!
2.3.5 5 Define Stationary or Transport equipment locations

Select the Stationary equipment branch and use < Right mouse> <Add Equipment> .
Rename the “Equipment” using <F2> or selecting the string and provide a useful descriptive
name.
Select the map view, zoom in to the location where the equipment is placed, hover the mouse
to the exact location and select <Right Mouse> < Set Release point> . The current world
coordinates of the mouse will be entered in the input fields “X coordinate”and “Y-coordinate” of
release. Select the “Show release point” toolbar button to illustrate the location with a
label and cross on the map.
© 2018 TNO
76 RISKCURVES
Transport equipment: Select the Transport equipment branch and press <Right Mouse><Add
equipment> and again rename the “Equipment” using <F2> or selecting the string and
provide a useful descriptive name.
. Select the map view and zoom in to the area where the route is to be defined. Press the
“Edit” button in the transport equipment input panel and start pinpointing route points on the
map. Watch all route coordinates being added to the table when selecting route points on the
map.
Finish the route definition by pressing “End Edit” again. Note that it is still possible to manually
modify the coordinates. The “correction factor” column can be used for switches on railroad
tracks or locations where a local altered failure frequency needs to be applied.
2.3.6 6 Add Scenarios to equipment location


© 2018 TNO
several phenomena.
© 2018 TNO
78 RISKCURVES
2.3.7 7 Entering consequence model set data

Dependent on the type of model (single phenomenon model, combined model or damage
definition) a dedicated input parameter list will be presented. An first example is provided for a
BLEVE damage definition:
This input is defined by a fireball radius (100% lethality inside and outside), a 35 kW/m2 radius
(same lethality as within fireball), and a lethality versus distance response table which defines
unprotected outside lethality.
© 2018 TNO
This lethality table needs to be entered in a logical ascending distance / descending lethality
order.
If input is invalid, the table caption will turn red.
Note that the weatherclass combobox can be used to define either ALL (default) or ONE
specific meteorological condition. Start with entering all (Default), and IF specific damage
distances occur (such as expected in case of toxic dispersion phenomenon), select
distinguished weather classes and enter dedicated distances.
Note: If a weather class specific parameter is displayed in a blue color, it means that it is
identical to the default situation. This illustrates the fact that in the background this parameter
is linked to the default model (see EFFECTS for details about model linking)
A consequence model definition is basically identical to an EFFECTS model definition: the

input panel displays all relevant input parameters. In fact, it is also possible to copy/paste
EFFECT end models into RISKCURVES. (An end models implies that the model ends up
with any lethality information, eg. a single outflow model is no end model)
© 2018 TNO
80 RISKCURVES
The number of required input parameters for an EFFECTS model can be changed depending
of the setting of complexity: Simple, Normal or Expert. The three toolbar buttons on top of the
main window will define this state. It is advised to start using “Simple mode”,
which only requires main parameters (Chemical, amount of material released) to be entered,
and only use “Normal” or “Expert” if one wants to divert from standard method. In “Expert”
mode, all parameters that influence the result of the calculation are shown, providing the
possibility to alter parameters like ambient temperatures or other default value parameters
defined in “System Settings”.
If an EFFECTS model has been selected as scenario type, this consequence model will be
calculated for a number of weather conditions, equal to the typical Pasquill classes defines in
the meteo data node. This results in a Set of models in which every model can have specific
input. The weather class dedicated input can be accessed by selecting the appropriate
weather class from the combobox.
Note that the way the scenario node is displayed, reflects the current state:
- a red scenario means data is incomplete or incorrect
- an italic presentation means that input has changed and the node needs to be (re)
calculated
- a blue presentation of a specific weather class model implies that the data is linked to
the default weather class model
© 2018 TNO
2.3.8 8 Performing the risk calculation

After defining scenarios a calculation can be performed. The calculation can be started by
pressing the <Calculate> button on the bottom of the screen. Dependent of the number of
(modified or uncalculated) scenarios, a calculation can take seconds, minutes or hours for
large (hundreds) scenario sets.
Note that consequence (EFFECTS) models will not be recalculated if only a location or
frequency has been changed, a scenario will not be recalculated if only location changed, and
equipment is skipped if nothing has changed etc. Only modified input needs to be redone,
where the calculation of a societal risk, which is a accumulation of several
scenario/equipment contributions, will always be redone.
If for some reason, a user want to force a FULL RECALCULATION of the entire project, the
combination <Alt><Calculate> can be used will will trigger a full recalculation.
© 2018 TNO
82 RISKCURVES
During calculation, several progress bars will be presented, to give an idea about the current
progress status. If for some reason, a scenario or equipment is skipped, the calculation will
proceed with the next scenario, and store the result of previous calculation!
2.3.9 9 Evaluate results of the calculation

After the calculation is finished, the Log tab will display any abnormalities, using a Yellow color
for warnings, and Red for errors. The severity will also be represented by the LED icon on
top of the log window.
Note that the contents of the Log window reflects the current active node. If a calculation set
is active, all Logs of underlying nodes will be included. To see dedicated results for one
equipment, or even one scenario, this node has to be activated (selected).
© 2018 TNO
The same selection method applies for all other results: specific results from equipments
(Individual risk contours and FN curve) can be evaluated by selecting the equipment, a
scenario has results in terms of individual risk per wind-direction (FX graphs) or even
calculated consequence distances can be evaluated by selecting the required weather class.
Main results of course can be found on “Calculation Set” level: The complete set of scenarios
and equipments will result in a Individual Risk Contour map, and Societal Risk curves.
The Societal risk of transport scenarios is depicted in transport FN cuvres, applicable for a
section of the route. These graphs are part of the results of individual transport equipments
(per route).
2.3.10 10 Add a Consequence risk calculation

Apart from the standard "Individual Risk" calculation, risks can also be based on "chance of
exceeding a specific threshold". These risk are not associated with lethality but with physical
effect thresholds, such as heat radiation level , peak overpressure level, a specific toxic or
typical flammable LFL concentration.
After adding a Consequence risk calculation, the specific threshold levels to be used can be
added. Furthermore, IF both overpressure, and heat radiation and toxic concentration are
selected and associated thresholds have been defined, the resulting contours for the
combined (aggregated) risk will be presented.
To be able to distinguish different level consequence risk calculations, every definition should
have a descriptive NAME, which will be used in the legend.
This can for instance be "Injury risk" for exceeding 1 psi, 4 kW/m2, LFL flash contour or
AEGL-3 and "Escalation risk" for exceeding 7 psi combined with 20 kW/m2.
The input parameters provided here offer the possibility to define for which threshold level
these specific consequence risk contours will be drawn. If the choice "Include" is set to
<Yes>, the associated threshold input will be enabled. The presented risk levels (e.g. 10-5/yr,
10-6/yr) and associated contour colors will be the same as used for Individual Risks, and can
be defined in presentation settings.
© 2018 TNO
84 RISKCURVES
For a toxic concentration, a specific threshold description needs to be selected, This includes
choices for AEGL or ERPG based chemical independent levels, but
THOSE THRESHOLD VALUES USED HERE NEED TO BE PROVIDED IN THE

DATABASE FOR ALL CHEMICALS INVOLVED IN THE PROJECT.
A specific addition here is the "AEGL-3 scenario duration" which derives an AEGL-3 which is
interpolated for the duration of the release, according to the definition in the Singapore QRA
guidelines: (AEGL-3 10 minutes if release < 10 min, weighted values for 10 min< duration <
30 minutes, weighted values for 30 min < duration < 60 minutes, and AEGL3-60 min for
releases > 60 min, if no AEGL-3 is available then 3% lethality will be used) .
Pressure contour level

This is the overpressure threshold level value (in mBar, psi, kPa etc) for which a risk
contour or consequence distance is calculated.
Heat radiation contour level

This is the heat radiation threshold level value (energy flux, kW/m2 ) for which a risk
Toxic threshold concentration type
This input defines the concentration value the model will use to generate the concentration
contour plot or distances to a concentration thresholds.
Available thresholds are 1% , 50% and 99% Lethality Concentration LC1 (lethal
concentration leading to this lethality WHEN EXPOSED FOR 1800 sec (toxic exposure
duration) but also includes choices like IDLH, ERPG and AEGL concentrations.
The associated value will be read from the chemical database and is dependent of the
substance used in the model. If the selected threshold is not provided in the database, the
user should manually ADD the specified concentration threshold to the substance. (See
chemical database).
A word of warning is required here when comparing the CONCENTRATION threshold for
toxic materials, because although AEGL and ERPG are concentration thresholds, they are
associated to a specific exposure duration! For instantaneous and short duration semi-
continuous releases, the maximum distance to concentrations may be very large, but has
no meaning for toxicity if exposure duration is not taken into account.
For exposure duration associated concentration thresholds (such as ERPG1,2,3, AEGL

1,2 3), it is strongly advised to use the Mortality/Probit calculator from the EFFECTS tools
menu to understand the associated dose and corresponding lethality for the typical
exposure duration.
© 2018 TNO
2.3.11 11 The use of Cumulation sets

maps.
2.3.12 12 The use of Comparison sets

risk situation.
© 2018 TNO
86 RISKCURVES
accordingly.
comparison Set.
scenarios.
2.3.13 13 The use of Analysis points

For every calculation or cumulation set, analysis points can be defined, providing the
possibility to analyse the contribution of scenarios at specific locations.
© 2018 TNO
An analysis point can be added to any calculation or cumulation set. To add an analysis point,
use < Right mouse> < Add analysis point> on the analysis points node, or use < Right
mouse> , < Add analysis point> on top of the map to pinpoint a coordinate from the map.
The results will be visible after a calculation, and presented in a table in the report tab.
© 2018 TNO
88 RISKCURVES
© 2018 TNO
The user interface in detail 89
3 The user interface in detail

RISKCURVES uses a hierarchical tree view, which is also similar to the latest EFFECTS
user interface.
The screen consists of standard elements like a menu bar and toolbar, and a main screen
which is divided in three zones: the project tree, the input panel and the result panel.
The project tree depicts the various components that are required to perform a QRA
calculation. The tree support cut and paste functionality and the object hierarchy illustrates
how LOC equipments are part of a calculation, scenarios take place at an equipment etc.
The input of the “active” (currently selected) node of the tree is presented in the input panel.
The contents of this panel will change dependent of the type of node that is selected.
The same dependency applies for the result panel, which will always display results (report,
graphs, maps and log) for the currently selected node.
The figure below shows an arbitrary user interface screen that might be visible during any
stage of a calculation and with all possible options enabled. The user interface has been
designed in such a way that it follows the rules of a standard Windows user interface as
close as possible.
Click on the Item letters or screen area to get detailed information about the control item:
© 2018 TNO
90 RISKCURVES
The figure above shows the new Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the software. The arrows
point to the most important controls of the GUI. All areas/controls are indicated with a letter
("A"..."L"). This letter is also used in the paragraphs to identify which part of the GUI is
described.
A. Menu bar
B. Toolbar
C. Project tree
D. Model input panel
E. Results panel tabs
F. Graph display panel
G. (Autohide) Scenario selection panel
H. Command buttons
I. Model input parameters
J. Profile selection box
K. Profile expert button
Furthermore, other screens that can be selected through the Results screen tabs are:
· Contour display panel

· Report panel
· Model Log panel
3.1 Menu bar

The menu bar contains the menu items to control the main functions of the user interface and
is set up in the way a common MS-Windows application is supposed to work.
The menu is separated into 5 main categories:
Menu File . .
The File menu provides access to:
New: Creates a new empty project. Clears the memory.
Open: Opens an existing project.
ReOpen: Shows recent files and allows to select any of these recent files.
Save: Stores the current project contents to disk
Save as: Stores current contents under a new name
Menu Edit
© 2018 TNO
These menu items provide standard clipboard functionality (Cut, Copy, and Paste) for all
items.
As a clipboard can only hold one type of data at a time, you will have the possibility to copy
either the profile, or the (GIS screen) Contours or the Report as HTML data to the clipboard.
These can be pasted in the normal way in any document.
The copy functionality is particular useful when copying parts of the project tree, such as
complete scenarios or even calculation sets. Copying and pasting can also be used between
two instances (running applications) of RISKCURVES, and allows to use population
definitions, equipments or scenarios from one project to another. It is also possible to copy
paste end models from EFFECTS (version 10) into RISKCURVES 10. This is only feasible for
so-called end models: models that end up with lethality levels. In general: all models that are
available within RISKCURVES consequence calculation core have support for copy / paste
from EFFECTS. (A release model is NOT an end model). This feature may become handy if
one wants to evaluate the behaviour of a specific model within EFFECTS before using it in a
QRA.
Another important item in Edit is “Options”.
Selecting this item will show the options screen, where users can define default settings,
chemical database, default units, environmental, vulnerability and accuracy settings. A
description of this feature is given in options description
Menu View
Allows to enable disable the view of different segments of the toolbar, select the complexity
level or activate graphic or map view features.
Menu Tools
This Tools menu allows access for the following tools:
· Mass and Volume calculator

· Mortality / probit calculator
· The remote dongle update program
· The RISKCURVES Vs7 to Vs9 project convertor
· The Chemicals convertor
Menu Help
Provides access to the help file, help file table of contents and version release notes.
3.2 Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons for quick access to common functions and is divided in several
groups dependent upon their functionality.
© 2018 TNO
92 RISKCURVES
From left to right it contains buttons for:
Group 1: File and print
· New project
· Open an existing project
· Save a project
· Save a project as…
Group 2: Copy & paste
These are the standard cut, copy & paste tools. Note that the contents of the clipboard is
determined by the currently active region of the screen. For a profile or contour, the clipboard
contents will be an image, when the active component is a node, complete nodes of the
project tree can be copied and pasted.
Instead of the buttons, the standard windows Ctrl-C (copy) and Ctrl-V (paste) hotkeys are
often more convenient.
Group 3: User complexity settings
These three buttons can be used to switch complexity level of the list of input.
Note that especially for the combined models, the list of input can be extensive. Because
many of the input parameters will always be used in default setting, or are taken form the
environment or system default parameters, the user required input can be simplified to much
less input parameters.
Currently, three levels of complexity are supported: Simple, Normal and Expert mode. The
last mode will always show all input parameters that influence the calculation.
Group 4: Profile tools
A profile graph can be the societal risk FN curve, but might also present consequence model
results such as a time or distance depending values, as heat radiation versus distance, or
concentration versus time.
Cross hair cursor: provides the possibility to show a crosshair, which will illustrate the
X,Y values of the point under the cursor
© 2018 TNO
Ruler: activates the ruler, which can be used to measure the distance between two
points
Group 5: Contour tools
The grid tool shows a grid definition in the map, which can be handy for reading out
positions
Will show the location of equipment locations and analysis points. This is an on/off
toggle button. Any equipment location or analysis point can be illustrated with a dot on
the contour image. Transport routes will also be displayed as a line in the same map
layer.
Show crosshair: Illustrates the coordinate of the location at the cursor, and if a "grid"
layer is active (selected in the legend) , provides information about the value of the location at
the cursor
Geo-reference the background image. Will invoke a screen that can be used to
georeference a pixel based background.
A pixel oriented graph needs to have a definition for the size and positioning of the image
in real world coordinates. For this purpose, RISKCURVES uses the ESRI standard
georeference method which requires a wordfile definition for every image. Currently
supported pixel formats are JPG, TIFF, BMP and PNG files.
Ruler: activates the contour ruler, which is a measuring device to be used for obtaining
absolute sizes of clouds, areas, or distances to objects on a background map.
Transect: provides the possibility to determine the individual risk along a line section. By
defining a transect line (click and drag the cursor to define a track) the transect panel,
which is located below the legend panel, will display the risk along this track.
Lock zoom: this toggle button can be used to force the map view to keep the same field
of view on every component.
Full extent: rescales the map to the full extent (all objects visible)
3.3 Project tree

The project tree contains a list of all equipment and corresponding scenarios in the project.
© 2018 TNO
94 RISKCURVES
The user may switch between different active nodes by simply clicking on the appropriate
branch of the tree. Selecting the node will consequently display its properties, and its results
or reports in the result panel
Node that some nodes are grouping nodes, and need to be expanded before the actual
contents is visible. Stationary equipment is a placeholder for all typical point sources,
whereas transport equipment contains scenario's to be defined as a line source: pipeline,
railroads, highways etc.
Node in Italics or red
The caption of the node may illustrate the current state of the contents: red indicating
incomplete (not all values entered) or providing an error after a calculation, an italic caption
means that this node has not been calculated with the current contents (it may be new, or
changed after the previous calculation).
Renaming nodes
Most nodes can be renamed, and given an appropriate name. Select the node and press
<F2> or select the node and subsequently select the label of the node.
It is strongly suggested to use descriptive names for equipment and scenario's, e.g. "Storage
vessel" and "Instantaneous rupture" scenario.
The sorting of the nodes is always based on alphabetical order. This can be used to give a
logical ordering by adding numbers in the name of the model.
© 2018 TNO
Copying and Pasting scenario's
Any non-grouping node support a copy-paste action. Use Edit ..Copy / Edit.. Paste (or <Ctrl>-
C and <Ctrl>-V) while a node has been selected.This will create a copy of the node,
containing the same input as the original.
It is also possible to copy an entire calculation set containing all scenario's. This can be very
convenient when creating alternative development situations. One calculationset might
contain the current population, whereas a second set includes new urban development
plans.
Furthermore, a new calculationset will be included in a comparison set, allowing to display
results from multiple calculation situations.
Removing equipments or scenarios from the project

A node can simply be deleted by pressing the <Del> button while the node is selected. A
dialog will ask for a confirmation for the removal of the node.
Hotkeys for collapsing or expanding nodes
The use of the numerical keypad keys + (plus: expand to previous) or - (minus: collapse)
can be used to expand or collapse the tree quickly. The * (star) will expand the full tree.
3.4 CalculationSet definition

A calculation set is the placeholder for a complete QRA calculation, creating individual risk
results and possibly societal risk results.

© 2018 TNO
96 RISKCURVES
In standard situations, one usually works with ONE calculation set. However, it is possible to
use multiple (independent) calculation sets within one project (thus a RISKCURVES project
file). Multiple calculation sets can be used to compare different calculations, e.g. one with a
base population and one with modified population due to urban development plans.
Calculation set parameters :
Perform societal Risk calculation: Is a Yes/No choice: A Societal Risk Calculation, resulting
in so-called Societal Risk graphs, (FN curves) requires the availability of population
information. If Yes is selected, a population definition needs to be available, either as grid or
as polygons.
Note that an Individual Risk calculation, resulting in a map with Iso Risk Contours, will always
be performed
Create Societal Risk Maps: Is a Yes/No choice, if these calculations are activated, the map
view will also display SR maps
Cumulate transport routes in FN graphs: Is a Yes/No choice, by default No. If the user
selects to cumulate transport routes, the total FN curve will include the results for the
complete route. if cumulation is skipped, transport scenario's will provide Transport FN
graphs, valid for a specific section of the route (by default 1 km).
3.5 Equipment definition

An equipment is defined either as STATIONARY (equipment is at one coordinate) or as a
TRANSPORT definition, where the equipment requires route definition.
Add an equipment by pressing <Right Mouse> <Add equipment>.
Adjust the new (red) name "Equipment" and use a good description.
A stationary equipment has two parameters containing the coordinates.
© 2018 TNO
Use the background map to pinpoint the exact location of the equipment by using <Right
Mouse><Set release point>
For TRANSPORT equipment, a route can be defined by pointing clicking coordinates on the
background map. See positioning equipment
3.6 Scenario definition

A scenario definition contains information about the typical "Loss of Containment" event, and
is always located at an equipment (either transport or stationary). The choice for the scenario
type determines the typical event to be modelled.
An important choice is to define a known consequence footprint, called a damage definition,

or to let internal EFFECTS model calculate the damage zones, depending on the installation
definition (the amount, type and storage conditions of the chemical).
Add a scenario by using <Right mouse> <Add scenario> or use the scenario selection panel
By default, the scenario will be named according to the type of scenario added. The effects
(consequences) part of a scenario is contained within a modelset definition (depicted by an fX
icon). The number of model calculations within a modelset is depending on the
meteorological definition.
Rename the scenario and give a good descriptive name by using <F2> or selecting the node
label.
© 2018 TNO
98 RISKCURVES
Scenario input requires:
Base frequency
The failure frequency for the scenario, expressed per year. Although this parameter has a
default, it is highly recommended to modify this according to the actual failure frequency.
Frequency correction factor
A scenario frequency might deviate from "standardized" situations, due to risk reduction
measures, dedicated situation etc.
By using a correction factor instead of adjusting the base frequency, adjustments can be
made more traceable. This value is used for Stationary Equipment, for transport equipment
the correction factor can be modified per location, leading to a third column in the route
definition.
Frequency equally distributed day/night:
By default, it is assumed that a frequency of an scenario is equally distributed over nighttime

and daytime; that is according to its meteorological occurrence. However, some activities
(loading unloading etc) may have a certain preference for either day or nighttime. By changing
this choice to "No", users can define user specified (so deviating from meteorological
distribution) value.
Fraction frequency in daytime hours
The base frequency is the total frequency for daytime and nighttime. Users can define
activities to take place only at daytime hours (fraction daytime = 100%), only at nighttime
(fraction = 0%) or any other value. The value entered here will determine which part of the
total frequency is used for daytime situation.
This input box is only available if "frequency equally distributed day/night" has a "No" as input.
Chance direct ignition
The probability that a direct (immediate) ignition event takes place. This parameter is only
relevant for scenario's in which multiple phenomena (poolfire and vapour cloud explosion,
jetfire and vapour cloud explosion) are possible (combined models). In case of damage
definitions, the calculation is restricted to a single event: an explosion damage definition
already assumes that the explosion takes place.
By default a value of 0.8 is used, but this value can be altered, because it is dependent of the
type chemical (flammability) or release rate.
Some guidelines, like the Dutch BEVI, give a table where this value is dependent of the
release rate and flammability classification of the substance.
For stationary equipment:
© 2018 TNO
And for transport equipment:
Chance delayed ignition
The probability that a delayed ignition (flash fire and/or vapour cloud explosion) event takes
place.
Note that the sum of Direct ignition and Delayed ignition does NOT have to be one:
1 - (Fraction direct + Fraction delayed) = fraction No Ignition
Bleve fraction:
© 2018 TNO
100 RISKCURVES
The probability of a Bleve event taken place. A BLEVE (Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour
Explosion) can only occur with a instantaneous release and may be one of the immediate
ignition events (other immediate ignition event can be a poolfire). This parameter only has
influence in case of multiple phenomena and is only applied in case of instantaneous two
phase releases of flammable materials.
Fraction with explosion phenomena
Given the occurrence of a vapour cloud explosion (which is regarded upon as a delayed
ignition), this event may have overpressure effects. This parameter describes which fraction
of those events will have overpressure effects.
Note different from other QRA tools, TNO assumes that all delayed ignitions will have a flash
fire phenomenon, and only a part of these flash fires will ALSO have overpressure effects.
This implies that given a delayed ignition, a flammable cloud drifting away from the source, a
delayed flash fire will always occur, and in a fraction of the situations this includes
overpressure phenomena.
3.7 Analysis points

Analysis point can be used to report risk contribution at specific user definable locations.
Any analysis point will produce a risk ranking per scenario, based on risk contribution at
that location on both individual risk and consequence risk.
Furthermore, the societal risk FN graph of all scenarios affecting that location will be
presented, illustrating the severity of the societal risk at that location. This FN graph per
location is the base for the societal risk area map. The FN contribution graph will illustrate the
societal risk curve for the typical population within this population grid cell of this coordinate.
These location specific FN graphs are used as the bases for the SR contribution map.
Analysis point will be illustrated on the map when the "analysis point" is the active component
in the tree or whenever the "Show equipment locations" toolbar option has been selected.
An analysis point can be defined from any calculation illustrating the Iso Risk Contours or
consequence risks, such as calculation set or the cumulation set.
To add an analysis point, use < Right mouse> < Add analysis point> on the analysis points
node, or use < Right mouse> , < Add analysis point> on top of the map to pinpoint a
coordinate from the map.
© 2018 TNO
The risk ranking results will be visible after a calculation, and presented in a table in the report
tab.
3.8 Consequence Risk

© 2018 TNO
102 RISKCURVES
in the legend

aggregated.
individual risk.

© 2018 TNO
3.9 Result panel tabs

On top of the right half of the screen, four tabs provide access to the different result viewers:
For more information on various result screens, refer to:
· Map display panel

· Graph display panel
· Report panel
· Model Log panel
Note that the log panel also contains a LED light warning sign, which is used to illustrate the
status of the log messages
3.10 Graph display panel

The profile result will present typical graphic representations that are available for the selected
node. This implies that the contents of the graph is dependent of the active node.
© 2018 TNO
104 RISKCURVES
One of the most important graphs is the Societal Risk Graph which is available for a
Calculation Set or Equipment. Note that a transport equipment contains a slider which can be
used to illustrate the FN curve for a specific section of the route.
Depending on the contents of the graph, the X or Y scale may be adapted to logarithmic view,
when this is commonly used for displaying the typical graph.
Typical graphs available are:

1. Calculation set: The FN curve for all stationary equipment. If the option "cumulate transport
FN" is checked, the societal risk of the full route is ALSO included in this graph!
2. Equipment: the FN curve for this equipment. This might be a transport FN curve, that has
a slider to select the section of the route to display
3. Scenario: In expert mode, the FX graph is illustrated here. The FX graph is a "Individual
Risk versus Distance" graph presentation, available in all winddirections. It can be seen as
a polar representation of the risk of this particular scenario. All these polar results together,
positioned on their corresponding location, eventually create the Individual Risk Map
(presented as contours)
4. Modelset: A modelset will contain result for different weather classes (D5 day, F2 night
etc). On a consequence model level, all consequence model results will be shown in this
panel as well.
© 2018 TNO
3.10.1 Presenting Model Results

For evaluating the detailed results of a consequence model calculation, the appropriate
weatherclass needs to be selected in the weather class combobox. Depending on the type of
model (single phenomenon or combined consequence model), the number of graphs can
differ, but usually these profiles will illustrate a time or distance depending behaviour of a
result parameter.
The graph selection box can be used to browse through all graphs that can be provided by the
model whereas the small button next to the profile selection box enables the possibility to view
"Profile expert graphs"
3.10.2 Base functionality graphs

The graph presenter is equipped with a convenient zoom and scroll functionality which is
entirely operated with mouse:
Zooming into a graph can be done by selecting a zoom area with your LEFT mouse. To do
so, point and click in the graph, hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse from top left
to right down while holding the left mouse button. The program will show a rectangle. When
you release the left button, the area in the rectangle will be zoomed.
© 2018 TNO
106 RISKCURVES
To unzoom the current graph, select an arbitrary zoom area from bottom right to left up
(the opposite way around as you zoom, which is from left to right down).
Alternatively the profile can be zoomed/unzoomed scrolling the mouse wheel the same
way as the contours can be zoomed. The profile is zoomed on the point the mouse cursor is
pointing at that moment.
Moving a graph is achieved by dragging with the RIGHT mouse button. Drag the chart while
clicking the right-mouse button (the cursor will change to a hand), and the current viewing
area can be changed. Note that an <Unzoom> action will undo this modification of the
viewport area and will revert the graph back to the (automatically scaled) graph boundaries.
Edit, Copy and Freeze

Pressing the right mouse button on top of the profile graph will open a popup menu with
options Edit, Copy and Freeze.
The Edit choice will invoke the build in graphic editor which provide access to all settings of
the graph, including properties as titles, scales and legend placement, but also contains an
export tab, which enables the possibility to save the graph either as data or any specified file
type graph.
© 2018 TNO
The edit dialog can also be accessed by doubleclicking on the profile graph.
The Copy choice will put a high resolution copy of the current view on the clipboard.
The Freeze selection will create a "clone" of the current graph which is no longer connected
to the underlying model. This can be convenient if one wants to evaluate or compare diffrent
versions of a calculation.
Axis units
All axis units of the profile graph can be changed by right clicking on the axis itself, just like all
other numerical values.
© 2018 TNO
108 RISKCURVES
Crosshair and Ruler
The crosshair tool, which can be activated by pressing the in the toolbar, provides a
moving crosshair, which displays the current X and Y values of the mouse cursor.
The ruler option (toolbar button ) will show a ruler in the graph. The boundaries of the
ruler can be moved with the mouse, providing a way to measure the distance between
specific points.
3.11 (Autohide) Scenario selection panel

On the left side of the input screen, a small "grip" is shown. Whenever the mouse is hovered
above this area, the scenario selection panel will unroll. Whenever the mouse moved outside
this area, the panel will automatically hide again.
This panel provides a direct access to all available scenario's. Note that adding a scenario is
only possible if an equipment is the active node: a scenario needs to be added to a
location or a route!
Note that the panel is oriented by model family: Combined models, Dispersion models, Fire
models and Damage definitions (no calculation but a predefined damage zone).
Selecting a model here will have the same result as selecting it through the popup menu
under Equipment: Add scenario.
© 2018 TNO
3.12 Command button panel

This panel contains the three important buttons to perform calculations:
The buttons perform basic actions on the model input screen. The clear and default buttons
will perform actions on the current selected session and leave other sessions unchanged.
The calculate button acts on the entire project and will recalculate all currently unavailable
results.
The buttons have the following tasks:
The “Clear” button

This button will clear the input screen by making all fields empty. Any unsaved data in the
current session screen will be lost
The “Default” button

When this button is clicked, it will fill the input area with default data. Note that the “Default”
button will NOT overwrite any existing data. This means that the function of this button is that
it will add default data to input screens that have some fields left blank. If you want to
substitute all data in a screen with default data you will have to press the “Clear” button (see
next paragraph) prior to the “Default” button.
This is particularly important when using the "Simple" or "Normal" mode, with a limited
number of input parameters. Note that a consequence model can not run if it does not have
all input parameters entered.
If the user is working in "simple" or "normal mode" (see toolbar) some of the input
parameters MAY be hidden for the user. Before the calculation can be performed, all hidden
empty parameters are filled with their default values.
© 2018 TNO
110 RISKCURVES
The "Calculate" button

Pressing this button will start a calculation of the project. The calculation will be performed for
all currently modified scenarios or equipment that contain valid data. Currently modified
scenarios, or equipment, can be recognized by italic representation in the project tree.
If the calculation result in warnings or error, the log screen will automatically open, illustrating
the status of a calculation in color codes and a light.
During a calculation, a progress window will illustrate the progress, and give some feedback
on the current scenario or equipment being calculated.
Note that unchanged scenario's will not be recalculated; their modelset results will remain
unchanged. For a societal risk calculation, the results will need to be translated to total victims
and cumulated towards a total FN graph.
Recalculate ALL: <Alt> Calculate
Recalculation of all scenario's can be forced by pressing <Alt> plus the calculate button. This
will force complete recalculation of all effect models, scenario's and equipment contained in
the current project.
Calculate from here
It is also possible to force recalculation of a specific node: e.g. a single scenario, a single
equipment or a single calculation set. Select the node and press < Right mouse> : Calculate
from here. Note that if a single scenario is recalculated, but is part of a larger set, the
calculation set results will not be automatically updated.
3.13 Node input panel

Whenever a node has been selected, all required input (input parameter) for the active node
of the project tree will be displayed here. You can enter data by clicking on a white edit box
and type the data you want to use. By pressing the <TAB> or <SHIFT>+<TAB> key, you can
navigate through the input fields.
Depending on the active node: a Calculation Set, Population, Equipment, Scenario's or

Modelset the contents of the input panel (required input) will change.
When defining a modelset, this panel will contain all typical input for the effect consequence
model. Typical changes in the input of a combobox might influence availability of fields:
selecting an evaporating pool will disable the "liquid fraction" input: which will be grayed out.
Furthermore, color highlighting is used to reflect the state of an input field: all linked
parameters (copied from default weatherclass) are depicted with blue description, whereas
non-linked parameters remain black.
Furthermore, if parameters are missing, the label font will be is red, illustrating missing input.
Parameters that are in a light yellow edit box can be recognized as "expert" parameters, and
will only be visible if the <Expert> button is pressed. These parameters will normally be taken
from their corresponding default settings which can be environment settings like
temperatures etc, or expert parameter for all other defaults.
© 2018 TNO
Unit conversion input parameters

The input screen offers a convenient way to use any unit you like for entering the data. Right
click on the unit and select the required unit. Note that chemical dependent parameters (such
as Lower Explosion Limit or LEL value) will perform the required mass/volume translations
automatically:
© 2018 TNO
112 RISKCURVES
3.14 Graph selection box

When a calculation is performed, a model can deliver more than one graphical result. As we
can only display results of the same type in one graph simultaneously, the program will store
all different types of graphs in a selection box. For example, a BLEVE (EFFECTS) model
might present a heat radiation versus distance diagram as well as a mortality-distance
diagram.
Since only one graph can be visible at any moment, you can find the other graphs here.
When you press the down arrow, all other graphs become visible (see below)
Depending on which graph you choose, the graphical area (see graphical presentations) will
be updated automatically.
Note that some models, like the combined models, have an extensive list of profiles, requiring
to use the scrollbar in the selection box!
3.15 Profile expert button

The small button next to the profile selection box enables the possibility to view "Profile expert
graphs".
This feature allows the user to select multiple profiles,
Pressing this button will open a new window, with all currently available profiles listed on the
left side. The user can "tick" any graph.
© 2018 TNO
If profiles with different units are selected, the graph will use both left and right (even
bottom/top) axis to present the different graphs. All features, available for a standard profile
graph, such as (popup menu) Edit, Copy, Freeze and Unit axis setting are also available in
the Profile expert.
3.16 Map display panel
Map panel: a GIS presentator

The contour display panel will provide a GIS presentation of all geographic oriented results,
optionally above a background map.
© 2018 TNO
114 RISKCURVES
So what’s GIS anyway?

GIS is the abbreviation of "Geographical Information Systems". GIS is everything about
objects that are linked to their geographical location and linked to extra information that can be
displayed in a map theme. For example: a database may contain the location of houses (X,Y
coordinate) while another database contains extra information like the price of this house,
and the material that it is built from. GIS brings it all together by creating a map that shows
location of the object (the house) and showing a colored price range. For example houses
below €200,000 are displayed as the green dots while houses above €200,000 are displayed
in red. A map consists of one or more layers. When using high end GIS systems, people
have many separate map layers available that contain roads, pipes, waterways, underground
electricity cables, glass fiber cables for computer communication, the water supply system,
street plans, terrain topography and much more. Combining two or more of these layers
result in a specific map theme. A map theme can, for example, consist of a layer that
contains the terrain topography and a layer that contains the waterways. This will give
information about the flow of rivers and canals with respect to terrain topography. When
contractors start digging, they mostly make use of maps that contain the terrain topography
combined with pipelines, water supply system, computer communication cables etc. to avoid
damage while digging.
RISKCURVES works more or less in the same way as a common GIS system. It can make
use of several map layers and you can manipulate these layers and the properties of every
layer.
© 2018 TNO
The sequence in which the map layers are drawn, greatly influences the way that the map
looks. For example if the first layer contains the road network and the second layer is a
bitmap containing the terrain topography, the road network might be invisible because it is
“hidden” behind the bitmap. This is because vector files (like the road map) are mostly
transparent, while bitmaps are opaque (not transparent). Keep this in mind when you create a
map of several layers. By default, background maps are always the first (back most) layer.
The order of the layers can be manipulated by dragging a layer in the legend panel towards a
different location.
Currently supported formats for background maps are:
· SHP (Shape) file format, these files typically contain vectorised information like lines,
polygons or points, associated with fields (stored in a seperate database), that can be used
as an indicator for the geographic object.
· DXF is a cad oriented exchange format. Most CAD programs can export drawings (e.g.
overview of an industrial plant) as DXF file.
· Pixel oriented images: JPG, TIF, PNG, BMP files. Pixel oriented files always need a geo
reference file that contains the translation of pixel coordinates to real world coordinates. A
utility to create these files is included in the program.
3.16.1 Presenting geographic calculation results

If a model calculation output also contains geographic oriented information (e.g. size of the
toxic cloud, size of a fireball) these result will automatically be presented in the RISKCURVES
system. You will often add one or more and map backgrounds (topographic maps, Google
earth screen capture) to the map presentation area.
RISKCURVES will automatically add all layers that contain the results. Note that the layers
can be activated / deactivated by the checkboxes in the legend. Below is a picture that shows
a specific GIS layers on top of a topographic map.
© 2018 TNO
116 RISKCURVES
Contour Legend and colors

In the legend area all map layers will become visible as an checkable item. The colors that
are used for Iso Risk Contours, or grid presentations, can be modified within "presentation
settings"
For a comparison set, multiple contours will be drawn of one particular contour value (e.g. the
10-6 contour) will be drawn. The value for this "multiselect contour" can be modified within
presentation settings.
These specific grids can be saved by selecting the legend, pressing the right mouse button,
and selecting "Export as ESRI grid" from the popup menu.
Tip: by selecting the crosshair cursor tool from the toolbar, while the grid layer is activated
(selected thus blue), the coordinates and risk values under the cursor will be displayed:
© 2018 TNO
© 2018 TNO
118 RISKCURVES
3.16.2 Positioning equipment
Positioning equipment, or defining routes or population polygons
The background map will become very useful when defining equipment: a stationary
equipment requires a coordinate. This can be taken from the map by using the popup menu:
< Right Mouse> < Set release point>. This will automatically copy the current mouse cursor
position to release coordinates. It is strongly advised to zoom in the map in order to position
equipment accurately.
For a transport equipment, a route needs to be defined, which is performed by simply

pointing/clicking points on the route. Pressing the <Edit> button will invoke the drawing mode:
add or move point by simply dragging a point (move) or clicking a new point on the map. A
selected point will be drawn in red. Use the scroll wheel to zoom in to a high level and be able
to define points accurately. Deleting points can be done by selecting a point on the map and
pressing <delete> or selecting the table row and pressing <delete>.
Finalize definition of a route by pressing < End Edit> in the route input panel.
A route also has correction factors, which are used for local adjustment of the failure
frequency, for example on railroad crossings, switches etc.
3.16.3 Map functionality

The contour viewer uses the same mouse shortcuts as the graph display for zooming and
scrolling.
Apart from the left right mouse drag, the scroll-wheel can also be used to zoom in or out of
an area.
Whenever the contour panel is activated, five toolbar buttons can be used for specific
features:
The grid tool shows a grid definition in the contour, which can be handy for reading out
positions
Will show the location of the model. The equipment location or route can be illustrated
with a dot or line on the background image.
Show crosshair: Illustrates the coordinate of the location at the cursor, and if a "grid"
layer is active (selected in the legend) , provides information about the value of the location at
the cursor.
© 2018 TNO
Ruler: activates the contour ruler, which is a measuring device to be used for obtaining
absolute sizes of clouds, areas, or distances to objects on a background map.
Popup menu
When you click on the right mouse button in the contour area, a popup menu will be shown:
Set release point: By selecting this option, the coordinate which is currently under the
mouse cursor, will be entered in the "X coordinate/ Y coordinate" equipment input fields.
Add analysis point: By selecting this option, the coordinate which is currently under the
mouse cursor, will be added as an analysis point. This function is only available on calculation
sets and cumulation sets
© 2018 TNO
120 RISKCURVES
Gray scale background: Is only applicable for pixel background images, and will set the
current background in grayscale to improve visibility of the (colored) contours.
Show GridValues: Illustrates the coordinate, and if a Grid layer is active, the value of the cell
under the cursor will be presented:
Show grid overlay: activates the grid definition in the map, which can be handy for reading
out positions
Show Release point: activates the equipment locations layer, showing the locations of
equipment locations and analysis points.
Gray scale background: Is only applicable for pixel background images, and will set the
current background in grayscale to improve visibility of the (colored) contours.
Show Release point= location of model, Show Grid = allows to show a grid at various
distances, Show GridValue: Illustrates the coordinate, and if a Grid layer is active, the value
of the cell under the cursor will be presented
Display unit will change the unit used in the scale bar
Print will allow to print the current map view to a windows installed printer
Export: Allows to Copy the current view to the clipboard, or Export the contents as a
"Shape" (.SHP) file, Google earth file (KML/KMZ), GeoJSON and images .
Draw transect: point and drag a line to display the risk values along this line as a risk
transect.
Edit transect point: provides the possibility to manually adjust coordinates, to obtain exactly
the same values for strt and end point of the transect.
3.16.4 Map legend options

In the legend area all map layers will become visible as a checkable item.
The legend is provided on a floating panel that can be re sized and moved anywhere on the
screen, and can be docked to the right side of the map. If the red "close" cross has been
pressed, the panel can be activated agian by selecting menu "View .. Panels .. Legend"
Specific presentation layers can be activated or de-activated by selecting the checkbox of the
layer in the legend.
© 2018 TNO
- The ordering of the layers can be altered by dragging the layer legend item to the top or
bottom direction. The topmost layer will be the first layer to be drawn, subsequent other layers
will be projected on top of the preceding layer. For this reason, the background maps should
always be the top layer.
- The bottom part of the legend panel can be used to present a risk transect: a XY graph
presentation of the risk along a definable track on the map.
Double clicking a legend item will display the internal editor for the GIS viewer. This editor can
be used to to change display colors (note that default colors should be set in presentation
settings), transparency of the layers etc.
For contours, the colors, transparency and filling can be changed in the associated popup
menu.
© 2018 TNO
122 RISKCURVES
A more complex property editor of a map layer can be accessed by using the <expert>
button, or double clicking on an layer legend item.
Grid display
For toxic dispersion models, the model will also present a lethality grid that represents lethality
as a function of place. Colors range from red to light green indicating lethality 100% (red) to
1% (light green). Fire model can also present mortality grid and a heat radiation grid
illustrating heat radiation intensity versus location.
To have an indication of the value at the cursor, the map crosshair tool will reveal the value
under the cursor IF the grid layer is the active layer (selected layer=light blue).
Double-clicking on the corresponding legend layer will reveal the color translation editor.
© 2018 TNO
Surrounding contours
The legend popup also provides the possibility to illustrate "surrounding contours", which is
useful for contours that will be dependent of the wind direction.
Export to file
Depending on the type of layer (contour or grid) various export formats such as KML/KMZ
(Google earth), Shape file, and Geo JSON formats are available. Grids can be exported in
KML/KMZ file, as an ESRI Ascii grid (ASC,GRD), ESRI binary (FLT) format and as an image
format (JPG,TIF, BMP)
© 2018 TNO
124 RISKCURVES
Freeze layer
Because the map is always presenting the contours and grids of the current active selected
model, the comparison set allows to compare any combination of models. To be able to
compare grids, or any other GIS layer permanently, a specific GIS layer can be <frozen>
which implies that it will be a permanent copy, not reacting to switches of the active model or
project.
Simply select < Freeze layer copy> to create a fixed layer. Use the legend popup menu <
Delete layer> to remove this layer from view.
3.17 Report panel

The report panel contains a full list of input AND result parameters that were generated while
running the calculation.
Depending on the active node of the tree, the contents of the report will differ.
For a calculation set or cumulation set, a list of all scenarios, including frequency and
maimum effcet distances, and societal risk ranking report will be presented.
© 2018 TNO
For a scenario including a consequence calculation, the full list of the EFFECTS model
calculation results is available. Note that for combined model scenarios, this list may be very
long, because a model chain might contain several submodels, such as outflow, evaporation
and toxic/explosive dispersion models, and several typical fire/heat radiation phenomena
models like a Bleve or Poolfire model.
On a modelset level the result will be presented for all different weather conditions defined.
© 2018 TNO
126 RISKCURVES
If the user has selected multiple models i the model navigation list, the report will display
results of selected sessions in different columns. Any differences in input will be marked
bold, allowing to quickly compare calculations and see differences in input.
The report view is a full HTML document, which can easily be copied to your local office
application. Furthermore print and print preview is supported by the internal HTML viewer.
Detailed (sub)model results
By selecting a specific weather class for the modelset all detailed calculation results including
the contour dimensions or requested contour levels (defined in presentation settings) are
available in the report.
NOTE: These dimensions can potentially be copied (use spreadsheet to combine multiple
weather classes) into a footprint definition to avoid repetitive calculation of identical scenarios.
© 2018 TNO
3.18 Model log panel

The model log presents a logging of all messages occurring during a calculation.
Furthermore, a color code is used to illustrate warnings and error messages.
When calculating complex physical effects or consequences, there are numerous reasons
why a calculation can go wrong. Physical conditions might not match those required to run
the selected model, erroneous input might be entered or simply a bug in a model
encountered.
When the program traps an error, this error is send to the model log. When the model log
contains warnings or errors after a calculation the user will get a notification that something
unexpected has happened and the log viewer is opened.
The severity of the error is illustrated by the led light on top of the view:
A Yellow indicator illustrates a warning, for example a model was used outside it
validity domain, root finding method does not find a solution, or system messages
that a subroutine was doing an illegal action but which could be corrected. It is not an
error but needs user judgment. Warning messages may include hints that no
societal risk has been found.
A Red indicates an error, which can be straightforward messages like "Can not
calculate because of parameters being empty", but it may also report that input
conditions determine a situation for which the model will not run or a scenario that
was skipped.. Basically an error messages implies that no reliable (end)results are
available for the corresponding scenario or consequence model. The message is
often combined with a suggestion of how to solve the problem.
Note: the log window supports sorting on columns, so by sorting on severity, the most
important warnings or errors may be listed on top.
Note: Every message will only show once. Furthermore, if a warning or error is raised, the
program will always switch to the log viewer to force the user to read the messages.
© 2018 TNO
128 RISKCURVES
The Time column illustrates the date or time when the error occurred.
The # field presents the number of times that the problem (error or warning) occurred.
The first error that happened is usually the most important. If errors were trapped in more
than one model calculation, the first/second error of every session is usually the most
important.
The MODEL LOG log is cleared every time you perform another calculation, and is always
associates with ONE model calculation. Since combined model chains consists of several
submodels, warnings may be associated with multiple models.
Model codes used in the log:

The combined model often incorporates 4 types of dispersion models which will be
abbreviated in the messages:
HGDE: Heavy Gas Dispersion Explosive mass model, (Inst indicated Instantaneous mode,
Pool indicates Poolevaporation mode)
HGDT: Heavy Gas Dispersion Toxic model
NGDE: Neutral Gas Dispersion Explosive mass model
NGDT: Neutral Gas Dispersion Toxic model
© 2018 TNO
3.19 Legend panel

The legend panel, displayed on the right side of the map, will display all layers currently active
in the internal GIS viewer.
Activation or deactivation can be performed by selecting the menu option "View" "Panels"
"Legend" / "Transect graph"
© 2018 TNO
130 RISKCURVES
© 2018 TNO
Advanced features 131
4 Advanced features
4.1 Options
In the edit menu a menu-item Options is provided, selection if this item will show the options
screen.
Reload last file

If this item is checked, RISKCURVES will always open the last used file, allowing you to
quickly continue with the project you were working on.
Number of files to remember

The file menu contains a list of the recently used RISKCURVES project files. The number of
files stored in this history list can be modified with this value.
Restore application position

By selecting this item, it is possible to restore the size and position of the RISKCURVES
application window. The program will always open in the same size and same relative screen
position that was last used.
Restore toolbar positions

If the user has modified the position of the toolbars (they can be dragged by using the grip on
the left side of the toolbar), using this setting will repaint the toolbar on the same place when
RISKCURVES is re-activated.
© 2018 TNO
132 RISKCURVES
Default chemical database

By default, RISKCURVES comes with two databases: the YAWS database, providing
physical properties for about 120 chemicals and the the extended DIPPR database,
containing properties for over 1500 chemicals. Furthermore, users can make copies of the
database, where specific properties are modified, or chemicals gave been added. This setting
can be used to determine the default database that will be used whenever a new model is
created.
Note that is is always possible to switch databases for any effects model by using the browse
button to the right of the chemical combobox:
See Chemical database for more information on the chemical database
Default Display Units

RISKCURVES is equipped with a automated unit conversion system. All units can be
switched by simply right-clicking the unit label and selecting an alternative unit. Apart from this
option, users can define their own default set.
Default Presentation settings
These settings contain typical parameters influencing the graphical presentations of

RISKCURVES. All parameters can be individually adjusted in the presentation settings within
the project. For any new project, the defaults defined here will be applied.
Expert Parameter Defaults
Any effects model contains several input parameters, where the current complexity level
determines the number of parameters displayed. So-called "expert parameters" are more
dedicated parameters, illustrated in a yellow background, that usually don't need adjustment.
The defaults that will be used if these expert parameters have not been explicitly defined, will
be taken from the "expert parameter defaults" that can be adjusted here.
Environment settings
These settings store some typical environmental parameters that are used within the
program, if the user is not working in Expert mode. Furthermore, whenever the <Default>
button is pressed in expert mode; the values provide here will be entered in the
corresponding property fields.
Expert parameter settings

Apart from environment dependent values like ambient temperature etc, some other system
parameters are often used within the models. Values that re used within the models can be
modified in the parameter settings dialog.
© 2018 TNO
Dispersion Sigma definitions

The neutral gas dispersion model uses so-called Sigma's to the Gaussian dispersion. For
every Pasquill stability class these sigma's have been defined in the Yellow book. Although
highly discouraged, it is possible to change these settings, because other countries may have
different values for these classes.
WARNING: CHANGING THESE VALUES WILL INFLUENCE THE RESULTS OF THE

NEUTRAL GAS DISPERSION MODEL!
Location of User modified settings
Note that any RISKCURVES project will contain all parameters used INSIDE the project itself.
Even transferring the project to another system will not change results upon calculation,
WITH EXCEPTION of the chemical database. Note that this file (see chemical database for
the location of this file) needs to be copied to another system to be using identical "User
defined" substances..
All defaults, entered within the options menu, including user defined new meteorological
definitions,(specific meteo station data) will be stored in a user settings file,
<Applicationname>.user.config (which is a XML file) which is located inside the users
application folder. The typical location depends on the windows version, but it can be found
using the %Appdata% query in the Windows Find box or Windows Explorer address field. The
%appdata% folder contains subfolders EFFECTS and RISKCURVES, containing the
dedicated configuration files.
The typical locations for user configuration files can also be found using the "RISKCURVES
diagnostics" tool, which is installed along with RISKCURVES.
4.2 Display units

RISKCURVES is equipped with an automated unit conversion system.
© 2018 TNO
134 RISKCURVES
All units can be switched by simply right-clicking the unit label and selecting an alternative
unit. The input screen offers a convenient way to use any unit you prefer for entering the data.
Right click on the unit and select the required unit. Note that chemical dependent parameters
(such as Lower Explosion Limit or LEL value) will perform the required mass/volume
translations automatically:
Apart from this build-in unit conversion option, users can define their own default Unit set. If
one prefers to use British Standard Units or other local (non-SI) units, it is possible to define
this as the standard unit for all models and all axis. After saving of these settings, all screens
will be using the specified units.
© 2018 TNO
4.3 Presentation settings

These settings contain parameters determining presentations of RISKCURVES.
Presentation settings will always be applied for the complete project, and not just for one
Calculation set.
The defaults can be accessed from the options menu, users can redefine or adapt
presentation settings within any project.
Important choices are the typical values for Iso Risk Contours to draw, the Individual Risk
level to use in comparison graphs, and definition of the guide value line.
Coordinate System:
This defines the global presentation system, as used within the project.
© 2018 TNO
136 RISKCURVES
Contour levels (heat radiation, lethality, overpressure, concentration)
As of version 10.1, the specific contours that are to be shown in fire, explosion or toxic
models, can be defined on a central location in presentation settings.
Where the previous version would require multiple calculation to be able to visualize multiple
contours, the user can now define various levels of interest to be shown as contours.
Contour levels can be set for Heat radiation intensity (fire models), Peak overpressure
(explosion models), Concentrations (toxic dispersion models) and lethality levels (all models
calculating lethality).
A change of these contour levels will usually not require recalculation, the relevant contour will
be withdrawn from available model results (grids or level vs distance graphs). For dispersion
model concentration contour levels however, a change of required concentration levels does
require recalculation of the dispersion model because the requested contour level might
need recalculation up to longer end distances. As a result, dispersion models will be
displayed in italic upon change of concentration levels.
Concentration levels are defined using their description according to available database
thresholds fields. If the provided threshold is not available for the chemical, the dispersion
model will provide a warning. Within the (Neutral and Dense gas) concentration model, an
additional numerical threshold concentration can be defined.
The calculated contours will be presented in the map, using the appropriate description, and
the report will contain a full listing of contour dimensions. These contour dimensions are
expressed as max. distance, minimum distance (offset), maximum width and distance to this
maximum width. Note that the previous used “contour length” would correspond to
“maximum distance” minus “offset”.
“maximum distance” minus “offset”.
© 2018 TNO
Selected concentration thresholds will be used as levels for contours, shown in map panel,
but also in the plume sideview, shown in the graphs display panel
The list of numerical values of contour levels can be altered using the browse button behind
the list which will open the list editor :
New values can be added by using the <Add> button, replaced or deleted after selection of a
specific value in the list, or re-ordered using the <+> and <-> buttons to the right of the list.
Lethal fraction max damage report
In the reporting of scenario's, a maximum distance to a specified lethality % (or fraction) is

added, whereas the map will also display a surrounding contour for this lethality % distances.
The exact level for this lethality can be specified here, making it possible to display and
present other relevant lethality threshold levels, such as 5%, 10% or even 99%.
Guide value definition
RISKCURVES now supports the use of country specific guide value definitions. Note that the
guideline is also presented in the FN graph as a straight line. The slope, and orientation of this
threshold line can be defined by using the parameters:
1. Guide value starting at # victims: the X-axis starting point
2. Guide value starting at frequency: the Y-axis starting point
3. Guide value transport starting at: the Y axis value to use for a transport FN curves
4. Guide value maximum: the X axis end point
5. Guide value slope: the slope of the guide value line (e.g. Netherlands uses slope 2,
implying a risk aversion, the UK uses a slope of 1; no risk aversion)
Transport fN curve section width
The section distance to be used for societal risk curves for transport risks can be adjusted.
By default, a 1 km length is applied, although risks can always be accumulated for the entire
route.
© 2018 TNO
138 RISKCURVES
Victim category for Risk ranking
The risk ranking report based on societal risk, which is reported at a calculation set level,
always contains a risk ranking which is taken at the "highest level". This can be for any
specific N category, which is also presented. Apart from this, the societal risk risk ranking can
also be presented at any user defined number of victims. One might be interested in the
contribution at 100, or maybe 1000 victims. This secondary risk ranking reporting category
can be defined by this user definable victim category.
Color legend translation of grids
Furthermore, the color legend to use for specific grid presentations can be defined here. The
concept is to define minimum and maximum levels, the number of levels and color range to
illustrate a (risk) value into a color.
For lethality levels , it is advised to use a scale ranking from 0.01 (1%) to 1 (100%).
Note that the translation of societal risk area maps is based on the norm ratio of the societal
risk at a location, which is compared to the guide value. These norm ratio values are colored
according to logarithmic scale: -2 means 100 times lower than the guide value, =2 means
100 time too high, and zero means ratio 1.
Line color palette
The color palette itself is used for the definition of line colors for contours and graphical
presentations. The first 6 values are used for contour colors, the colors from 7 to 20 are
used for subsequent lines in the graph panel.
The last two colors are used as color for the "show locations" and "show analysis points"
color.
© 2018 TNO
4.4 Expert Parameter settings

The expert parameters editor is used to store some of the default values which will be entered
into a model calculation when working in "simple mode" or when the <Default> button will be
pressed.
StandardPipeRoughness
The roughness of a pipe is used in pipe flow pressure drop calculations, default 4.5E-5 m
Hole contraction coefficient

This contraction coefficient for sharp edges is used in outflow calculations. Default is 0.62
© 2018 TNO
140 RISKCURVES
Pipe contraction coefficient

This contraction coefficient for pipe endings edges is used in outflow calculations. Default is
0.82
Concentrating averaging time toxics

This value is used to calculate an time averaged concentration for toxic loads. Default is
600.0 sec.
For a (semi-) continuous source this is the duration over which the concentration will be
‘averaged out’, to deal with the effect of the meandering of the wind.
The averaging time for toxic concentration is related to aspects of the receiver. For local
irritant chemicals the effects can occur within few seconds (few breathings) and for
systematically irritant chemicals within few minutes (few times pumping of blood through
body).
Therefore the standard value is chosen to be 60.
Concentrating averaging time flammables

This value is used to calculate an time averaged concentration for flammable substances.
Default is 20.0 sec.
The minimum value for the averaging time is 18.75 s [Yellow Book], this compares to the
value for an instantaneous source, which is also used for the calculations of the contour for
the flammability limits and the explosive mass.
Toxic Inhalation Heigth

This values is used as default height to calculate the toxic dose.
Fraction confined mass in Multi energy explosion method

The multi energy method for explosions has an important parameter "Fraction confined
mass".
Default this one is set to 8.0 %. Although this value is quite unrealistic, it appears to give
answers comparable to the old TNT method.
CurveNumber for Multi energy explosion method

The multi energy method for explosions has an important parameter "CurveNumber".
Default this one is set to 10. Although this value is quiet unrealistic, in combination with 8%
confined, answers are in the same order of magnitude as the old TNT method.
The multi-energy method is based upon experimental graphs in which the required value
depends upon the distance from the vessel and the type of explosion. 10 different types of
explosion are considered, and have a curve associated to them. Those are:
© 2018 TNO
1. Very weak deflagration

3. Weak deflagration
5. Medium deflagration
6. Strong deflagration
8. Very strong deflagration
10. Detonation
In a gas cloud explosion, the flashfire may be accompanied by overpressure effects. This
parameter determines the probability that flash AND explosion occur. Default is 0.4
Default mixingheight
Used in dispersion calculations. Default value 500.0 m
4.5 Meteorological distribution

A meteorological distribution contains the probabilities of weather conditions and wind
directions occurring. Definitions are usually named after a corresponding meteorological
station, like airport names. All Dutch weather stations are available within the standard
installation, but users will often need to define their own stations. Once station have been
added, these locations can be selected in the meteo data project node.
This editor shows a table which present the probabilities that wind for a specified stability
class from a wind sector occurs. Different from previous version, the new editor now has
separate Day/Night columns, and values are relative percentages.
The sum of all day and all night definition should be 100% together. If this condition is not
archived, a red Meteo Distribution indication will be shown, and the total day or total night
might turn red, indicating invalid values.
© 2018 TNO
142 RISKCURVES
User can define simple data sets with only two weather classes.
The button < Add Weather Class> will add two (a day and night)columns, titles according to
the selected Pasquill class and wind speed.
Columns can be deleted by pressing < RightMouse> button and selecting <Remove Weather
class> button.
Apart from modifying the cells for the specific wind direction weather class combination, the
total occurring probability for a column can be modified. This will remain the current wind
direction distribution for that weather class untouched and can be convenient when adjusting
probabilities of weather class occurring.
Note: In previous RISKCURVES versions the distribution daytime/nightime was incorporated

within the meteorological definition, the current distribution is based on 100% daytime total
and 100% nighttime total. The daytime / nighttime ratio is defined in a separate parameter
Meteorological Daytime Fraction
4.6 Vulnerability settings

Within the vulnerability settings, typical parameters defining translation of effects to damage
are grouped together.
The defaults to be used in a new project can be accessed from the options menu, users can
redefine or adapt vulnerability settings within any project.
See paragraph QRA Definitions Vulnerability parameters for a detailed description on all
values.
© 2018 TNO
4.7 Environment settings

This editor provides the possibility to modify environment settings as displayed below:
© 2018 TNO
144 RISKCURVES
These environment are being used as standard values for model definitions, and can only be
overruled when using the "expert mode" situation.
Since RISKCURVES now supports dedicated day/night calculations, environment parameters

have distinguished day or night specification. Whenever a new sceanrio will be created, the
appropriate day/night conditions will be pushed in models for D5 day or D5 night.
With respect to the risk calculations, the parameter "Meteorological Daytime Fraction" is
important. This parameter defines the number of hours during 24 hour that are defined as
daytime situation. Note that separate D5 day and D5 Night calculations will be performed for
two situations (as for any stability class occurring during day and nighttime). This parameter
will adjust the typical occurrence of day/night situation according to the countries
meteorological condition.
Apart from this "calculation set" typical parameter, any scenario can be defined as occurring
more or less during daytime.
See Environment parameters for a detailed description of all parameters.
4.8 Accuracy settings

Accuracy settings are used to group parameters that influence the accuracy of the
calculation. One should be aware that there might be a tradeoff between accuracy and
calculation speed.
The defaults to be used in a new project can be accessed from the options menu, users can
redefine or adapt accuracy settings within any calculation set.
© 2018 TNO
4.9 Chemical Databases

By default, RISKCURVES comes with the YAWS database, providing physical properties for
about 100 chemicals. The extended DIPPR database contains over 2000 chemicals. Apart
from this standard file, provided with the installation, users need to define at least one "USER
defined" file name and location, where modifications and user created chemicals and
mixtures will be stored.
The original chemical property data cannot be modified, and changes to "official" chemical
properties will always be stored in the "USER defined" file. Modifications will be marked with
source names "DIPPR, edited (year)" or "user created (year) in case the user created a full
copy or has been defining mixtures.
In order to define WHERE modifications will be stored, RISKCURVES 10 contains a

Chemical database manager, allowing to define which USER files (name and location) to
use to retrieve chemical properties.
This database manager is accessed through program options (menu <Edit>,<Options>) :
© 2018 TNO
146 RISKCURVES
4.9.1 Chemical database manager

Database files : multiple files possible
The original database itself is available in a file "ChemicalDatabase.tci" and stored in the
windows installation folder, next to the RISKCURVES program itself.
Apart from this standard file ONE or more USER defined files are required, to be able to
store user defined modifications, copies or user defined mixtures. Note that these user
defined files need to be on a location where the user has write access.
RISKCURVES now allows to use potentially multiple selections for database files to use.
The name and location of the user defined files need to specified by the user, which is
performed in this database manager. The idea behind the possibility to include multiple
chemical databases is that users can share company specific files (e.g. from network
locations), or use additions from colleagues, whereas user modifications will be stored in
user specific files.
When multiple user defined files are provided, the last (bottom) file in this list will act as the
active storage file for any modifications and is illustrated in bold characters. Chemical
records from other files will be available for selection, but any modifications will (by default) be
put in this bold active "user file". When using multiple database locations, the active user file
can be selected using the <up> <down> buttons on the right of the list of available databases.
It is strongly recommended to display a warning if one or databases failed to load, because
this might imply that user modifications or additions (mixtures definitions) cannot be stored.
If a user has been defining "user defined chemicals" in RISKCURVES version 9, these
records can be transferred to the new separated user file. Please refer to the chapter
"Converting version 9 user chemicals" if user defined chemical definitions need to be
translated into version 10.
© 2018 TNO
Synchronizing User defined chemicals: If users have added "User" chemicals, and
colleagues on other PC's want to use the same definitions, the corresponding
"MyUserDefined.tci" (user defined name) file will need to be copied to a location which is
accessible to the other computer (for instance a network location?)
4.9.2 Chemical databases sources
The viewer / editor can be accessed by selecting the browse button to the right of the
chemcial name, or use the toolbar button. This will open the chemical database dialog,
where you can change the database sources in the top left corner.
Database sources: YAWS, DIPPR or USER defined
Because the user can alter the chemical records, there is a potential danger that a model
might crash or calculates false results due to erroneous data that was entered in any
database. To avoid a situation that a model will not run due to an erroneous database, the
standard database always contains the original data. This database file
("ChemicalDatabase.tci") is write protected, and contains chemicals from sources “YAWS”,
"DIPPR2010", "DIPPR 2015" and some example mixtures.
DIPPR 2015 appeared to have some properties which were substantially modified as
compared to the 2010 version. In particular the lower flammability limit of some common
substances like methane and propane was modified (because of improved insights at
DIPPR) leading to different results in the explosive mass calculations. The previous version 9
was provided with the 2010 DIPPR version, and for compatibility reasons this data is still
provided within the software.
The availability of a RISKCURVES (non educational) license will provide access to the DIPPR
chemicals. Without an active license, DIPPR chemicals cannot be accessed.
The database editor is configured so that you can not change the YAWS or DIPPR data, but
you can copy values from either database into your own "USER set" or add properties to
official records, which will also be stored in your current (active) user database. Added
properties can be recognized by their orange dot in a property listing.
The following paragraphs will explain how you can create your own database and maintain it,
using the database editor.
During model calculations, physical and thermodynamic properties of all (available)

chemicals come from the chemical databases.
Please note: Although licensed users have access to both database sources, calculation
results from YAWS may differ from DIPPR generated results, simply because the chemical
properties may differ. Furthermore, the DIPPR database takes into account the "non ideal gas
behavior" by using a second virial coefficient. Due to this, results from gas outflow models
may differ more than expected based on typical density parameters.
© 2018 TNO
148 RISKCURVES
Example mixtures
In order to be able to work with mixtures, some sample mixtures have been provided. The
chemical composition of these samples have been taken from public sources, and may or
may not be reflecting typical localized compositions. Be aware that many petrochemical
compositions are dependent of the typical climate in the country (summer/winter grade
gasoline) or even drilling source of the crude oil (e.g. "Brent" crude).
TNO does not take responsibility for the correct compositions of these samples, users need
to verify whether their local compositions matches the mixture definitions as provided, and
potentially adjust the composition into a user defined (edited) mixture.
Using multiple chemical database sources

When the program starts, it will always connect to the standard database automatically. You
can use chemicals from the predefined supplied chemical database sets (which are YAWS,
DIPPR 2010, DIPPR 2014 and Sample mixtures set). To use or exclude sources, simply
select or deselect the corresponding "Source" in the database viewer.
Select a chemical from that database and click 'Ok' to use that chemical.
The database editor performs no validity checks on provided values. If you enter physically
incorrect data, the program will trap many errors in a model calculation that might be very
difficult to trace.
The standard names "user created (year) / DIPPR edited (year)" for sources are
automatically added when creating user defined chemicals, which can be done by copying
originals, or when modifying existing records.
These "source names" (where does this information originate from) can be modified by
selecting the source name for the chemical, potentially adding a source name (e.g. a
company name)
© 2018 TNO
4.9.3 Selecting a chemical from the database

To select a chemical, use the search field in the top-left of the database editor menu and
potentially filter results on sources or toxic/flammable behavior.
This Name field will act as a filter on the chemical names, and tree resulting tree will include
all chemicals matching the entered characters.
It is also possible to search on a specific CAS number, by entering the (full and correct)
CAS number in the name field. Corresponding chemicals will only show up on a full match of
the CAS number.
The Show field allows to filter for only toxic, only flammable, or all
By checking or un-checking Sources, searching can be limited to specific sources.
© 2018 TNO
150 RISKCURVES
Select the chemical which is required in the tree, and its basic properties will be illustrated in
the right panel.
Properties are divided in "Constant", "Synonyms" "Temperature dependent" "Threshold

concentration".
Selecting a branch opens the chemical, where each chemical has constant, temperature
dependent, and possibly toxic properties. Select the sub-branch you wish to inspect from the
chemical in the chemical tree and properties will be listed or presented graphically.
© 2018 TNO
4.9.4 Viewing/Editing properties of chemicals

The main chemical editor shows the contents of the database. The chemical database editor
provides a tree view, where chemicals are depicted by a tree branch in the left-hand panel.
Filtering of the listed chemicals is performed by using a filter on Name, use Show to include
exclude toxics or flammables and selecting Sources to include.
NOTE: All user modified chemicals will be listed as "Edited (Year)" or "User Created
(Year)" sources!
Because the program will use the standard YAWS or DIPPR database by default, it will show
non-editable fields for all provided data. After modification of original data, the substance will
be listed in "edited", and if a copy of the record was be made, the new record will be put in
any "USER created" file.
This can conveniently be done by right-clicking on a chemical in the chemical tree, and
selecting "Copy to" allowing to select a specific user file to create the new chemical. This
also allows copying records from one file to another: the administrator can thus create a
company specific file based on additions from various users.
© 2018 TNO
152 RISKCURVES
This will create a full copy of an existing chemical in the USER DATA set. Note that copies of
original DIPPR chemicals stay subject to your DIPPR license. This implies that without a
valid license, these DIPPR copy chemicals will not be accessible. Apart from creating a "full"
copy, it is possible to add properties (e.g. toxic probits, or concentration thresholds), which
means that the official original data is still used, but property values have been extended with
user defined properties. This means that only the new properties values will be stored in the
user file, other properties are still taken form the original database, and the chemical will be
listed in "edited".
Note that the <open ICSC> button will automatically jump to the International Chemical Safety
Card of the current chemical, if the corresponding ICSC number is known. This site will
provide detailed safety information, including commonly used occupational exposure limits
values like IDLH values.
© 2018 TNO
Viewing constant / temperature dependent properties

The chemical tree list is divided into a 3 sub-branches. The first is called “Constant
Properties” and contains all temperature-independent properties like molar mass, critical
temperature etc.
All temperature-dependent properties are listed under the other chemical substance branch.
The names are self-explanatory. Click on the required parameter (such as "Liquid vapour
pressure") to illustrate the formula's and graphs for the property. The checkboxes in the
'Known Ranges' view control the graphs that are displayed.
Viewing graphs of the chemical parameters

The graph which illustrates the temperature dependent behaviour of the selected chemical
parameter provides some of the typical graphical features: zooming by dragging a box, using
a crosshair to read out values, or even change scales:
© 2018 TNO
154 RISKCURVES
Viewing Toxic parameters

The toxicity parameters view (last branch) contains all values for the "A", "B" and "N" probits.
Note: The value for the A probit is dependent of the units used (ppm.min, kg/m3.s or
mg/m3.min). The probit converter tool can be used to to translate values before entering
them. When initially entering values, one should use the default SI unit which is s*kg/m3 .
Note also that the value of B is used to translate the A probit, which implies that conversion
cannot be done without the knowledge of the B probit. This implies that unit conversion
cannot be applied while entering values.
By using the right mouse button on top of the unit box, the unit values can be changed,
illustrating the impact on the a value
Editing temperature-dependent properties

To edit a temperature-dependent property select it's entry in the left-hand tree. If the
temperature-dependent property you wish to edit is not in the list, right-click on the
'Temperature Dependent Properties'-entry, and select it from the 'Add' menu.
© 2018 TNO
Minimum valid and maximum valid temperatures (Ranges)

In the right-hand pane you can see the different ranges known for the selected property. Right
click in the 'Known Ranges' area to add a new range, or delete a current one. Double click on
a temperature to edit it's value.
As any temperature dependent property is a formula, the ranges indicate between which
temperatures a function is indicated as "valid". The word "valid" can have two meanings within
this concept.
First: most temperature dependent parameters are interpolated or extrapolated from

experimental data and the two temperatures shown here are the temperatures between
which experiments have been performed and the data is validated. This does not necessarily
cover the whole range that the function could be valid. For example, theoretically, a vapor
pressure is valid until the critical temperature. Above that temperature, a liquid-vapor
equilibrium does not exist. So the maximum valid temperature can be lower than the critical
temperature when experiments have not been carried out until the critical temperature.
Second: As explained above, the maximum valid temperature can also be a true physical
limit, like a melting point or a critical temperature. These values were entered in the previous
"General" data entry screen.
Enabled: In the DIPPR database, temperature range overlapping properties have been
disabled. To be able to activate another range, you can toggle this setting by double-clicking
on the <Enabled> field.
Equation
This is the actual equation that is used to calculate the temperature dependent data. You can
change the 'Equation' drop-down list to the desired equation, in the 'Parameters' area to it's
left, you can double click to edit the parameters for the chosen equation.
© 2018 TNO
156 RISKCURVES
Editing toxic properties

To edit toxic properties, select the 'Toxic Properties' node in the left-hand tree view. Existing
properties can be edited by double-clicking their value. New properties can be added by
selecting them in the right-click menu.
With every toxic property, it's possible to store the source, and a comment.
Editing constant properties and chemical identification information

Editing the constant properties, and the chemical identification information is much the same
as editing toxic properties.
Every chemical has a source and a comment stored with them, editable on the chemical
identification page (select chemical name in the left-hand tree). Existing values can be
changed by double-clicking, new entries can be added with the right-click popup menu.
4.9.5 Creating chemical mixtures

A Mixture can also be defined by dragging any chemical to the "Mixture" panel at the bottom of
the screen. Another possibility is selecting the a pure chemical and using <right mouse> and
selecting "Add to mixture".
After adding this substance to a mixture, the user needs to define the amount of the
component in the mixture. This can be based both on Molar fraction AND on mass fraction
(use right mouse button to select either mass or moles). The parts don't have to combine to
100 but the fraction will be corrected to the total number of parts.
© 2018 TNO
After selecting <Apply> a name for the mixture needs to be provided and the Chemical
mixture will be stored in the current user database. Mixtures are recognizable by their green
icon in the chemical tree list. All calculated property values can be easily read by selecting
the presented mixture properties.
The properties of the mixtures created will be calculated based on mixing rules, where
constant properties (e.g. LFL, burning rate) can be overruled by simply overwriting the
calculated value in the list.
RISKCURVES uses straightforward mixing rules to derive properties of mixtures. Many

properties will be calculated using an "ideal mixing rule" which means the mixture property
is derived as a ratio of the molar fraction (or mass based if the property is mass based) of
each of the components. Depending on the property value, the mixing rule may be specifically
be tuned (see calculation method properties)
One should keep in mind that these mixing rule DO NOT TAKE INTO ACCOUNT so-called
binary interaction coefficients, nor account for chemical reactions or absorption effects, and
are thus not reliable for typical polar mixtures! This particularly means that mixtures like
Ammonia/Water etc. can still hardly be modelled.
Another limitation is the fact that inside the models, we assume a CONSTANT
COMPOSITION. Especially in (pool) evaporation, one should expect the most volatile
components to be the first to evaporate, eventually leading to a time dependent changing
composition of both the evaporated mass and the remaining pool (liquid) . Please note that
RISKCURVES can not deal with a time varying compositions, so the mixture is to be
assumed to have a constant composition, even for gas and liquid phase.
Furthermore, it appeared that usage of chemical mixtures may also lead to MULTIPHASE
mixtures: one component may be solidified (lower that triple point / melting point) whereas
other components are in liquid or even vapour state. Especially because mixtures typically
have a boiling region, instead of ONE boiling point, liquid vapour equilibrium now can be a
temperature range. Typically, liquid/vapour combinations can be handled, but solid/liquid
mixtures will give a warning, and (pool) evaporation will stop if the "ideal mixing based" melting
point is reached. Smaller amount of solids are accepted in outflow and evaporation, but
viscosity and density are not corrected for occurrence of solid particles.
© 2018 TNO
158 RISKCURVES
It also need to be mentioned that the current database equations are based on simple
(quadratic) Equations Of State (EOS): only including compressibility based on second virial
coefficient. This means that calculation in SUPERCRITICAL CONDITIONS will be unreliable,
because density calculations in this region should be based on more complex EOS.
Warning 1: Although real world mixtures (such as gasoline) may include dozens of unique
component substances, many of these components occur only in very low fractions. Although
it is possible to include all these fragments into the mixture definition, these very low fractions
will hardly influence the thermodynamic behavior. Because of this low influence, and because
complex model calculations (such as TPDIS two phase discharge) will include iterations over
temperature dependent chemical properties, dramatically increasing calculation time, it is
advised to limit the number of components to a maximum of 10.
Warning 2: The database editor to create a mixture of every combination of components,

even practically impossible ones. One could add "Iron" to "Methane" and "Water", creating a
mixture of a solid, liquid and gas, unless at conditions above the boiling point of iron. Also,
some components will always react an cannot exist together. Be aware that any mixture can
be defined, but may lead to errors / warnings inside the model calculation. A phase check is
included a will try to catch potential mismatch in gas/liquid/solid state.
Mixture properties will be calculated using specific mixing rules dependent on the typical
property to be evaluated. By default, "Ideal mixing" is used, however, some properties require
a different approach, as listed below:
© 2018 TNO
- Explosion limits (LEL and UEL) : Are calculated using "Le Chatelier's"rule
- Viscosity: The liquid and vapour viscosity is calculated using "Kendal-Monroe" relation:
- Boiling points, Critical point temperature, Melting points or Triple point temperature: Highest
or Lowest value:
Because mixtures will have a boiling range, the mixture will start to boil at its lowest boiling
point. Also the first component arriving at its critical point will determine that we don't have a
pure liquid anymore, the first component starting to solidify will create a liquid/solid mixture.
For that reason, a boiling or critical point will be based on the lowest values, and the melting
or triple point are based on highest temperature. Inside pool evaporation, the ideal mixing
based melting point is used to determine to stop liquid evaporation. This is because in
gasoline-like mixtures, it is accepted that some cyclic of parafines may be solid, whereas the
main substance is still a liquid. In these liquid/solid mixture situations, the phase detection
routine give a warning because liquid density and viscosity will be less accurate due to some
components being in a solid state.
- Toxic properties (Probits, Threshold concentrations): Determined by "Most toxic" or

"Fractional value of most toxic":
Because there is no clear rule on how combine multiple toxic substances (toxics can have
different behavior: Narcotic or Irritating) the toxicity of a mixture will be based on the most
toxiccomponent. The most toxic component is defined as that component having the lowest
LD50 (30 min) concentration. The Probit B and Probit N will simply be taken from this
component, the Probit A and all toxic threshold will be corrected for the fraction of this (most
toxic) material available.
4.9.6 Converting Vs9 user chemicals

If users have been defining or editing chemicals, resulting in "user defined chemicals" in
version 9, these records can be imported in version 10 using the "Chemical convertor". This
tool can be accessed from the <Tools> menu, or be invoked through the separate shortcut in
de RISKCURVES program manager group.
Upon starting this converter, it will ask for the location of the version 9 chemical database file,
containing the user defined chemical definitions.
By default, the EFFECTS 9 database will be stored in something like "C:

\ProgramData\TNO\Effects 9.0\Databases\Chemicals.tci" however, this location may be
altered by the user. In this case, refer to the C:\Program Files (x86)\TNO\Effects
9.0\Datapath.dat file which is an ASCII readable file containing the location of the database.
© 2018 TNO
160 RISKCURVES
After browsing to the required chemical database file, the importer will show the available user
defined chemical records. Simply select all or select specific names and press <Import>.
This will open a Save as dialog. Enter any descriptive file name (tci extension) but make sure
it is on a location with write access .
Upon conversion some feedback will be provided about the import results.
The newly created file needs to be added to the list of user defined chemicals in!
4.10 Mass and volume calculator

In some cases a model asks for a volume while you only have a mass available, in other
cases it is the other way around. The volume and mass calculator converts masses into
volumes and vice versa for both gases and liquids. It also supports unit conversions. This
calculator can be accessed from the "View" menu.
© 2018 TNO
The calculation is invoked as soon as something is typed or changed in the “Mass of …” or

“Volume of …” boxes. To change from mass conversion to volume conversion simply switch
to the other edit box.
NOTE!
Depending whether the chosen pressure and temperature fall within legal physical limits, a
result might be visible or not. For example if you choose a temperature above the critical
temperature, you will see no answer for a liquid mass/volume conversion. Thus, in some
cases you might discover that there is no result. In most cases this means that you are trying
to perform a conversion outside the physical limits (e.g. above the critical temperature, no
liquid phase exists, hence no mass of a liquid can be calculated).
4.11 Mortality/probit calculator

The mortality calculator (or Response calculator) is used for quick estimations of the fraction
of mortality when exposed to a concentration of a toxic chemical. It also supports unit
conversions between three different dose units. The calculator can be accessed from the
"View" menu.
Dependent upon the units of concentration and the molecular mass of the chemical that the
probits are to be calculated for, the a value of the probit a will differ. The probit calculator can
convert the value of the toxic probit as calculated for each of the three commonly- used units
for concentration: kg/m3, ppm or mg/m3.
Simply right click on the unit of the probits, and it will display other possible units, and convert
the current displayed value.
4.12 Geo-referencing images

Vector data in Map Layers exists in a real-world or map coordinate system, measured,
typically in meters. The x-coordinates increase from left to right and the y-coordinates
increase from the bottom to the top.
© 2018 TNO
162 RISKCURVES
This is quite different from a raster image represented by a Pixel Oriented Layer such as
bitmaps and JPG files. A bitmap is a raster image that is organized and measured by rows
and columns. Each cell has a row number and a column number. If the origin is located in the
upper left corner of the data, that cell would be identified as row 1, column 1.
Pixel based Image layers do not have a coordinate system. This means that the mapping
system assumes the lower left corner of the map as coordinate (0,0) and the upper right
coordinate as (x,y) where x and y are the number of pixels of the bitmap in the x and y
direction.
For Vector Layers and Pixel Layers to be displayed simultaneously, the rows and columns of
the image must be mapped into the x,y plane of a map coordinate system. An image-to-world
transformation that converts the image coordinates to map coordinates must be established.
Some image formats store geo-referencing information in the file header of the image or, in
the case of images that do not contain this geo-referencing information, facilities exist in other
products available from ESRI, for creating a file that contains the necessary transformation
parameters.
The file that contains the transformation parameters is called a world file. The world file
always takes precedence over any header information.
The utility supports various pixel format files: TIF, PNG, JPG, GIF and BMP files. The
corresponding world reference files have the extension TFW, PGW, JGW, GFW and BPW.
If these world reference files already exist, the image extent will already be shown, but a
projection coordinate system should be provided: the defined extent refers to a specific
coordinate system. In this case a message "No coordinate system found, Used default" will
be shown. Information about a projection system may be available IF a <filename>.PRJ file is
also provided. For that reason it is advised to keep these files with same name and different
extensions together.
© 2018 TNO
When importing pixel based images without geo-reference information, a manual reference is
required. The user has two different options to provide the information to be able to translate
the pixel information which are shown upon importing a background map: using Two Points
or using Length and 1 point
Method A: Georeference by using two points

Define the boundaries of a background map or two known coordinates on the map. After
selecting <Georeference by using two points>, define two coordinates by simply clicking on
the map.
After defining those points, the associated coordinates need to be provided in the fields X/Y of
point A and length.
Note 1: The coordinate units are defined by the selected projection system! These can be
changed to Lat/Long WGS84 degrees, allowing to use GOOGLE earth readouts. Use the
<right mouse> button to change map units
Note 2: It is often very convenient to zoom in on the area were a distance is known by using
the mouse scroll wheel.
If the map boundaries are known, simply click the upper left and lower right border and define
point A and point B. Provide the corresponding boundary values of these dots in the input
boxes.
The other possibility is to define TWO other known coordinates and provide the real world
coordinates in map units or Lat/Long decimal degree values.
© 2018 TNO
164 RISKCURVES
After selecting the <Apply> the < Show coordinates> check box can be used to verify the
system. After pressing the <OK> button, the adjusted reference file will be saved.
Method B Georeference by length to define dimensions by supplying a known distance

and one absolute coordinate.
By using the georeference by length, the user shall first select ONE reference point and then
a reference line (a ruler) by adding two more dots anywhere on the map.
Use the <Georeference by length> button to activate the georeferencing. After pinpointing the
first reference point with the mouse (a red point A is shown), continue selecting the two points
for which inter-distance is known. The first point reference can be a typical landmark using an
absolute projection system coordinate system or a plant center which can be referred as to
as 0,0 when using a relative coordinate system.The reference line should be a location on the
map with a known distance. In Google Earth screen dumps, this may be the distance
identification in the lower left corner.
This option assumes that the chart has an isometric X- and Y axis scaling: e.g. 10 pixels on
the X-direction will have the same distance as 10 pixels in the Y direction. Press <Apply> and
<OK> to save the reference file.
© 2018 TNO
4.13 Risk transects

Risk transects are graphical presentations of the individual risk along a defined line on the
map.
Start defining a transect by selecting the "draw transect" toolbar button or the "draw transect"
entry in the map popup menu. Simply drag on the map to draw a line and after defining the
line, the corresponding transcet graph will be drawn in the right bottom window. Note that the
transect graph can be hidden or shown, use the "View", "Transect graph" menu entry to
activate/deactivate the view.
Since the transect graph is rather small in its default position, this panel can be dragged and
resized as a floating panel. All graphic functionality for graphs is also available for the transect
graph panel.
© 2018 TNO
166 RISKCURVES
4.14 Exporting consequence data

As of version 10.0.6, RISKCURVES is equipped with a file exporter, that allows to save
specific consequence results to a CSV export file. This CSV file can easily be opened as a
spreadsheet, allowing further prost-processing.
NOTE: The exporter will only export "consequence" results: values from the
consequence calculation that is used to calculate risk values.
To export risk results, a straightforward export of contours or grids is possible in the

legend panel popup menu, or a FN graph export from the graph popup menu.
The "export wizard" is started by activating the File..Export.. Consequences to CSV in the
main menu. This will open a form that allows to specify the typical consequence results to
export.
The first wizard form ill ask to select the typical models for export, one can select ALL
phenomena models, for all defined weather classes, or make any sub-selection from all
available scenario definitions within the current project:
After this first selection, the wizard will perform a scan to collect all input and result
parameters in the selected consequence models.
Depending on the number of different consequence models selected, the resulting parameter
list can be a huge list, but the user can expand both "INPUT" and "OUTPUT" list to define the
specific inputs and results of their interest.
© 2018 TNO
If the selected output parameters contain graphs, which are lists of values. The next dialog
box will ask to specify the units in which the data is stored.
After specifying these units, a file save dialog will open, asking for a location and name for the
CSV file to store.
This file can now be opened in a spreadsheet and will contain all selected parameters in
dedicated columns for the different weather classes.
© 2018 TNO
168 RISKCURVES
4.15 Exporting contour dimensions

After calculation, all calculated contour dimensions can be reported into a convenient format,
capturing all relevant dimensions.
Select the menu <File>, <Export> , <Contour dimensions> and an export dialog will appear.
Select or modify the required levels to be reported (initially they will be identical to the values
already provided in presentation settings).
Note that for toxic concentration risk levels, no additional levels can be defined, the
concentration contours will ALWAYS be based on defined concentration thresholds in
presentation settings.
Press <Next> and provide the name, location and file extension of the contour report file. This
can be either a CSV file or a HTML report.
© 2018 TNO
Note that a CSV file can be post-processed in Excel, whereas the HTML file allows editing in
Word, which includes table layout scheme’s. The resulting report will provide a full list of ALL
scenarios, including the outcome type, outcome ID and dimensions of the selected level
contours:
© 2018 TNO
Technical backgrounds 171
5 Technical backgrounds
5.1 QRA Definitions

5.1.1 Calculation Set
5.1.2 Calculation Settings

Calculation settings is a typical collector or grouping node.
It doesn’t have its own parameters, but combines several groups of parameters, to be applied
to all input contained in a calculation set. Typical parameters are “Accuracy” describing
parameters influencing calculation accuracy and speed, “Vulnerability” settings describing the
relation between physical phenomena and damage (lethality), and “Environment” parameters,
describing ambient temperature, humidity, solar radiation etc. for the typical location.
It is also possible to calculate a Consequence Risk, which give the risk of exceeding a
specific consequence level threshold. If this option is activated, additional "consequence risk
threshold levels" need to be set.
© 2018 TNO
172 RISKCURVES
5.1.3 Accuracy parameters

Accuracy settings contain parameters that influence the accuracy of the calculation, and very
often also calculation speed, since speed and accuracy are somehow connected.
Lowest significant frequency

This is the lowest frequency that will be taken into consideration. If the frequency of an
event is lower than this value, it will be neglected.
Cell size for risk grid

This parameter defines the grid resolution of the contour map. Note that contours will be
calculated based on a Iso Risk grid. By default a cell size of 10 meter is used. However if
the range of the affected area becomes very big (routes of many kilometers, toxic events
with effect areas upon many kilometers) this might lead to enormous grid (> 10^6 cells). In
those situations a re-sampling will be performed avoiding large memory usage.
As of version 9.012, this parameter is also used to influence the accuracy of the societal
risk calculation:
After the consequence calculation, the resulting lethality footprint is translated into a
"societal risk response" grid to be able to superimpose (a wind direction and stability class
dependent) lethality on the population. The cell resolution of these grids can be adjusted
with the provided value.
However, for large effect phenomena, this would lead to huge memory loads, because all
weather classes and every potential wind-direction has its own list of or "affected" cells.
For that reason, scenario's that would use more than 100*100 cells as its "response
footprint" will be forced to use an increased cell size. Furthermore, scenario’s with shorter
maximum effect distances (less than 100 mtr) will always be calculated at the standard
accuracy of 10 mtr cells.
The usage of this relatively small "response grid" size ensures that even when using a
population distribution in much bigger cells (50 mtr), an accurate estimation of the number
of lethal victims is achieved. (e.g. in case of a partial overlap of the lethal footprint with the
population grid)
Note that population grids, used for calculation of societal risk, have a cell size that
© 2018 TNO
deviates from the risk grid cell size.

Number subsectors FN calculation
By default RISKCURVES defines 12 wind directions. This implies however that

RISKCURVES can “miss” some population concentrations when it performs societal risk
calculations.
This is shown in the left drawing. Two clouds for a 30° wind direction (=360/12) miss the
important object resulting in risk underestimation. In the right drawing, 15° wind direction (=24
wind directions) were chosen resulting in a hit of the object.
The value in this field defaults to 9 (108 wind directions).
Number of subsectors for FX calculation
About the same explanation as for FN calculations holds for individual risk calculations. Again,
a hypothetical person could be “missed”, especially where he stands far away from the cloud
and the cloud tip is relatively small when compared with the sector circumference. In general
when this factor is increased (values up to 20 are useful) the individual risk will decrease as
Riskcurves will calculate more accurately the risk caused by overlap/underlap of a cloud
compared with the sector width. The drawback is more calculation duration. More narrow
clouds have a smaller risk than wide clouds which is obvious as wide clouds can overlap to
adjacent sectors. This methodology takes it all into account at a value of 20.
Inter accident distance FX
When calculating individual risk contours along a transport route, contours can become
“caterpillar” shaped instead of a smooth line. This is caused when the inter-accident distance
used to calculate individual risk is too large. The factor defaults to 50 mtr which means that
possible accident points are located 50 meter from each other. When using scenario's with
effect distances lower than 50 mtrs, is is advised to narrow the inter accident distance.
Inter accident distance FN
This factor is used to influence the inter-accident distance during societal risk calculations.
Consider the following example:
© 2018 TNO
174 RISKCURVES
The above example illustrates a road transport. RISKCURVES will generate accident points
and calculate the size of the gas clouds.
In the left situation the accident points are separated too far and therefore the calculation
misses an important object because the clouds can not reach it. In the right in situation, more
accident points are generated and the object is hit.
The factor defaults to 50 mtr which means that possible accident points are located 50 meter
from each other. When using scenario's with maximum effect distances much lower than 50
mtrs, is is advised to narrow the inter accident distance.
Maximum number of accident points
To limit an enormous number of calculations when RISKCURVES want to generate accident

points for long routes but small consequences, this is the maximum number of accident
points it will use
5.1.4 Vulnerability parameters

Vulnerability parameters define how a specific physical effect is translated towards damage.
For toxic materials, this is derived from their toxic probits which are stored in the chemical
database, but for flame contact, heat radiation and overpressure, dedicated damage
translation can be defined..
Lethal fraction for present in flash fire

This is the fraction of mortality that is used within the flame envelop of a flash fire.
Leave it to 1 unless you have good reasons to change it.
Lethal fraction for present in flame contour

This is the fraction of mortality is used within the dimensions of a flame contour.
Leave it to 100% unless you have good reasons to change it.
Heat radiation level total destruction
This parameter defines the heat radiation level that will be associated with total destruction.
Anything above this level will result in 100% lethality
© 2018 TNO
Heat Radiation Exposure Duration
This value determines the maximum duration of exposure to heat load, as used in
consequence calculations. Default is set to: 20.0 seconds
Protection factor clothing
The protection factor applied for clothing, used for societal risk calculations on heat radiation.
A probit calculation will be applied on heat radiation, leading to a lethality. This lethality is
corrected with this factor to obtain the damage in case of societal (protected) calculations
Heat radiation damage probits
By default, the vulnerability model (probit function) as described in the Green Book [4] has
been used for the exposure to heat radiation:
with q = the heat radiation level in [W/m 2] and t = the exposure duration in [sec], which is
assumed to be maximum 20 sec (defined by parameter max heat radiation exposure
duration). The probit value is transferred to a fraction of mortality (0..1) afterwards. This
implies a probit A of -36.38, Probit B = 2.56, and probit N = 4/3
Because some countries are accustomed to use other probits, these A, B and N values can
be modified.
The methodology described above is valid for individual and societal risk, but for inside
population a protection of 100% is assumed, as long as the level is lower than the heat
radiation total destruction level.
How to convert a probit to a fraction of mortality

The probit value Pr as mentioned several times in the chapters before varies between 2 and
9. To convert the probit value to a percentage of mortality, the table below is used.
The probit values are listed within the table itself. From the side and the top of the table, the
percentage of mortality can be read. For example: A probit value of 4.01 (second row)
corresponds with a value of 16% mortality.
% 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 2.67 2.95 3.12 3.25 3.36 3.45 3.52 3.59 3.66

10 3.72 3.77 3.82 3.87 3.92 3.96 4.01 4.05 4.08 4.12
20 4.16 4.19 4.23 4.26 4.29 4.33 4.36 4.39 4.42 4.45
30 4.48 4.50 4.53 4.56 4.59 4.61 4.64 4.67 4.69 4.72
40 4.75 4.77 4.80 4.92 4.85 4.87 4.90 4.92 4.95 4.97
50 5.00 5.03 5.05 5.08 5.10 5.13 5.15 5.18 5.20 5.23
60 5,25 5.28 5.31 5.33 5.36 5.39 5.41 5.44 5.47 5.50
© 2018 TNO
176 RISKCURVES
70 5.52 5.55 5.58 5.61 5.64 5.67 5.71 5.74 5.77 5.81
80 5.84 5.88 5.92 5.95 5.99 6.04 6.08 6.13 6.18 6.23
90 6.28 6.34 6.41 6.48 6.55 6.64 6.75 6.88 7.05 7.33
99 7.33 7.37 7.41 7.46 7.51 7.58 7.65 7.75 7.88 8.09
Pressure damage based on
The translation to lethality caused by explosion overpressure can be defined by 4 different

methods:
1. Using two pressure levels: total destruction (indoors + outdoors) and a specific level for
indoors (glass) fragments damage.
2. Using a probit based on Peak pressure: Pr = A + B * ln(PeakPressure^N),
3. Using a probit based on exposed pressure impulse Pr = A + B * ln(Pressure Impulse^N)
4. Using a user defined pressure vs lethality level relation (fully customizable relation)
Note that for method 2,3,4, the total destruction damage level will only be applied to
indoor lethality
In case 3, the pressure impulse is calculated as (0.5 * peakpressure * positive phase

duration).
Method 3 cannot be applied when using the TNT overpressure calculation, because that
method does not provide a positive phase duration answer; one needs to use the Multi Energy
method for method 3.
Method 4 gives the freedom to define a fully customized relation between overpressure and
lethality by simply adding pressures and corresponding lethality levels (by default interpolation
will be used in between levels)
© 2018 TNO
Peak pressure level total destruction
This value is used to define the peak pressure level at which inside and outside lethality
is assumed to be 100% (total destruction zone). Default value is 300 mBar (0.3 Bar).
When using Pressure damage probits or a Pressure-Lethality relation, this level will only
be applied for indoor lethality.
Lethal fraction total destruction zone
Defines the lethality within the total destruction pressure level zone. By default 100% (fraction
1).
In case of a "Probit relation" or "Pressure-Lethality relation" this 100% value will ONLY be
applied for INSIDE damage, assuming that houses will collapse above this threshold and
outside lethality is already described by the provided relations.
Lethal fraction indoors damage (glass)
This value is only used in case of "Use threshold pressure level" pressure damage method.
Inside population, exposed to peak pressures between "total destruction" and "inside damage"
levels, will be treated with this corresponding inside damage lethality level.
This lethal fraction will only be applied in societal risk calculations, on inside population.
Pressure damage Probits
When using probits, the lethality will be using a probit function based on Peak pressure: Pr =
A + B * ln(PeakPressure^N) or as a probit based on exposed pressure impulse Pr = A + B
* ln(Pressure Impulse^N)
The parameters define the values a, b and N, based on units Pascal and seconds.
See Heat radiation probits for translation into lethality.
Pressure Lethality relation
When applying a pressure-lethality relation, the user needs to define a range of pressure
levels with corresponding lethality levels. The table allows to switch units, by using <right
Mouse> click on the header title. Furthermore, a consistent increasing levels range is
expected.
© 2018 TNO
178 RISKCURVES
The calculation will use interpolation inbetween these levels, unless the "Singapore block-
mode" is being activated (RISKCURVES only)
Perform toxic indoors calculation
The toxic exposure inside can be calculated based on the actual concentration time profile
and ventilation rate. This calculation is invoked by selecting "Yes" in this setting. The
calculation is performed inside the Dispersion Toxic dose models which will also present a
Inside lethality grid (expert parameter).
The inside lethality is strongly influenced by passage time of the cloud, and ventilation ratio.
Fixed indoors outdoors toxic ratio
By default, the indoor toxic calculation uses a ratio of 1/10: lethality inside is one tenth of
lethality outside.
For long release durations, high exposures, or high ventilation ratios, this may be a very
optimistic assumption: even an outside dose which is much higher than 100% lethality still
has maximum 100% lethality, thus 10% lethality inside. For that reason it is advised to use
Toxic Indoor calculation method
Ventilation ratio
This is the frequency with which the whole air volume of a room gets renewed. This
parameter influences the toxic exposure for indoor population. The higher the ventilation
ratio, the more the toxic load outside gets transported indoors.
For well insulated (northern European style) houses a value of 1/hour can be applied.
For southern countries, situations with no windows, or typical industrial ventilation much
higher values should be applied (10 refreshments/hour).
© 2018 TNO
Toxic Exposure duration

The exposure duration is used to calculate a toxic dose, integrating the concentration
(modified including the probit constants) as function of time over that period. (see inclined
lines in graph at start of exposure).
The duration of exposure is needed as the dose increases the longer one is exposed to an
effect. Normally, a default value of 30min (1800s) is used.
If in a given location the effect duration is lower than the exposure duration (the passage
time of the toxic cloud is around 60s and the user chose an exposure duration of 1800s)
EFFECTS will internally rearrange the exposure duration so there is not a loss of accuracy
in the result of the integration process.
Example
The exposure duration is a powerful tool to model evacuation or sheltering. Say, a release
happens and people can find shelter after 10 minutes. If we assume that people can find
100% shelter inside houses we can model this as follows:
1. Set the start of exposure to zero
2. Set the exposure duration to the time that people can find shelter (600s)
In this case the model starts the exposure at t = zero, which means that people close to
the source of release will suffer from the effects but people further away from the release
will be exposed to lower concentrations because the cloud has not reached them yet. All
these are taken into account by the model.
NOTE 1: Different methods of applying this exposure duration are possible, see "exposure
duration based on" parameter.
NOTE 2: By using the option "perform toxic indoors calculation" the dispersion model can
take into account that people inside houses will still be exposed to (lower) concentrations.
NOTE 3: For heat radiation, a dedicated "heat exposure duration" parameter is used, which
is default 20 seconds, because the human reaction to intensive heat radiation is much
quicker.
Use Singapore block mode
This parameter can be used to translate a resulting continuous lethality footprint into a block-
level level footprint according to Singapore QRA guidelines.
These guideline require to use THREE (or four for fire) lethality levels: 3%, 10% and 50%, and
assume that in between the 3% and 10% contours, the averaged level is 6.5%. For the next
level, in between 10% and 50%, the average lethality is 30%. Within the 50% contour, levels
range from 100% to 50%, with an average of 75%.
As of version 10.1.8 this parameter allows to select "Yes Off-site fatality risk method"
or 'Yes On-site fatality risk method".
© 2018 TNO
180 RISKCURVES
The reason for this is a specific requirement for heat radiation based risks in Singapore. For
On-site fatality risk, the standard 3%, 10%, 50% and 100% dose based fatality levels are
being applied, which is identical to previous versions. However, when applying Off site
fatality risk method, specific RADIATION levels are used to describe hazard zones:
>37.5 kW/m2 = 100% fatality (also to be applied as total destruction heat radiation
level)
21.6 - 37.5 kW/m2 = 75% fatality (these levels exactly relate to 50%-100% lethality at 30 s
exposure)
exposure)
4 - 15.3 kW/m2 = 6.5% fatality
Although a value of 4 kW/m2 does not create any fatality based on a heat dose calculation (30
seconds, using Singapore probits), the current guidelines specifically require this rather
conservative criteria as an "Off site fatality level" . This will lead to a larger heat radiation
hazard footprint when applying "Yes Offsite fatality risk method".
Note that for On site overpressure damage, the overpressure vulnerability levels
(overpressure psi to fraction of lethality) may need to be specifically tuned to the building
construction type.
For flammable contours, the 100% lethality area (or 37.5 kW/m2 for Offsite) is explicitly added
to the existing three levels. The lethality vs distance graphs and lethality footprint will be
translated according to these distinct levels:
For resulting lethality grids, the result of using this "block mode" is quit obvious: the
continuously decreasing lethality levels are translated into blocks of 75%, 30% and 6.5%
lethality.
© 2018 TNO
(For fire hazard, a 100% level is also taken into account)
5.1.5 Environment parameters

Environmental parameters define typical surrounding environment values, used within various
consequence calculations. Because separate calculations are being performed for day/night
weatherclass situations, some parameters have two (day and night) values.
Ambient Temperature
The average yearly temperature or the temperature you want to use for all calculations. In
general, the higher the temperature the larger the effects and consequences. Mostly a value
between 9 and 25 degrees Celsius is used.
© 2018 TNO
182 RISKCURVES
Ground / Surface/ Bund temperature

The average yearly temperature of the subsoil that you want to use for pool evaporation
calculations. In general, the higher the temperature the larger the evaporation rate and
consequences.
Water temperature
The average yearly temperature of the water that you want to use for pool evaporation on
water calculations. In general, the higher the temperature the larger the evaporation rate and
consequences.
Air relative humidity

The relative humidity of the atmosphere due to the partial vapor pressure of water in the
atmosphere.
The relative humidity influences the atmospheric transmissivity. For the Dutch situation the
normal variation is between 50 - 90%.
Fraction of CO2 in Atmosphere

The amount of CO2 in the atmosphere can be used for transmissivity calculations of solar
light. An average value is 0.03%
Atmospheric pressure
The outside pressure is used in various dispersion and outflow calculations.
Solar Radiation Flux
The pool evaporation model uses an overall heat balance for the pool to calculate the
evaporation. This heat balance also includes solar heat radiation.
Users can choose whether to use a fixed value for solar heat radiation, or calculate the actual
value based on day, month, cloud cover and latitude of the location.
© 2018 TNO
The solar heat radiation flux is the actual value for the heat flux as used in pool evaporation
calculations.
Note that values may range from negative (at night: earth radiates towards sky) to 1500
Watts/m 2 depending on the latitude, cloud coverage, and day of the year.
When the actual value has to be calculated, several other input values are required: earth
location latitude value, cloud cover and day/month of the year.
5.1.6 Meteorological data

The meteorological data definition contains the choice for the meteorological station to be
used. Any meteorological data set contains probabilities for typical weather classes (Pasquill
stability class, wind-speed, day or night) occurring at the location (see meterological
distribution). The number of weather classes defined will determine how many damage
definitions / consequence models are contained under a scenario (e.g only D5 and F2 or 6
different classes!).
© 2018 TNO
184 RISKCURVES

windrose view
5.1.7 Population
Population definition node contains the definition of population by means of grids (a matrix
like definition of cells) or polygons (area definition with number of inhabitants).
Population can be added by using the Population Import Wizard, or by manually adding a
polygon and defining an are with population. See defining Population.
The total cumulation of all grids and polygons under the grouping node will be used to create a
total population grid, used within the calculation sets Societal Risk calculation.
Both day an night grid will use a separate "Inside fraction" determining the fraction of the
people that are inside houses and have a some degree of protection (see vulnerability
settings)
When using "temporary polygons", it is possible to use a dedicated "inside fraction" and
"utilisation fraction" (a presence factor).
© 2018 TNO
Temporary population can be used to include the presence of large crowds (e.g. festivals,
sport events) during a FRACTION of the time. This is particular relevant if large numbers of
people are outside (thus unprotected).
5.1.8 Equipment
Equipment: a location or route on which scenarios are being analysed (distinguishing
STATIONARY and TRANSPORT equipment). Note that these nodes can be expanded, they
are placeholders or grouping nodes for a list of coordinates, or routes.
5.1.9 Scenario
Scenario: a Loss Of Containment scenario occurring at an equipment (either a stationary
location or a transport route), which has a specific failure frequency, and contains
consequence definitions: a description of the scenario in terms of substance, quantities,
release situation or resulting damage.
© 2018 TNO
186 RISKCURVES

several phenomena.
© 2018 TNO
© 2018 TNO
188 RISKCURVES
5.1.10 Modelset
A Modelset is the placeholder for the actual consequence definition. It contains either a
footprint definition or consequence model calculation, which is defined for a number
meteorological conditions
It is possible to define altered input values for specific weather class conditions by selecting
the weatherclass from the combobox.
After calculation detailed (sub)model results can be shown , by selecting a specific

weather class. These detailed results includes all graphs, contours and contour dimensions
for the selected sub-model:
© 2018 TNO
5.1.11 Consequence Risk definitions

After adding a Consequence risk calculation, the specific threshold levels to be used can be
added. Furthermore, IF both overpressure, and heat radiation and toxic concentration are
selected and associated thresholds have been defined, the resulting contours for the
combined (aggregated) risk will be presented.
To be able to distinguish different level consequence risk calculations, every definition should
have a descriptive NAME, which will be used in the legend.
This can for instance be "Injury risk" for exceeding 1 psi, 4 kW/m2, LFL flash contour or
AEGL-3 and "Escalation risk" for exceeding 7 psi combined with 20 kW/m2.
The input parameters provided here offer the possibility to define for which threshold level
these specific consequence risk contours will be drawn. If the choice "Include" is set to
<Yes>, the associated threshold input will be enabled. The presented risk levels (e.g. 10-5/yr,
10-6/yr) and associated contour colors will be the same as used for Individual Risks, and can
be defined in presentation settings.
© 2018 TNO
190 RISKCURVES
For a toxic concentration, a specific threshold description needs to be selected, This includes
choices for AEGL or ERPG based chemical independent levels, but
THOSE THRESHOLD VALUES USED HERE NEED TO BE PROVIDED IN THE

DATABASE FOR ALL CHEMICALS INVOLVED IN THE PROJECT.
A specific addition here is the "AEGL-3 scenario duration" which derives an AEGL-3 which is
interpolated for the duration of the release, according to the definition in the Singapore QRA
guidelines: (AEGL-3 10 minutes if release < 10 min, weighted values for 10 min< duration <
30 minutes, weighted values for 30 min < duration < 60 minutes, and AEGL3-60 min for
releases > 60 min, if no AEGL-3 is available then 3% lethality will be used) .


chemical database).

exposure duration.
© 2018 TNO
5.1.12 Cumulation sets

A cumulation set can be used to make a dedicated cumulation of risk sources that does not
contain all equipment or all scenario's, presented corresponding SR or IR results.
maps.
5.1.13 Comparison sets

A Comparison set allows to compare results for Calculations Sets or Cumulation sets; it will
provide multiple graphs and contours.
© 2018 TNO
192 RISKCURVES
risk situation.
accordingly.
comparison Set.
scenarios.
© 2018 TNO
5.1.14 Analysis points

An Analysis point provides the possibility to perform a risk contribution analysis for a specific
coordinate.
Every point will provide an Individual Risk Ranking report, and when societal risk maps are
activated, it will also present the corresponding societal risk curve or societal risk contribution
for that location.
Analysis point can be used to report risk contribution at specific user definable locations.
Any analysis point will produce a risk ranking per scenario, based on risk contribution at
that location on both individual risk and consequence risk.
Furthermore, the societal risk FN graph of all scenarios affecting that location will be
presented, illustrating the severity of the societal risk at that location. This FN graph per
location is the base for the societal risk area map. The FN contribution graph will illustrate the
societal risk curve for the typical population within this population grid cell of this coordinate.
These location specific FN graphs are used as the bases for the SR contribution map.
Analysis point will be illustrated on the map when the "analysis point" is the active component
in the tree or whenever the "Show equipment locations" toolbar option has been selected.
An analysis point can be defined from any calculation illustrating the Iso Risk Contours or
consequence risks, such as calculation set or the cumulation set.
To add an analysis point, use < Right mouse> < Add analysis point> on the analysis points
node, or use < Right mouse> , < Add analysis point> on top of the map to pinpoint a
coordinate from the map.
The risk ranking results will be visible after a calculation, and presented in a table in the report
tab.
© 2018 TNO
194 RISKCURVES
5.1.15 Footprint definitions

Footprint definitions can be applied as scenarios to use already-calculated consequence
levels or lethality distances. This will avoid calculation by the internal consequence models
and will just run a risk calculation, using results from a previous EFFECTS calculation,other
consequence models or maybe even some prescribed distances.
If for a typical industrial site, various identical equipment are available, it might also be useful
to perform one single calculation, and add (copy) the resulting footprints as a footprint
definition, thus avoiding calculation time.
As of version 10.1, these footprints can be either a "lethality definition" (previously called a
"damage definition") or a "consequence definition" which just describes distances to physical
effects.
© 2018 TNO
Furthermore, both footprint definitions (lethality and consequences definitions) are now
defined using Max distance, Offset (min distance), Distance to max width and Max
width, now allowing to define “egg shaped” contours instead of perfect ellipses.
Previous length/width/offset dimensions are automatically translated when importing

previous projects. (Note that max distance is equal to length PLUS offset)
The adjusted table layout makes it simple to copy/paste contour dimensions from EFFECTS
reports into these definitions:
© 2018 TNO
196 RISKCURVES
EFFECTS 10 report lists contour dim ensions as m ax dist, m in dist (offset), dist w idth and m ax w idth
Contour dim ensions from EFFECTS can be copied into a footprint definition inside RISKCURVES (use Excel as
interm ediate storage for different w eather classes)
Footprint definitions always include ONE specific phenomenon, such as (circular) Bleve and
local cloud fire, Vapour cloud explosion, jet- and poolfire, or toxic footprint zones.
Footprint definitions use values that are often entered in a table which is available for every
weather class (use combobox to switch classes). When entering the <Default> weatherclass
in a new definition, the values will be linked to all available weather class models. Overwriting
specific weather classes will unlink this connection, just like within EFFECTS. A footprint
definition modelset should also be seen as a linked set of models.
Enter the dimension values (distance is row ascending, lethal fraction or level should be
row descending) and press < down> to go to the next row.
It is strongly advised to copy/paste these values from a spreadsheet which might contain
copied results for various weather classes.
While entering values in a table, a implicit test is being performed on the consistency of the
input, the footprint dimensions should be row ascending and lethality or levels row
descending. If this requirement is not fulfilled, the definition will have a RED label.
© 2018 TNO
5.1.15.1 Consequence footprint definition
Consequence footprint definitions act similar as lethality definitions, but instead of defining
lethal fraction, the value column now contains a physical value (like kW/m2 or mbar or
mg/m3). The main advantage over lethality footprint is that these consequence footprints also
allow the calculation of Consequence risks: the probability of exceeding physical thresholds.
A BLEVE consequence definition contains a radius, duration and heat radiation versus
distance table. Overpressure damage is not included because it never plays a role compared
to the flammable effects. To describe non-flammable BLEVE's footprint (overpressure only) it
is advised to use the explosion consequence definition, with zero flammable cloud dimension,
just overpressure distances.
An Explosion consequence definition is described using flammable cloud dimensions, a

potential offset for overpressure AND distance vs overpressure information (as provided by
an explosion model). Again this table support unit conversion: values can be added in kPa,
mbar, psi etc.Units to be used for values can be adjusted by selecting a different unit in the
column header.
This consequence definition can also be used for local explosions (TNT, Vessel rupture
overpressure) without the presence of a vapour cloud: simply use ZERO dimensions of the
cloud (no offset of overpressure) AND use 1 as fraction explosion in the scenario definition.
The pressure damage translation option, provided in vulnerability settings, will determine the
lethality associated with the provided overpressure levels.
A Pool or Jet fire consequence definition is very similar to its Lethality definition, but in this
case the dimensions table provides contours of heat radiation levels. The vulnerability setting
heat radiation probits and total destruction level (35 kW/m2 by default) are used to determine
lethality associated with this radiation.
The footprint illustrated below is the typical result of applying the "Singapore block-mode" a
setting in vulnerability settings
© 2018 TNO
198 RISKCURVES
A Toxic consequence definition contains contour dimensions to specific concentration

thresholds, but also requires a CHEMICAL choice and exposure duration to be able to
translate this into lethality. For indoors lethality, choices in vulnerability settings (fixed ratio or
using a ventilation rate) determine how indoors lethality is calculated (indoor is only applied for
societal risk)
5.1.15.2 Lethality footprint definition
The lethality footprint definition can be used to enter a known lethal effect area.
A Bleve lethality definition requires input:
- radius of the fireball ; within this radius, 100% lethality is assumed.
- radius of peak overpressure ; within this radius, 100% lethality is assumed.
- radius of 25 kW/m2; within this radius, 100% lethality is assumed.
- lethality unprotected outside: within this table, users can define lethality versus distance. As
of version 10.1 values can be entered as lethality fractions or lethality percentages by simply
changing the unit in the table header:
© 2018 TNO
Although the circular BLEVE footprint can be defined for all different stability classes, this
phenomena is independent of windspeed/Pasuil class, so by entering the"<Default>
weatherclass, all other classes will use an identical footprint.
A Local Cloud fire lethality definition requires only one input:
- radius of the flashfire; within this radius, 100% lethality (can be overridden with vulnerability
setting lethal fraction flashfire) is assumed.
An Explosion lethality definition is intended to describe a VCE event, it includes both a

flashfire footprint (which can have an offset because the cloud is drifted by the wind before
ignition) and lethality due to explosion overpressure !
Note that this assumption might differ from other QRA models; it is assumed that
overpressure cannot occur without a flash fire, so we have either a flashfire of a flammable
cloud or a flashfire PLUS overpressure effects (and not either overpressure OR fire
damage) .
The probability of explosion (overpressure) phenomena occurring TOGETHER WITH with the
flash fire is defined by the "Fraction with explosion phenomena" parameter of the scenario.
This definition can also be used for local explosions (TNT, Vessel rupture overpressure)
without the presence of a vapour cloud: simply use ZERO dimensions of the cloud (no offset
of overpressure) AND use 1 as fraction explosion in the scenario definition.
© 2018 TNO
200 RISKCURVES
The (Vapour cloud) Explosion lethality definition is described by dimensions:
-Max distance, min distance (=offset), distance max width and width of flammable cloud:
defining the area of the damage zone of the flame envelope, described as an ellipse or even
egg-shaped contour. The offset defines the distance to the boundary of the flame envelope.
- The overpressure effects will always be located at the centre of the cloud, therefore the
explosion offset will not be available, UNLESS the user does not use a flammable cloud. In
this case (dimensions flammable cloud set to zero) the field "offset explosion centre" will be
enabled. This overpressure offset will move the explosion center, a positive value will move
the overpressure center away from the release point.
- Radius pressure level total destruction and Inside damage. Overpressure damage zones
are being defined as two circles: one (high pressure) zone which will have total destruction
(typically 0.3 bar overpressure level) and on giving only inside damage due to glass
fragmentation. The associated vulnerability is derived from vulnerability settings lethal fraction
total destruction pressure level and lethal fraction inside pressure level
A pool- and jetfire damage definition uses:
- Flame distance, min distance (offset), distance to width and max width: This defines the
elliptical shape of the flame itself. The offset is an offset of the tail of the flame, relative to the
release location. This implies that for a (horizontal) jet fire this offset is POSITIVE, whereas a
poolfire will always have a NEGATIVE offset (release center is in the middle of the pool)
Within the flame envelope the lethality as defined within vulnerability setting lethal fraction in
flame contour is used.
© 2018 TNO
- Lethality contour levels: these Max/min distances, distance to width and width values are
used to define an "egg shaped" damage zone.
These contour levels are used to describe concentric ellipses with a specific lethality level
describing a lethality footprint. Note that an interpolation is used to translate a footprint
towards such a footprint. Furthermore, a negative offset can be used for POOL fires,
whereas a JET fire can have a positive offset: it can have a lift off thus moved away from the
release point.
© 2018 TNO
202 RISKCURVES
As of version 10.1 it is also possible to force the "Singapore block-mode" distribution of

lethality: In this case the footprint will be translated towards 3 explicit levels of 6.5%, 30% and
75% lethality.
A toxic damage definition uses:
- Lethality contour levels for OUTSIDE and INSIDE: these length, width and offset values are
used to define elliptical shaped damage zones. The INSIDE footprint is not used for individual
risk/consequence risk, but is only used for societal risk calculations to determine victims
inside houses.
5.1.16 Societal Risk

The Societal Risk (SR) is defined as the chance per year that a group of a specific size
becomes lethal victim of an accident with dangerous substances. The Societal Risk is
presented in a FN curve, presenting the frequency (chance) on a logarithmic Y axis versus
the number of victims on a logarithmic X-axis.
It is also referred to as "Group Risk"
© 2018 TNO
5.1.17 Individual Risk

The Individual Risk (IR) is defined as the chance per year that a person on a specific
location, who is continually and unprotected present at that spot, is victim of an accident with
dangerous substances. The Iso Risk Contours on a map present locations were the IR has
identical values.
In some countries the Individual risk is being referred as "Locational Risk" indicating the the
value is valid for one specific location or coordinate
5.1.18 Iso Risk Contours

The individual risk criteria assumes 100% presence and an unprotected situation outside. A
so-called “Iso Risk Contour” can be drawn by connecting all points with equal Individual Risk.
© 2018 TNO
204 RISKCURVES
The Individual Risk can also be presented in a so-called FX curve, which presents the fraction
lethal versus distance from the release point, for different wind-directions.
Risk contours are available on the level of a calculation set, cumulation sets, comparison sets
and individual equipments.
A Risk transect can be provide for a specific line track. Such a transect will provide the risk as
a function of the place along this track.
5.1.19 Societal Risk (FN) Curve

The Societal Risk Curve (FN-curve) presents the cumulated risk that a group of specific size
will be killed. The FN curve is depicted as a two dimension graph, using a logarithmic scale
on frequency F (Y-axis) and number of victims N (X-axis) axis’s. The curve is interpreted
using a “Guide value”, which is a line that should preferably not be crossed. RISKCURVES
will present a “Guide Ratio R” value, indicating the distance to this guide value (a guide ratio
>1 implies exceeding the guide line), and also presents the “Expected value E” which is the
size of the area below the FN curve.
© 2018 TNO
A FN curve appears to be not very easy to understand or explain. The curve is the result of
spatially distributed risk sources that may influence a geographically distributed population
distribution, whereas the result only present a curve. Questions that often raise are: “Do we
have a problem” and “Where is this problem” or “What is causing this problem”. To be able
to answer these kind of questions, a Societal Risk Map was developed and these
presentations are now available within RISKCURVES.
5.1.20 Project file

This RISKCURVES Project file contains all settings and input to be used for a calculation. The file
extension is .Riskcurves and it is stored a zipped XML file.
5.1.21 SR Maps
SR (Societal Risk) Maps is basically a geographical "Area Specific Societal Risk"
presentation of a societal risk, being a two dimensional curve.
© 2018 TNO
206 RISKCURVES
As a result of the demand for a visualization of the societal risk, a new type of presentation
was developed in 2007. The question was raised when a societal risk calculation is fed with
geographical based information on population, and geographical based scenario locations,
why can we not see a geographical distribution of the societal risk.
Such a presentation would be very convenient for emergency response (were are the people
who are threatened by accident) or urban planning activities (how much space left for
population without exceeding societal risk limits: the guide value)
To provide answers to both question two types of graphs were developed: the Societal Risk
Area Map and the Societal Risk Contribution map.
The Societal Risk Area map gives an indication of which areas are affected and
the height of the risk
whereas
The Societal risk Contribution Map gives an indication which cells contribute
to the societal risk
The bases for the presentation is that every grid cell from the population grid has its own FN
curve. In the case of the Contribution map, this curve relates to the victims within this
population cell. The higher the risk of this cell (expressed as the expected value of the curve)
the more red the color will be.
© 2018 TNO
For the contribution map, the expected value is used to translate the two dimensional FN
graph into a color. The type of coloring can be adjusted, it appears that using a 6 color levels
(use legend ) provides the best contrast, but other coloring might improve the visualization.
© 2018 TNO
208 RISKCURVES
This way the curve represents the full societal risk of scenario's for the area. Note that this
area bounded FN curve will never exceed the overall FN curve for all cells.
For the societal Risk Maps it is important to understand that the risk is determined from the
receivers point of view (instead of from source).
Furthermore, because of the nature of the method, cumulating of various risk sources is
possible: transport & stationary installations, small & large scenario’s
The idea behind this new type of visualisation is that this provides a supplementary view of
what is happening, and the maps facilitate considering societal risk in early stage of planning
process:
© 2018 TNO
- the SR Area map shows areas with restrictions
- the SR Contribution map shows which areas contribute most (emergency response)
© 2018 TNO
210 RISKCURVES
5.2 The consequence models within a modelset

Consequence models will enable users to assess the physical effects of accidental releases
of toxic and flammable chemicals. The consequence models inside RISKCURVES are based
on a series of models from the Yellow Book [3rd edition, second print 2005], that allow
detailed modelling and quantitative assessment of:
· Release rate: discharge from a vessel or a pipe of gas, liquid or pressurized liquefied gas:
vapour, liquid, two-phase and spray release
· Pool evaporation: from land or water surfaces of a boiling or a non-boiling liquid
· Atmospheric dispersion: neutral gas, heavy gas and turbulent free jet
· Vapour cloud explosion: the TNO multi-energy method or TNT model
· Heat radiation from fires: BLEVE, poolfire, or jet fire.
the calculation core of RISKCURVES contains consequence models from EFFECTS, which
allows the possibility of linking models. By transferring the output of a previous model to the
input of a subsequent model it is possible to reduce manual data transfer and to assess the
physical effects of complete release scenarios.
Note that the models can also be selected in the scenario selection panel on the left of the
screen:
Typical predefined chains of models "Combined models" have been defined, allowing to use a
chain of models that perform calculations of all possible phenomena's that can occur for a
specific chemical and LOC scenario.
For every consequence model, a Yellow Book reference is given for the complete description
of the model. Within this manual the features of the models are described shortly. In a
separate last section the input and output model parameters are explained.
© 2018 TNO
The detailed description of the various models, including incorporated formula's and relations,
can be found in specific chapters of the Yellow Book:
· Chapter 2: Outflow and Spray release, separated into Gas release, Liquefied gas releases
and liquid releases
· Chapter 3: Pool evaporation
· Chapter 4: Atmospheric (vapour cloud) dispersion
· Chapter 5: Vapour cloud explosion
· Chapter 6: Heat flux from fires
In the paragraphs below the various effect models for each group of models will be described,
including information about:
· the reference for the description of the model;

· the use and characteristics of the model;
· explanation of input and output parameters;
· an example calculation with the model, with explanation of the results;
· description of the linking with other models.
The physical effects occurring upon a release of hazardous material are calculated with the
integrated TNO EFFECTS models, which are based on the models described in the Yellow
Book [3]. The EFFECTS modules have been incorporated in RISKCURVES.
5.2.1 Gas release

The release models calculate the release rate when loss of containment occurs in certain
situations. The situations refer to the physical state of the chemical and the characteristics of
the failure.
The (internal) EFFECTS consequence model will check whether a suitable release model is
selected based on physical state of the chemical and the release conditions like temperature,
pressure, location of the hole and the calculated height of the expanded liquid in a vessel. An
error message will appear if an incorrect model is selected, indicating the physical state of the
chemical under the specific release conditions.
Distinction is made between a gas release from a vessel or a (short) pipe connected to a
vessel, and a (non-stationary) release from a long pipeline, not (necessarily) connected to a
vessel.
The "gas release 10 minutes" model will search for a corresponding hole size for a 10
minutes scenario: Which size of the hole is required to get an representative rate which
equals the flow required for the scenario in which the full inventory is released in 10 minutes
5.2.1.1 Gas release from a vessel or pipe
Reference
The model is described in the Yellow Book [1997], sections 2.5.2.1 to 2.5.2.4.
© 2018 TNO
212 RISKCURVES
Characteristics and use
The model is suitable for the following situation: Hole in a vessel or in pipe connected to a
vessel containing (compressed) gas only. The hole in the pipe may either be a small leak or a
full bore rupture.
The initial release rate mainly depends on the leak size, the discharge coefficient, the initial
pressure inside the vessel and the length of the pipe (in case of a release from a pipe).
Because gas flows out of the vessel, and assuming no gas is being supplied, the pressure in
the vessel will drop and therefore the release rate decreases in time. The rate of decrease
mainly depends on the vessel volume. The expansion of the gas, because the pressure drops
from the pressure of the releasing gas to ambient, is taken into account. The model assumes
adiabatic outflow.
Releases from a hole in a pipe connected to a vessel are in principal not different from the
releases from a hole in the vessel itself, with the exception of the friction resistances of the
flow through the pipeline. For this resistance the Fanning friction factor is used, which
depends on the length, the diameter and the internal roughness of the pipe.
5.2.1.2 Gas release from a long pipeline
Reference
The model is described in the Yellow Book [1997], section 2.5.2.5. and is also called the
"Wilson model"
The model is suitable for the following situation: Total rupture of a long gas pipeline, not
(necessarily) connected to a vessel. Distinction is made between outflow from a full-bore
rupture and through a small hole in the pipeline.
The initial release rate mainly depends on the pipe diameter (= leak size) or hole size, the
friction of the flow inside the pipeline depending on the wall roughness and the initial pressure
inside the pipeline. Because of the release the pressure inside the pipeline will drop in the
region of the leak at first. The pressure drop ‘travels’ along the length of the pipeline, with a
velocity equal to the sound velocity. This causes the gas release to become non-stationary
until the pressure drop reaches the end of the pipeline. This is the point at which the model
stops the calculation. The ongoing release can be assumed to be stationary and continuous
until the pipeline is empty.
© 2018 TNO
Note that model assumes a single sided outflow at the end of a pipe with the provided
length. The model is often linked to the "Turbulent Free Jet" model, which needs consistent
input with respect to flowrate, pressure and corresponding diameter.
Although the model includes an output value "model valid until time" the determining outflow
rate ("representative rate") is usually occurring within this time.
The representative duration is calculated as the time needed to empty the pipe at this rate,
and this duration is allowed to be larger than "model valid until time": this is the estimated
duration of the outflow, WHEN IT SHOULD EMPTY AT THE REPRESENTATIVE RATE. In
reality the outflow duration will be much longer, because is starts at a high rate, but this rate
rapidly decreases to very low values.
5.2.2 Liquefied gas release

For a liquefied gas release the following differentiation in type of release is made:
A distinction is made between a vapour, champagne or a pressurized liquefied gas release

from a vessel or a (short) pipe connected to a vessel.
For a pressurized liquefied gas the following differentiation in type of release is made,
depending on the location of the hole related to the liquid level in the vessel.
DIERS (Top venting)

The hole is above liquid level in the vapour phase, but below the expanded boiling liquid level.
Because of the release of vapour the liquid starts to boil and the expanded boiling liquid may
reach the location of the hole. In that case liquid drops will be carried along with the releasing
vapour.
Simple vapour release

Hole above liquid level in the vapour phase and also above the expanded boiling liquid level. In
that case only vapour will release.
Liquefied gas from long pipeline (Morrow)

This model is dedicated to calculate the two phase release from a long pipeline. In the
combined models (universal release or LOC models), this model is used whenever the
pipeline length exceeds 1 km. Note that the release is based on the contents of the (blocked)
pipeline itelf.
© 2018 TNO
214 RISKCURVES
Instantaneous flashing release

This model calculates the division into an airborne mass and a rainout mass. It calculates the
adiabatic flash (the amount of liquid that can evaporate when cooling to to atmospheric boiling
temperature) and uses an empirical correction on this for liquid fraction in the cloud.
Spray release
This model calculates the rainout and droplet (aerosol) formation of a two phase continues
release.
Pressurized Liquefied gas release (TPDIS, bottom venting)

The hole is below liquid level in the liquid phase.
Because of the pressure drop inside the pipeline connected to the vessel vapour will be
formed inside the pipeline. The resulting release will be a two-phase release; both liquid and
vapour releasing. In the case that the pipeline is very short (hole in vessel) only liquid will
release.
For pressurized liquefied gases the models to calculate the flash evaporation and the
evaporation due to the mixing with air immediate after the release (e.g. spray release) are part
of the release rate models.
5.2.2.1 DIERS top venting (vessel only)
Reference
The model is described in the Yellow Book [1997], Paragraph 2.5.3.2
The model is suitable for the following situation: Vessel containing a pressurized liquefied gas
with a hole in the vessel above liquid level in the vapour phase, but below the expanded boiling
liquid level. In the vessel a vapour-liquid equilibrium holds, with a pressure equal to the vapour
pressure at given temperature.
Because of the release of vapour the liquid starts to boil and the expanded boiling liquid may
reach the location of the hole. In that case liquid drops will be carried along with the releasing
vapour. The release rate is considerably increased by this champagne effect. The expanded
boiling level is determined by the hole size, release conditions (pressure) and the properties
of the chemical.
© 2018 TNO
5.2.2.2 Vapour release from vessel or pipe
Reference
The model is described in the Yellow Book [1997], section 2.5.3.
with a hole in the vessel or in a pipe connected to a vessel above liquid level in the vapour
phase and also above the expanded boiling liquid level. In the vessel a vapour-liquid
equilibrium holds, with a pressure equal to the saturated vapour pressure at a given
temperature. The model is based on the phenomenon of adiabatic vapour release.
The initial release rate mainly depends on the leak size, the discharge coefficient and the
initial pressure inside the vessel. Because vapour releases, the pressure in the vessel will
drop, causing the liquid to start to boil off. Because of the boiling the temperature of the liquid
in the vessel will decrease and so the vapour pressure decreases. Therefore the vapour
release rate decreases in time.
Releases from a hole in a pipeline connected to a vessel are in principal not different from the
releases from a hole in the vessel itself, with the exception of the friction of the flow through
the pipeline. This friction depends on the length, the diameter and the internal roughness of
the pipe.
In an equilibrium situation the remaining liquid cools down to its boiling point at atmospheric
pressure. The expansion of the vapour, because the pressure drops from the pressure of the
releasing vapour to ambient, is taken into account.
5.2.2.3 Pressurized liquefied gas release from vessel or pipe
Reference
The model used is the 2-phase flow model TPDIS developed by the Finnish Meteorological
Institute [Kukkonen]. The model is described in the Yellow Book [1997], section 2.5.3.5.
© 2018 TNO
216 RISKCURVES
with a hole in the vessel or a hole in a pipe connected to a vessel below liquid level in the
liquid phase. In the vessel a vapour-liquid equilibrium holds, with a pressure equal to the
vapour pressure at given temperature.
This 2-phase flow model assumes that for a length of the pipeline connected to the vessel
smaller than 0.1 m (and also for a hole in vessel) only liquid release results; no vapour is
formed before the release.
The initial liquid release mainly depends on the leak size and the pressure in the vessel.
Because of the liquid release the liquid level decreases, by which the vapour phase
increases. Therefore more vapour will be formed by boiling of the liquid, by which the
temperature and hence pressure in the vessel decreases. Because of this phenomena and of
the decreasing of the liquid height in the vessel the liquid release rate will decrease somewhat
in time.
In case of a leak in a pipeline containing a pressurized liquefied gas a pressure drop inside
the pipeline may occur. This occurs mainly for a large leak (about equal to the pipe diameter)
and for a pipe length larger than about 0.1 m. As a result of the pressure drop inside the
pipeline, vapour will already be formed inside the pipeline and the resulting release is 2-phase,
both liquid and vapour. The TPDIS model will check for itself whether the release will be 2-
phase or only liquid.
The basic model assumptions of TPDIS [Kukkonen] are the following.

In the model the flow has been divided into three flow regimes: (I) superheated liquid, (II)
expanding two-phase fluid and (III) equilibrium two-phase fluid. Homogeneous equilibrium flow
has been assumed in the third flow regime. The homogeneity assumption implies that the
fluid is a homogeneous mixture of vapour and liquid, and that the phases move with the same
velocity. For long pipes, the length of the regime (III) may be nearly equal to the pipe length.
The process is assumed to be adiabatic. This is a reasonable assumption, as the outflow is
very rapid, and the heat energy conducted through the pipe walls is therefore much less than
the energy of the phase transitions.
5.2.2.4 Spray release of pressurized liquefied gas from vessel or pipe
Reference
The model is described in the Yellow Book [1997], section 2.5.3.7.
© 2018 TNO
The model is suitable for the following situation: evaporation of a release of pressurized
liquefied gas from a vessel or a pipe with a boiling point below ambient temperature;
(pressurized) liquefied gas release or champagne release.
The evaporation of a released pressurized liquefied gas will be determined by the following
phenomena:
– Flash-off. A flash-off means that as a result of the reduction of the pressure to

atmospheric pressure the liquid will spontaneously start to boil. The necessary heat of
evaporation for this is drawn from the liquid which will cool down to its boiling temperature at
atmospheric pressure as a result.
– Rain out and air entrainment. The release and the flash-off will generally be so violent
that the liquid in the jet will be broken into drops and the jet will mix with air. The liquid drops
will fall onto the ground (rain out). Due to the air entrainment, part of the liquid drops will
evaporate during falling. Because of the withdrawal of the heat necessary for this evaporation
the temperature of the air-vapour mixture will decrease to below the boiling temperature of the
chemical. The spray release model calculates the amount of the liquid that will rain out, which
forms a pool on the subsurface.
Linking of model data
The following parameters will be linked to other models.
Link to neutral gas dispersion - (semi-)continuous release:
– net air-borne mass flow rate
source dimensions
Link to heavy gas dispersion model - horizontal/vertical jet:
– net air-borne mass flow rate
source dimensions
temperature after rain out (boiling point)
vapour mass fraction after rain out
Link to pool evaporation, boiling pool:
– total mass liquid rained out
© 2018 TNO
218 RISKCURVES
REMARK: The pool evaporation model is suitable for instantaneous releases, therefore
this model has to be used with care in the link with the spray release model. A solution will be
the following:
From experiments it is known that in most cases all the liquid drops in a spray release will be
evaporated by the mixing with air. This means no rain out of liquid. This total evaporation of
the spray can be calculated by adjusting the source exit height to higher values. The ongoing
dispersion of this total evaporated spray release can be directly calculated with the suitable
dispersion model (see above). Within the dispersion model the height of the source has to be
adjusted to the actual value.
5.2.2.5 Instantaneous flashing liquid release
Reference
The model based on AMINAL- Belgium, "Nieuwe richtlijn voor het berekenen van flash en
spray" doc.97/001, which is original source of table 4.8 of Purple Book CPR 18E.
The model is suitable for the following situation: evaporation of an instantaneous release of
pressurized liquefied gas. Instantaneous release means that the entire contents of the vessel
or system are released in a very short time.
The evaporation of an instantaneous released amount of pressurized liquefied gas will be

determined by the flash-off and by the evaporation due to mixing with air. Based on
experiments the total airborn mass equals may be about 2 times the flashed amount, but
depends on the adiabatic flash fraction
The consequence of this evaporation is that an instantaneous gas cloud will occur. The
remaining liquid, which is cooled to its boiling point will form a pool on the ground. For this a
suitable pool evaporation model have to be used.
Because the model uses the AMINAL approximation to calculate the total mass in the cloud,
this total "airborne mass" (mass remaining in air: not rained out) is partly vapour (the
adiabatic flash amount) and partly liquid droplets.
When using a dispersion model based on the calculated total mass, and there is liquid in the
cloud, it is suggested to use a "Dense dispersion model".
Link to neutral gas dispersion - instantaneous release:
© 2018 TNO
– mass of vapour evolved
Link to heavy gas dispersion - instantaneous gas release:
– mass of vapour evolved
– temperature vapour/liquid (at boiling point)
Link to pool evaporation - boiling liquid:
– mass of liquid in pool
REMARK: The total mass evaporated calculated with the model for pool evaporation from
land of a boiling liquid is considered as an instantaneous source and can be added to the
mass of vapour evolved due to the flashing liquid instantaneous release. This total evaporated
amount (flash, mixing with air, boiling pool) can be linked to the total mass released in the
dispersion model (neutral and heavy gas) for an instantaneous source.
The calculated footprint of the local cloud fire is based on the shape of a half sphere, where
the material is mixed to Upper Explosion Limit. For non flammable materials, expansion of the
full airborne amount (including liquid droplets) to atmospheric vapour is considered.
Note that this half sphere (mixed with air and/or expanded to pure vapour) is not the typical
situation that should be used as input for dispersion. For that reason, the calculated density of
the airborn mass gives an impression on whether to use dense gas dispersion or neutral gas
dispersion (for 2 phase mixtures usually much heavier than air: densegas)
5.2.2.6 Liquefied gas from long pipeline
The Morrow model (non stationary outflow from long pipeline) can be used to calculate the
behaviour of expanding pressurized liquid in a pipeline after a rupture. Blocking of the pipeline
is assumed, and the release is based on the contents of the pipeline itself.
The model is valid until the distance to the interface (traveling pressure wave) is larger then
the length of the pipeline. The time that is need for these model calculations is shown in the
output box ‘Model valid until time’. After this the calculations continues with the predicted
mass flow rate of the last time step until all mass is removed.
Note that as of version 8.1, the model assumes a One sided outflow at the end of a pipe
with the provided length, just like the similar Wilson model for gas pipelines. This is changed
because the model is often linked to "spray release" which needs a consistent input with
respect to flowrate, pressure and diameter. If a two sided outflow is to be evaluated, two
separate pipelines need to be modeled.
Although the model includes an output value "model valid until time" the determining outflow
rate ("representative rate") is usually occurring within this time.
The (extrapolated) outflow duration is also calculated, but this is only an estimation because it
is larger than "model valid until time".
© 2018 TNO
220 RISKCURVES
It is not advised to use values from the graphs at time t higher than "model valid until time".
5.2.3 Liquid release
Reference
The model is described in the Yellow Book [1997], section 2.5.4.
The model is suitable for the following situation: Vessel containing a liquid with a hole in the
vessel or a hole in a pipe connected to a vessel below liquid level in the liquid phase. For this
model a liquid may be:
– a non-boiling liquid (boiling point above ambient)
– a gas cooled to liquid at or below its boiling point
– a pressurized liquefied gas at a pressure higher than the vapour pressure at the
storage temperature.
For this model it is assumed that the pressure above the liquid level inside the vessel remains
constant.
The release rate is calculated using the Bernoulli equation. The release rate mainly depends
on the leak size and by the pressure above the liquid plus the hydrostatic pressure of the
column of liquid (from height of leak to filling height). Because of the release of liquid the
hydrostatic pressure of the liquid column will decrease and so the release rate decreases in
time. In total the amount of liquid between the height of the leak and the initial filling height will
be released.
Most times the releasing liquid will form a pool on the ground from which evaporation takes
place. For this a suitable pool evaporation model must be used.
Releases from a hole in a pipeline connected to a vessel are in principal not different from the
releases from a hole in the vessel itself, with the exception of the friction of the flow through
the pipeline. This friction depends on the length, the diameter and the internal roughness of
the pipe.
Keep in mind that this model is valid for a pipeline connected to a vessel without a pump
installed in this system. In the event that a pump is present upstream of the leak the release
rate will be maximized by the maximum rate of the pump. Furthermore in this case it has to
be identified whether the pump will still be running or will trip.
© 2018 TNO
Link to pool evaporation model for non-boiling liquids:
– total mass released over total release duration
Link to pool evaporation model for boiling liquids, relevant for releases of gases cooled to
liquid at boiling point:
– total mass released over total release duration
5.2.4 Pool evaporation

The pool evaporation models calculate the amount of vapour evaporated from a liquid pool,
which is formed on the surface after the release of liquid material.
The evaporation model can either work with instantaneous and continuous supply of liquid,
and will determine itself wether it is boiling or non-boiling liquid.
Furthermore the type underground (land or water) and spreading conditions (bunds) will have
to be provided by the user.
Spreading pool or Spreading in bunds
Each choice has its own specific behaviour with respect to pool area, thickness of the layer
and thus evaporation behaviour
Evaporation from land or water
Differentiation is made between non-boiling liquids and boiling liquids by the program itself,
based on temperature of the release, and the characteristics of the chemical. The model
determines the conditions by itself.
Non-boiling liquid
A non-boiling liquid is a liquid with a temperature below its boiling point. Normally the boiling
temperature of the chemical will be above the ambient temperature.
For a non-boiling liquid with a boiling temperature below the ambient temperature (=
temperature subsoil) the liquid will rise in temperature because of the heat drawn from the
subsoil by which the liquid will become a boiling liquid: Then the non-boiling evaporation model
is not suitable.
© 2018 TNO
222 RISKCURVES
Boiling liquid
In the EFFECTS model it is assumed that for the evaporation of a boiling liquid the
temperature of the liquid is equal to its boiling point, which is below the ambient temperature.
This will be the case for:
· a gas cooled to liquid (refrigerated liquid)
· a gas compressed to liquid: After the immediate evaporation (flash-off and by

entrainment of air) the possibly remaining liquid, which is cooled to its boiling point at
ambient pressure will form a liquid pool on the surface. Then the same situation has
occurred as for a refrigerated liquid.
Subsoil Type
Determines the heat transfer behaviour, see Subsoil type
Subsoil Roughness
The roughness description relates to the minimum pool thickness that can occur, see Subsoil
roughness.
Results:representative values
All "Purple book representative values" are being calculated on the base of the selected
representative step
Representative density
The density of the vapour that is released from the pool is calculated on the base of mixed
with air from a 0.5 mtr top layer
Source chemical: Surface area * source rate/m2 = source rate M evaporation [kg/s] at
atmospheric pressure and representative temperature
Input air: Wind speed [m/s] * width pool [m] * 0.5 m height * 1.2 kg/s = amount of air mixed M
air in in kg/s
The combination of these two rates and density gives the density of the mixture.
© 2018 TNO
Reference
"An advanced model for spreading and evaporation of accidentally released hazardous liquids
on land"
by I.J.M. Trijssenaar-Buhre, R.P. Sterkenburg & S.I. Wijnant-Timmerman
TNO, Utrecht, The Netherlands
5.2.5 Atmospheric dispersion
The gas or vapour released will be dispersed in the surrounding area under the influence of
the atmospheric turbulence. The concentrations of the gas or vapour released in the
surrounding area can be calculated by means of the atmospheric dispersion models. These
concentrations are important for determining whether, for example, an explosive gas cloud
can form or whether injuries will occur in the case of toxic gases. Within the EFFECTS
models a first differentiation is made between the following three types of dispersion models:
In the dispersion models account is taken of the atmospheric stability, the so-called Pasquill
classes (A to F) and a certain wind velocity. The source dimensions are taken into account by
means of an imaginary (virtual) point source wind upwards, for which the dispersed
dimensions at the point of the actual source are equal to the actual source dimensions. The
dispersion models apply only to open terrain. However allowance is made for the roughness
of the terrain. The influence of trees, houses, etc. on the dispersion can be determined by
means of a class of the roughness length.
Neutral gas dispersion
The neutral gas dispersion model is based on the Gaussian plume model and no account is
taken of the difference in density between the ambient air and the gas. Because of this, the
model must only be used for gases with a density approximately the same as air, or if the gas
concentration at the point of release is low.
The direction of the release is always taken as horizontal to the wind direction.
Both Neutral and Dense gas dispersion models are available for the following type of
releases: Concentration, Explosive mass and Toxic dose.
For the neutral gas and heavy gas dispersion models the following type of calculations can be
carried out:
© 2018 TNO
224 RISKCURVES
Concentration contour
The model calculates:
– the dimensions of the contour (length and max. width) at given height
– the maximum concentration and corresponding distance at time t: only for neutral gas
dispersion, instantaneous release and semi-continuous release when cloud has
drifted away from its release point.
– graphical presentation of the contour in X-Y directions
– graphical presentation of concentration with distance.
For semi-continuous and instantaneous releases the concentration contour is calculated for
one specified time t.
Explosive mass
– the explosive mass, for concentrations higher than LEL or between LEL and UEL
– the dimensions of the LEL contour
– the dimensions of the UEL contour (not for heavy gas dispersion)
– whether the source is at ground level or the plume touches the ground level or it is a
free plume.
For semi-continuous and instantaneous releases the explosive mass is calculated for one
specified time t.
For neutral gas dispersion the explosive mass and the dimensions of the LEL and UEL
contour are calculated for a height equal to the source height.
For heavy gas dispersion these parameters are calculated for a height equal to zero (ground
level).
Toxic load
· the toxic load, Cn.t, with C = concentration in mg/m 3 and t = duration in min at position (x,
y, z) for neutral gas dispersion
· at position (x, 0, 0) for heavy gas dispersion for a certain exponent n and for a given
maximum exposure time after arrival cloud
· the maximum concentration at position (x, y, z), and for semi-continuous and
instantaneous releases the corresponding time at position (x, y, z)
· the arrival time and departure time of the cloud at position (x, y, z) (not for continuous
releases)
For these parameters a concentration equal to 1% of the maximum concentration is
assumed.
Continuous, Semi-continuous or Instantaneous
© 2018 TNO
Within the model itself, the user has to choose for continuous, Semi-continuous or
Instantaneous.
For rather long releases the continuous release dispersion model has to be used and for very
short releases the instantaneous release dispersion model. In general the following is used to
judge whether the source can be considered as continuous or instantaneous [Yellow Book]:
Continuous: at distances < 1.8 * wind velocity * duration of release
Instantaneous: at distances > 18 * wind velocity * duration of release
Semi-continuous: intermediate cases.
The dispersion calculations for the semi-continuous releases could be rather time
consuming.
Dense gas dispersion
If the gas has a higher density than air (because of a high molecular weight or of a low
temperature) it will tend to spread in a radial direction because of gravity, resulting in a ‘gas
pool’. As a result of this, in contrast to a neutral gas, the gas released may spread against the
direction of the wind.
In combined models, the selection criteria for using dense gas is: Dense gas is situation
where density of mixture (possibly including liquid droplets with very high density is 10%
heavier than air.
Heavy gas dispersion models are available for the following type of releases:
Instantaneous gas release: instantaneous release of gas, vapour or flashing liquid.
Pool evaporation: vapour source is formed by evaporation from a pool
Jet, horizontal or vertical: (semi-)continuous release of gas, vapour or spray release in

vertical or horizontal direction
Turbulent free jet
When a gas or vapour releases and the Reynolds number under the release conditions is
greater than about 2.5.104 (e.g. high release velocity) a jet occurs. Another condition is the
absence of obstacles in the jet. Turbulent free jet dispersion occurs when the gas velocity at
the release equals or is close to the velocity of sound.
© 2018 TNO
226 RISKCURVES
5.3 Combined models

New in version 9 is the possibility of using combined (or automated) models. Basically they
consist of a pre-described chain of models, linked together into one combined model.
Because a lot of the input parameters of a model can be taken from output of the preceding
model, the required input of the combined model is not the same as "all inputs of all models
together". Although they are referred as being a model-chain, it is better to think of a combined
model as being a tree, because it may consist of several branches.
The figure below illustrates that outflow model 1 can be followed by a spray release model
2 and a pool evaporation model 3. Note that models can share equal inputs, such as the
selected chemical, the wind speed and and the ambient temperature, and some inputs are
taken from a preceding model, like a rain out mass or liquid (droplet) fraction of airborne
mass. Furthermore, depending of the conditions of the cumulated source, the appropriate
dispersion model has to be run.
In the occasion of a two phase release, the source rates from for instance airborne mass
rate from spray release and evaporation rate from pool-evaporation, are to be cumulated, to
create the combined source input for the dispersion model.
The cumulation procedure as used in the models is described in detail in cumulation of

sources.
Note that the combined model often incorporates 4 types of dispersion models which will be
abbreviated in the model log:
HGDE: Heavy Gas Dispersion Explosive mass model, (Inst represents Instantaneous mode,
Pool represents Pool evaporation mode)
HGDT: Heavy Gas Dispersion Toxic model
NGDE: Neutral Gas Dispersion Explosive mass model
NGDT: Neutral Gas Dispersion Toxic model
Furthermore, depending on the properties of the chemical material incorporated (and the
selection of phenomena to evaluate), the model chain will decide which mode (toxic of
flammable) or typical model type (heavy gas dispersion or neutral gas dispersion) to activate.
Usually, the branching starts with selection of the typical phase of the chemical (gas, liquefied
gas or liquid).
© 2018 TNO
Apart from material phase, the type of scenario (instantaneous or semi continuous) will also
play an important role in selection of the release model.Typical LOC (Loss Of Containment)
scenarios will consist of an outflow (release) model (possibly followed by spray release or
turbulent free jet), followed by a possible pool evaporation model (if there is a rain-out mass)
and finally a dispersion model where the density of the gas determines whether to use the
heavy gas or the neutral gas model.
In order to be able to determine the correct chain, preconditions have been defined for all
branches of the model tree. For example: pool evaporation and pool fire models will require
the existence of a pool (pure liquid phase) or rain out mass from the two phase release.
The type of decisions that have been made along the route of calculating, are being presented
in the model log. All models that have been run will be listed here.
Models that were skipped from calculation will provide a reason why: "neutral gas dispersion
did not run because precondition not fulfilled: not a neutral gas" or "material is not toxic"
Apart from the chain of events as illustrated above, some specific phenomena can also be
incorporated within combined models: depending on the type of ignition: a BLEVE, Pool fire or
Jet fire can happen. The occurrence of these phenomena also depends on the input
parameters: type of release (instantaneous, continuous) and state of the chemical.
The combined models will automatically incorporate all possible phenomena

according to the schedule below.
© 2018 TNO
228 RISKCURVES
5.4 Cumulation of sources

In the occasion of a release from a two phase chemical the amount of mass that is thrown
into the air and is to be used as the dispersion source rate can be determined by two
processes:
· Material that remains in air after the release (flash or spray)

· Material that rains-out, but eventually will evaporate from a pool
The way the two sources are combined depends on the kind of release that is occurring.
Instantaneous (G1) scenario

In case of an instantaneous G1 scenario, the dispersion models will have to run in
"instantaneous mode", whereas the source rate from the pool is an continuous source. For
that reason, two dispersion models will need to run. Note that it can occur that the
instantaneous flash will be a heavy gas (due to the liquid fraction and temperature), whereas
the pool evaporation source may be "neutral". Note the density of the evaporated mass is
based on mixing with air of a 0.5 meter window height.
After calculation of (toxic or explosive) result, the dispersion results itself are cumulated.
For this cumulation of an instantaneous (G1) dispersion result, distinction has been made
between cumulation of dispersion-explosive models and cumulation of dispersion-toxics
models.
In normal mode, the presented contours and lethality grids will only present the corrected
dominating source, if the "expert mode"has been chosen, the secondary dispersion results
are also visualized.
© 2018 TNO
Continuous release
In case of the continuous release, the source rate is determined by:
1. The 2 phase Bottom Discharge (TPDIS) model, followed by spray release, which
calculates rainout mass flowrate and a airborn flowrate
2. The pool evaporation, fed by the rain out massrate will also create a continuous
sourcerate.
The dispersion model has to be fed with important cumulated parameters: combined mass
flowrate, representative release duration, and liquid fraction of the mixture.
© 2018 TNO
230 RISKCURVES
Not that if the input chemical is a pure liquid, the dispersion model will run in "poolevaporation
mode" and input will be purely the pool evaporation mass rate (release height 0).
If the chemical is a gas, the cumulation routine will skip the pool-input, and the following
dispersion model will run in "horizontal jet" mode, with dimensions taken from the jet
diameter.
5.5 Model input parameters
Each model inside EFFECTS uses it's own set of required input fields.
To obtain additional information about a specific input box, simply press <F1> while the
cursor in the input box, and specific information about the field will pop up.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.1 Absorption speed
Absorption speed
This is the average speed with which the particles are absorbed by the absorption surface
considered for the materials present in the room.
5.5.2 Absorption surface
Absorption surface
This is the surface of the materials present in the room which can be considered to absorb
chemical particles with a certain absorption speed.
5.5.3 Adiabatic vapour flash fraction

Adiabatic vapour flash fraction
The Adiabatic vapour flash fraction present the amount of mass which can evaporate when
cooling down to boiling temperature at atmospheric conditions.
5.5.4 Accuracy
Accuracy
The resolution of graphs and grids in the dispersion calculations are being determined based
on a single "accuracy" setting.
It can be set to Low, Medium or High, where Low the the preferred (and usually sufficient)
setting. Medium and High can be used to get a larger number of point in graphs and grids
creating even smoother graphs and images.
Note: A setting to high will not only create graphs with more points, but the grids will also have
a much higher resolution, leading to larger project files.
© 2018 TNO
232 RISKCURVES
5.5.5 Air relative humidity
Air relative humidity

The relative humidity of the atmosphere due to the partial vapor pressure of water in the
atmosphere.
The relative humidity influences the atmospheric transmissivity. For the Dutch situation the
normal variation is between 50 - 90%.
5.5.6 Always use fast dispersion model

Always use fast dispersion model
Obsolete value, presented for compatibility issues.
5.5.7 Ambient pressure
Ambient pressure
This is the ambient pressure at the vicinity of the release.
5.5.8 Ambient relative humidity
Ambient relative humidity

This is the air humidity in the vicinity of the release.
5.5.9 Ambient temperature
Ambient Temperature
The average yearly temperature or the temperature you want to use for all calculations. In
general, the higher the temperature the larger the effects and consequences. Mostly a value
between 9 and 25 degrees Celsius is used.
5.5.10 Amount of CO2 in atmosphere
Amount of CO2 in atmosphere

This is the amount of carbon dioxide in the air. The default value is 0.03 %
© 2018 TNO
5.5.11 Angle between hole and flame axis (?)
Angle between hole and flame axis (?)

As indicated in the figure, ‘a ’ is the angle between the hole axis and the central axis of the
flame.
5.5.12 Area of LFL contour

Area of LFL contour (at time T)
This number represents the total area (projected footprint area) of the flammable cloud at a
specific time. The size of the cloud is a measure for the potential damage when the
flammable cloud gets ignited. By default, 100% lethality is assumed within the flammable
cloud / flashfire
5.5.13 at distance
....at distance
Fields that have "…" at the beginning, always refer to a field directly above this one.
This is the distance between the release point and the (last) down-wind location where the
maximum concentration is found, in the direction defined by (Yd, Zd).
5.5.14 at distance to the source
. . . at distance to the source
© 2018 TNO
234 RISKCURVES
This is the down-wind distance from the source point (the stack) to the point at which the
maximum height of the plume is reached.
5.5.15 at time t
...at time t
This is the time at which the contour of the flammable cloud is displayed.
Because the user can choose to display results at various specified time steps, the actual
time is listed as well:
tmac represents the Time for the Maximum Area of Cloud.
tmem is the time for Maximum Explosive Mass
tuser at any user specified time
5.5.16 Atmospheric pressure
Atmospheric pressure
The outside pressure is used in various dispersion and outflow calculations.
5.5.17 Atmospheric transmissivity
Atmospheric transmissivity
The atmospheric transmissivity (ta) is a measure for the absorbed heat which is emitted
by the fire and absorbed by the air in between the radiator and the observer. Without
absorption factors, ta equals to 1. The absorption factors (a w and a c) depend upon the
properties of the main absorbing components (H2O and CO2) in the air. Therefore the
atmospheric transmissivity is defined as:
The absorption factors a w and a c are estimated by using the graphs from Hottel, which
can also be found in the YB 3rd Edition 1997 on page 6.47.
5.5.18 Average mass flow rate
Average mass flow rate

This is the mass flow rate averaged over the time specified in the field "...Based upon
time".
5.5.19 Average release rate (1st 20% )
Average release rate (1st 20%)
© 2018 TNO
This is the release rate averaged during the first (out of five) period of the release in which
20% of the total released mass is released.
As an example, if for a given scenario the overall released mass from the beginning of the
release until the vessel gets empty is 10,000 kg, and the first 2,000 kg (20% of the total
released mass) are released in 100 s, the average release rate (1st 20%) will be 20 kg/s.
This value is recommended to be used as averaged mass flow rate when linking outflow
models to pool evaporation or dispersion models in which we are interested in the
flammability of the chemical (explosive calculations).
5.5.20 Average release rate (2nd 20% )

Average release rate (2nd 20%)
This is the release rate averaged during the second (out of five) period of the release in which
20% of the total released mass is released.
As an example, if for a given scenario the overall released mass from the beginning of the
release until the vessel gets empty is 10,000 kg, and the second 2,000 kg (20% of the total
released mass) are released in 200 s, the average release rate (2nd 20%) will be 10 kg/s.
This value is recommended to be used as averaged mass flow rate when linking outflow
models to pool evaporation or dispersion models in which we are interested in the toxicity of
the chemical (toxic calculations).
5.5.21 Axial distance from release (Sd)
Axial distance from release (Sd)

This is the distance from the release point (the jet’s release point can differ from the
position where the release is done, because of the distance required for the flow to expand
from high to ambient pressure) to the point of study, along the jet’s axis or center-line.
The different points and distances are shown in the figure below, to make the
understanding easier.
© 2018 TNO
236 RISKCURVES
5.5.22 Based upon time
. . based upon time

This is the time over which the mass flow rate is averaged.
This time is usually the time of study t ("Time t after start release"), but if the vessel is
emptied previously, the time used to do the average is the time required for the emptying of
the vessel.
5.5.23 Blast wave shape at Xd
Blast-wave shape at Xd
This is the shape of the blast wave obtained at the point of study Xd for a given vapour
cloud explosion scenario.
Three different shapes are possible, as defined in the method:
- Pressure wave: rapidly propagating wave in atmosphere causing a gradual
change in gas-dynamic state: high-density, pressure and particle velocity
- Shock wave: rapidly propagating wave in atmosphere causing an
instantaneous change in gas-dynamic state: high-density, pressure and particle
velocity
- Intermediate wave: intermediate wave between the pressure and the shock
wave
5.5.24 BLEVE calculation type
BLEVE calculation type
© 2018 TNO
The BLEVE model support the usage of two different BLEVE calculation models. By default,
the "Dynamic model" is used.
(based on "Dynamic BLEVE: W.E. Martinsen and J.D. Marx, An improved model for the
prediction of radiant heat from fireballs,in: proceedings of the international conference and
workshop on modelling the consequences of accidental releases of hazardous materials,
sept. 28 - oct. 1 1999, San Francisco, California p.p. 605-621.).
The other "Static model" method is based on the Yellow Book (CPR-14E), 3rd edition 1997,
Paragraph 6.5.7.
Both models provide similar results, but the Dynamic BLEVE provides a more realistic time
dependent modelling of the phenomenon: it describes a growing and rising fireball.
Note that the static BLEVE also requires to enter a CO2 concentration to calculate
atmospheric transmissivity, and it reports a flame temperature. The height of the fireball is
always expressed as the height to the center of the sphere.
Due to the growing and rising effect, the dynamic BLEVE model provide higher max. radiation
levels at short distances, whereas on longer distances, the static BLEVE has higher doses.
When using 35 kW/m2 as a 100% lethality threshold, the Dynamic BLEVE result in a much
bigger 100% lethality radius, whereas the lower percentages of damage will not reach as far
as in case of the static model.
5.5.25 Burst pressure vessel
Burst pressure vessel

This is the absolute pressure inside the vessel at the moment of rupture.
5.5.26 Calculate contours for

Calculate contours for Effects or Consequences
The user can specify if output should contain levels for specific values (EFFECTS) or also
consequence lethality levels.
5.5.27 Calculate toxic contour by
Calculate toxic contour by

If the chemical has a valid probit function stored in the database, then a toxic contour can
be calculated. In this input box, you can indicate whether the contour will be representing a
toxic dose, or a fraction of mortality.
5.5.28 Case description
Case description
In this field, you can enter a description of the cases that you are calculating. It defaults to
"Session X" where X is a number between 1 and 5 or 16 (dependent upon the operating
system).
© 2018 TNO
238 RISKCURVES
The case description will be shown in all graph legends as well as in all text output.
5.5.29 Cause of vessel failure
Cause of vessel failure

Combo Box where the eight different possible causes that can lead to the failure of a
vessel are shown. Those are:
- Pressure vessel burst with ideal gas: in case of accidental rupture (reduction of
vessel’s strength, domino effect…) of a pressurized vessel containing only a gas
which can be considered ideal.
- Pressure vessel burst with non-ideal gas/vapour: in case of accidental rupture
(reduction of vessel’s strength, domino effect…) of a pressurized vessel containing
only a gas which cannot be considered ideal.
- Pressure liquefied gas, BLEVE: in case of accidental rupture of a pressurised
vessel containing liquefied gas, so to take into account the work supplied by the
expansion of the liquid. Expansion work data is only available for ammonia, carbon
dioxide, nitrogen, oxygen, ethane, propane and iso-butane. For this chemicals, no
liberated energy has to be input, but for other liquefied chemicals, the liberated energy
has to be estimated through enthalpy diagrams or tables and then input.
- Decomposition of materials: in case of rupture due to the decomposition of
materials stored in the vessel.
- Runaway reaction, ideal gases: in case of rupture due to a runaway reaction in
which the gas phase can be considered to be ideal.
- Runaway reaction, non-ideal gases/vapours: in case of rupture due to a runaway
reaction in which the gas phase cannot be considered to be ideal.
- Internal explosion: in case of rupture due to an internal explosion of the vessel,
which increases the pressure inside the vessel until rupture.
The "pressure vessel burst with ideal gas" and "internal explosion" causes of rupture can
apparently seen to be the same, because the program requires the same inputs.
The overpressure calculation is the same for both cases, according to Baker’s model, but
the calculation of the initial speed is done with different models, due to the presence of
higher impulses in case of an internal explosion.
5.5.30 Chemical name
Chemical name
This is the name of the chemical that you want to perform your calculation with. A chemical
can be toxic or flammable or both. Some chemicals (like water) are neither toxic nor
flammable. These are present in the database for reference purposes and for calculations
where water is involved (like evaporation of a chemical on water).
The small browse button behind
NOTE:
© 2018 TNO
When a chemical does not have any toxic properties listed in the database, this does NOT
mean that it is not toxic. It only means that there is no probit (toxicity) function available.
Many chemicals are toxic, however only a very limited number have specific probit
functions available from literature that describe the mortal toxicity to humans. Probit
functions for most common chemicals are already added in the standard database.
5.5.31 Cloud cover

Cloud cover
The cloud cover used for the calculation of the actual solar heat radiation. This value directly
influences transmission of energy through the clouds. 100% cloud cover leaves 0% of the
original solar heat radiation flux.
5.5.32 Cloud passage time
Cloud passage time

This is the time at which we assume the toxic cloud arrives at the position where the room
is found.
5.5.33 Combustion rate
Combustion rate / Burning mass rate

The total combustion rate is found by multiplying the surface area of the pool and the pool
burning mass flux. The burning mass flux can be provided in the database, or it will be
calculated if this value is not available.
As of version 10, the burning mass flux is provided as a separate field in the chemical
databases. For single components, many common substances already have an
experimental value provided in the database (expressed as kg/s.m2). If this value is not
available, the Burgess relation (Equation 6.67 on page 6.65 in the YB-2005 [Burgess,
1974].) will be used to estimate the burning mass flux.
Note that as soon as a “burning mass flux” value is (user) defined in the chemical
database, this value will overrule the use of the Burgess relation.
The typical values provided in the default database are based on Rew, P.J., Hulbert, W.G.
(1996), ‘Development of a pool fire thermal radiation model’, HSE Contract research report
no. 96. See table below.
© 2018 TNO
240 RISKCURVES
5.5.34 Combustion product to show

Combustion product to show
The Plume rise model is capable of monitoring / reporting concentrations for specific
components from a combustion process. Depending on the chosen substance, the specific
formation rate for this substance should be entered (the plume rise model can be linked to a
Combustion, toxic combustion products" model
Potential chemicals are "Soot (unburned carbon), CO2, NO2, SO2, HCl, HBr and HF.
The resulting concentration contours (levels like PAC, ERPG's or AEGL can be chosen in
presentation settings) will related to the chosen combustion product.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.35 Concentrating averaging time flammables
Concentrating averaging time flammables

This value is used to calculate an time averaged concentration for flammable substances.
Default is 20.0 sec.
The minimum value for the averaging time is 18.75 s [Yellow Book], this compares to the
value for an instantaneous source, which is also used for the calculations of the contour for
the flammability limits and the explosive mass.
5.5.36 Concentrating averaging time toxics
Concentrating averaging time toxics

This value is used to calculate an time averaged concentration for toxic loads. Default is
600.0 sec.
The averaging time for toxic concentration is related to aspects of the receiver. For local
irritant chemicals the effects can occur within few seconds (few breathings) and for
systematically irritant chemicals within few minutes (few times pumping of blood through
body).
Therefore the standard value is chosen to be 60.
5.5.37 Concentration at (Sd, Yd)
Concentration at (Sd, Yd)

This is the concentration of the considered chemical calculated at the point of study Sd,Yd.
5.5.38 Concentration at (Xd, Yd, Zd, t)
Concentration at (Xd, Yd, Zd, t)

This is the concentration that is calculated for a given release at the point of study Xd, Yd,
Zd and time t (semi-continuous and instantaneous releases) or at any time (continuous
releases).
5.5.39 Concentration at maximum plume rise
Concentration at maximum plume rise

This is the concentration in the plume center-line at the down-wind position where the
maximum height of the plume is reached.
© 2018 TNO
242 RISKCURVES
5.5.40 Concentration at plume touch-down
Concentration at plume touch-down

This is the concentration in the plume center-line at the down-wind position where the
plume touch-down occurs.
This output is only calculated for negatively buoyant plumes.
5.5.41 Concentration at plume's centre-line at Xd
Concentration at plume's center-line at Xd

This is the concentration of released chemical at the plume’s center-line at the down-wind
point of study Xd.
This output is not calculated, so not shown, when the distance from release (Xd) is higher
than the distance at which the maximum height of the plume is reached (for positively
buoyant plumes) or higher than the distance where the plume’s touch-down occurs (for
negatively buoyant plumes).
5.5.42 Concentration averaging time
Concentration averaging time

This the duration over which the concentration will be ‘averaged’ to take into account the
effect of the meandering of the wind.
As a rule of thumb, 600 seconds is used for toxic dispersion, and 20 s for flammable
substances.
© 2018 TNO
The minimum value for the averaging time is 20 s [Yellow Book paragraph 4.5.3.4:
minimum sigma correction is 0.5, which is obtained for a time of 20 sec.].
Usually this 20 sec is used for the calculations of the contour for the flammability limits and
the explosive mass.
The averaging time for toxic concentration is related to aspects of the receiver, but
generally taken as 600 seconds. For local irritant chemicals the effects can occur within
few seconds (few breathing's) and for systematically irritant chemicals within a few
minutes (pumping of blood through body).
This field is not required for instantaneous releases.
5.5.43 Concentration indoors at time t
Concentration indoors at time t

This is the concentration which is found inside the room at time t. We assume the
concentration is constant in the whole volume of the room.
5.5.44 Concentration reduction at t
Concentration reduction at t
This is the unitary fraction of reduced concentration (outdoors concentration minus indoors
concentration) on the basis of the outdoors concentration.
Where:
© 2018 TNO
244 RISKCURVES
CR: concentration reduction [-]

Co: concentration outdoors [kg/m 3]
Ci: concentration indoors [kg/m 3]
5.5.45 Congested area

Congested area
A congested area is a receiving area that can be associated to a flammable cloud dispersion
model. It needs to be drawn (preferably on top of a background map) as a polygon.
5.5.46 Convective heat production

Convective heat production
The convective heat production determines the amount of "convective" heat produced by a
fire. Part the available "combustion" heat will be radiative heat (approx 30%), part will be lost
due to conduction or non-ideal combustion, but an important part of the produced heat by a
fire will be "convective heat" . This amount of heat can be calculated by the toxic combustion
model but it can also be user input for the plume rise model.
In the plume rise model, this available convective heat will highly influence the rising behavior
of a smoke plume. If there is a large amount of convective heat, the plume might fully
penetrate the the mixing layer, if there is little heat the plume will quickly stop rising up and just
drift horizontally. This behavior is shown in the plume sideview, which also illustrates the
height of the mixing layer.
5.5.47 Contour dimensions

Contour dimensions
For all contours that are being calculated based on the provided threshold levels (such as
lethality contour levels, heat radiation contour levels etc) the dimensions are being reported in
the report tab.
As of version 10.1, the dimensions are described as "maximum distance, Minimum distance
(Offset), Maximum width, and Distance to this maximum width.
Note that in the situation that the contour also has an upwind part, this offset will be negative!
Note that the previous version would report a total length and width of the contour: this length
of the contour was not always equal to maximum distance to the contour: if the is an offset,
the maximum distance is equal to length plus offset (where offset is negative IF there is an
upwind effect)
© 2018 TNO
5.5.48 Confined mass in explosive range
Confined mass in explosive range

This is the total mass the program uses to make the calculations. It comes from
multiplying the "Total mass in explosive range" by the "Fraction of flammable cloud
confined".
5.5.49 Contour levels

Contour levels (heat radiation, lethality, overpressure, concentration)
As of version 10.1, the specific contours that are to be shown in fire, explosion or toxic
models, can be defined on a central location in presentation settings.
Where the previous version would require multiple calculation to be able to visualize multiple
contours, the user can now define various levels of interest to be shown as contours.
Contour levels can be set for Heat radiation intensity (fire models), Peak overpressure
(explosion models), Concentrations (dispersion models) and lethality levels (all models
calculating lethality).
© 2018 TNO
246 RISKCURVES
A change of these contour levels will usually not require recalculation, the relevant contour will
be withdrawn from available model results (grids or level vs distance graphs). For dispersion
model concentration contour levels however, a change of required concentration levels does
require recalculation of the dispersion model because the requested contour level might
need recalculation up to longer end distances. As a result, dispersion models will be
displayed in italic upon change of concentration levels.
Concentration levels are defined using their description according to available database
thresholds fields. If the provided threshold is not available for the chemical, the dispersion
model will provide a warning. Within the (Neutral and Dense gas) concentration model, an
additional numerical threshold concentration can be defined.
“maximum distance” minus “offset”
The list of numerical values of contour levels can be altered using the browse button behind
the list which will open the list editor :
New values can be added by using the <Add> button, replaced or deleted after selection of a
specific value in the list, or re-ordered using the <+> and <-> buttons to the right of the list.
5.5.50 Contour plot accuracy
Contour plot accuracy

In cases where you can not find a contour while you would expect it, or find contours with
strange shapes, are not closed or are "jagged", decreasing the value of the accuracy (e.g.
from 1% to 0.1% or even 0.001%) will often give better results. The accuracy is set to 1%
by default as an optimum between accuracy and calculation duration. The more accurate,
the better the results (and no contours will be "lost"), but the longer the program will
calculate longer.
© 2018 TNO
The "Contour plot accuracy" value is the maximum relative error (in %) associated to the
value (Vcalculated) of the concentration, toxic dose or fraction of mortality (depending upon
the type of contour) in any of the points of the contour, related to the threshold value
(Vthreshold).
For turbulent free jet calculations, the accuracy is only related to the calculation of the point
in the jet’s axis at which the threshold concentration is reached; the rest of the points of the
contour have an accuracy of 100%, since the radial distance at which a concentration is
reached can be analytically calculated from the threshold concentration and the axial
distance itself, and no iterative procedure is used.
A lower value indicates a higher accuracy
5.5.51 Cross-sectional area of the tank
Cross-sectional area of the tank
The cross-sectional area of the storage tank
5.5.52 Curve Number
Curve Number
Combo Box where the curve to be used to obtain the different results of the method is
selected.
- 1: Very weak deflagration
- 2: Very weak deflagration
- 3: Weak deflagration
- 4: Weak deflagration
- 5: Medium deflagration
- 6: Strong deflagration
- 7: Strong deflagration
- 8: Very strong deflagration
- 9: Very strong deflagration
- 10: Detonation
© 2018 TNO
248 RISKCURVES
As a default, the value from the the System Parameters value "Curve number for ME" will
be used.
The table below gives some indications on which class (curve number) to use for typical
blast strength, ignition strength, obstruction and parallel plane categories.
(see also paragraph 5.5.2 of the Yellow book)
5.5.53 CurveNumber for ME
CurveNumber for Multi energy explosion method

The multi energy method for explosions has an important parameter "CurveNumber".
Default this one is set to 10. Although this value is quiet unrealistic, in combination with 8%
confined, answers are in the same order of magnitude as the old TNT method.

5. Medium deflagration
10. Detonation
© 2018 TNO
5.5.54 Damage (general description) at Xd
Damage (general description) at Xd

This is the general description of the damage suffered at the point of study.
4 different situations can be found:

- Total destruction (Zone A: > 83 kPa)
- Heavy damage (Zone B: 35 - 83 kPa)
- Moderate damage (Zone C: 17 - 35 kPa)
- Minor damage (Zone D: 3.5 - 17 kPa)
The damage is dependent upon the overpressure obtained at Xd.
5.5.55 Damage to brick houses at Xd
Damage to brick houses at Xd

This is the damage suffered by a brick house if this one was situated at the point of study.
- More than 75% of all outer brick walls have collapsed (70 kPa)
- The damage is not repairable; 50% to 75% of the outer brick walls are lightly
to heavily damaged. The remaining brick walls are unreliable (35 kPa)
- Not habitable without major repair works. Partial roof failures, 25% of all brick
walls have failed, serious damage to the remaining carrying elements. Damage
to window frames and doors (7-15 kPa)
- Habitable after relatively easy repairs. Minor structural damage (3 kPa)
- Damage to roofs, ceilings, minor crack formation in plastering, more than 1%
damage to glass panels (1 - 1.5 kPa
5.5.56 Damage to structures (empirical) at Xd
Damage to structures (empirical) at Xd

This is the damage suffered by a structure if this one was situated at the point of study.

- The supporting structure of a round storage tank has collapsed (100 kPa). '
- Brickstone walls (20-30 cm) have collapsed (50 kPa). '
- Displacement of a cylindrical storage tank, failure of connecting pipes (50-
100 kPa). '
- Loaded train carriages turned over (50 kPa). '
- Collapse of a pipe-bridge (40-55 kPa). '
© 2018 TNO
250 RISKCURVES
- Displacement of a pipe-bridge, rupture of piping (35-40 kPa). '

- Damage to a fractioning column (35-80 kPa). '
- Plating of cars and trucks pressed inwards (35 kPa). '
- Breakage of wooden telephone poles (35 kPa). '
- Cladding of light industry building ripped-off (30 kPa). '
- Collapse of steel frames and displacement of foundation (20 kPa). '
- Industrial steel self-framing structure collapsed (20-30 kPa). '
- Cracking in empty oil-storage tanks (20-30 kPa). '
- Slight deformation of a pipe-bridge (20-30 kPa). '
- Large trees have fallen down (20-40 kPa). '
- Walls made of concrete blocks have collapsed (15-20). '
- Minor damage to steel frames (8-10 kPa). '
- Connections between steel or aluminium ondulated plates have failed 7-14
kPa). '
- The roof of a storage tank has collapsed (7 kPa). '
The damage is dependent upon the overpressure obtained at Xd..
5.5.57 Damage to typical American-style houses at Xd
Damage to typical American-style houses at Xd
This is the damage suffered by a typical American-style house if this one was situated at
the point of study.

- Total collapse of building (70 kPa)
- Serious damage. Collapse of some walls (30 kPa)
- Moderate to minor damage. Deformed walls and doors; failure of joints.
Doors and window frames have failed. Wall covering has fallen down (15 kPa)
- Minor damage. Comparable to a damage due to a storm; wooden walls fail,
breakage of windows (7-10 kPa)
5.5.58 Day Month Year number

Day ,Month and year numbers
© 2018 TNO
The day, month and year number are used for the calculation of the actual solar heat
radiation. This value directly influences the angle the sun and a horizontal earth surface, on a
specified earth latitude
For maximum solar heat radiation, day 21 and month 6 (June) can be used, 21 12
(December) provides the minimum solar radiation.
5.5.59 Default mixingheight
Default mixingheight
Used in dispersion calculations. Default value 500.0 m
5.5.60 Define population by

Define population by
A choice to define the population either by absolute number of people, or by population

density.
If population density is used, the total number of people will change whenever the area of the
polygon is changed.
If total number of people is defined, the density will be influenced by the definition of the area.
5.5.61 Density at time T

Density at time T
If the user has specified "calculate at specified time" this filed will present the density inside
the vessel at this time.
5.5.62 Density gas at pipe exit at time t

Density gas at pipe exit at time t
This is the density of the gas at the pipe exit, at time t
5.5.63 Diameter of expanded jet
Diameter of expanded jet
© 2018 TNO
252 RISKCURVES
This is the diameter of the jet after expanding from the release pressure (at the vessel or
pipe) to atmospheric pressure.
When the selected model is the dense gas dispersion, this field is required only for
horizontal and vertical jets types of release.
5.5.64 Diameter of the tank
Diameter of the tank

This is the diameter of the storage tank, influencing the outer perimeter and internal area
dimension.
5.5.65 Discharge coefficient
Discharge coefficient
This is the coefficient (CD) used to take into account the limitation of the flow in a hole due
to contraction and friction phenomena.
Where
Cf = friction coefficient [-]

Cc = contraction coefficient [-]
Contraction is caused by the fact that the fluid in the vessel is flowing into the opening from
all directions, having a velocity component perpendicular to the axis of the opening. The
flowing fluid must be bent in the direction parallel to the hole’s axis. The inertia of the fluid
results in the smallest cross-sectional area, with no radical acceleration, that is smaller
than the area of the opening.
For sharp orifices contraction plays a roll and friction is negligible, and the following value
for the discharge coefficient (Cd) is recommended:
Cd (sharp orifices) » 0.62
For rounded orifices contraction does not play a roll and friction is small, and the following
value for the discharge coefficient (Cd) is recommended:
Cd (rounded orifices) » 0.95 – 0.99
© 2018 TNO
5.5.66 Distance from center of the pool (Xd)
Distance from center of the pool (Xd)

Distance (Xd) of the object/observer to center of pool, as indicated in the figure
5.5.67 Distance from centre mass of confined explosive cloud to point of study
Distance from center mass of confined explosive cloud to point of study

This is the distance from the center mass of the confined explosive cloud considered to the
point of study, where the method results are calculated.
In the Multi energy method, the overpressure, dynamic pressure, pressure impulse and
positive phase duration calculation depends upon this distance. In the TNT equivalency
method, only the overpressure calculation depends upon this distance, as it is the only
parameter that can be calculated.
5.5.68 Distance from centre mass of the cloud at which threshold overpressure is
reached
Distance from center mass of the cloud at which threshold overpressure is
reached
This is the distance from the center mass of the confined explosive cloud at which the
input threshold overpressure is reached for a given vapour cloud explosion scenario.
5.5.69 Distance from centre of vessel (Xd)
Distance from center of vessel (Xd)

Horizontal coordinate (Xd) from the point of study (i.e. the point where the overpressure
and pressure impulse are to be calculated).
© 2018 TNO
254 RISKCURVES
The definition of that distance for the BLEVE model can be observed in the following figure.
5.5.70 Distance from release (Xd)
Distance from release (Xd)
Not to be confused with X (without the d), which is the X-coordinate of the release.
Gas dispersion and Plume models

Downwind horizontal coordinate (Xd) from the point of study (i.e. the point where the
concentration is to be calculated) to the release point.
Vapour Cloud Explosion models

This is the distance between the point where the release of the chemical started (release
point) and the point of study (where overpressure is to be calculated). The center mass of
the cloud is found in between these two points, situated in the hypothetical line that can be
drawn between the release and the study points.
The models deal with the distances from the point of study to the center mass of the
confined explosive cloud (the so-called Distance form center mass of the confined
explosive cloud), and that’s the distance used in the output graphs.
© 2018 TNO
Chamberlain Model
This is the downwind distance Xd of the object/observer from release point of the chemical.
5.5.71 Distance perpendicular to wind direction (Yd)
Distance perpendicular to wind direction (Yd)

Cross-wind horizontal coordinate of the point of study (i.e. the point where the
concentration is to be calculated). Not to be confused with Y (without the d), which is the Y-
coordinate of the release.
5.5.72 Distance to plume touch-down
Distance to plume touch-down

This is the down-wind distance from the source point (the stack) to the point at which the
negatively buoyant plume does the touch-down (gets in contact with the ground).
This output is only calculated for negatively buoyant plumes.
5.5.73 Distance to plume touch-down_2
Distance to clothing burning dose

This is the down-wind distance from the fire release point to the point at which clothing will
be set on fire.
In case the protection factor of clothing is applied, the total damage will be reduced, due to
a specific protection factor. However, IF the radiation is too high, clothing will set on fire.
According to the Green book, this critical dose is 2.5e10 [(W/m2)^2*sec]. Note that this
dosage uses a N probit of 2, instead of the common 4/3.
© 2018 TNO
256 RISKCURVES
In practical situation, this critical heat load equals to the heat load of 35 kW/m2 during 20
seconds.
5.5.74 Distance to toxic dose D or fraction of mortality F
Distance to toxic dose D or fraction of mortality F

Distance (at Yd, Zd) between the release point and the (last) location at which a toxic dose
D or a fraction of mortality F is found.
5.5.75 Dose at (Xd, Yd, Zd)
Dose at (Xd, Yd, Zd)

This is the toxic dose at point of study Xd, Yd, Zd.
5.5.76 Dose reduction at t
Dose reduction at t
This is the unitary fraction of reduced toxic dose (outdoors toxic dose minus indoors toxic
dose) on the basis of the outdoors toxic dose.
Where:
DR: concentration reduction [-]
Do: concentration outdoors [kg/m 3]
Di: concentration indoors [kg/m 3]
5.5.77 Duration of the fire
Duration of the fire

Pool fire model
This is the total duration of the pool fire, which is found by dividing the total mass released
by the rate of combustion.
BLEVE model
© 2018 TNO
This is the duration of the fireball, which is calculated from the quantity of combustible
material released in case of a complete failure of the tank, according to: t=0.852 * m0.26.
5.5.78 Duration of the release
Duration of the release

This is the duration of a semi-continuous release. It is assumed that a release begins at t =
0s and stops at t = treleases. .
This field is required only for semi-continuous releases.
It has to be reminded that evaporating pool, horizontal jet and vertical jet releases (dense
gas types of releases) are considered semi-continuous.
5.5.79 Effective release height
Effective release height
This parameter, reported by the dense gas dispersion model describes the effective height.
It is particular important in case of instantaneous releases because the height of the
cylinder determines the spreading forces. A smaller higher cylinder (with the same volume)
with heavy gas will have bigger spreading forces. If the instantaneous source area is
defined as zero (default), the height will be based on a cylinder with a diameter equal to its
height.
5.5.80 Equivalency factor
Equivalency factor
This is the factor used by the model to obtain the equivalent TNT mass, which is required
in the further calculations.
There are mass and energy equivalency factors, but in the literature it is more usual to find
factors for TNT equivalency based upon energy.
Paragraph 5.3.2 of the Yellow book gives some examples of sources and advised values
for the equivalency factors.
Usually (default) a factor of 10% is used, but the value can also be related to the activity of
the chemical:
- Low reactive : 5%
- Medium reactive : 10%
- High reactive: 15 %
© 2018 TNO
258 RISKCURVES
5.5.81 Equivalent TNT mass
Equivalent TNT mass

This is the TNT mass with which the TNT equivalency method calculations have been
performed.
5.5.82 Evacuation time
Evacuation time
This parameters describes the time required for evacuation. It acts as a limiting time for
exposure calculations. Default is 1000000000 sec.
The evacuation time defaults to a large value, which means no evacuation occurs. When you
set this value to for example 7200 seconds (4 hours), the program will stop toxic dose
integration after 7200 seconds assuming that the people are evacuated by then. This value
does not influence all heat radiation en blast calculations as the effect happens in seconds
and there is no time to evacuate at all. We do not encourage to alter this value as not all
dispersion models can yet work with this value.
5.5.83 Evaporation from Land or Water

Evaporation from Land or Water
The pool evaporation model has two modes of operation: from Land or Water.
The evaporation behavior is strongly influenced by the heat transfer, which is - in case of
evaporation from water - very high.
Note that, with evaporation from land, another choice: "Type of subsoil" is provided.
5.5.84 Exit vapor mass fraction

Exit vapor mass fraction
This parameter defines the fraction of the material which is vaporized: not a liquid anymore
5.5.85 Exit vapour mass fraction at time t
Exit vapour mass fraction at time t

This is the vapour mass fraction at pipe exit calculated at time t after start release.
If the vessel is emptied at time tempty before time t (tempty < t) all the outputs that should
be calculated at t will have been calculated at tempty. A warning will be generated to inform
the user about the emptying of the vessel and the time tempty at which this occurred.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.86 Expansion type
Expansion type
This is the type of expansion considered to happen in the vapour phase of the vessel
during the emptying process (vessel dynamics).
According to Poisson law, during an expansion process of a gas the factor P*Vn is
constant; three different types of expansion are physically found, and a different value for n
(expansion factor) is found for each of them. The expansion types are:
- Adiabatic (no loss of heat during the expansion)
- Isothermal (no variation on temperature during expansion)
- Polytropic (between purely adiabatic and purely isothermal, which seems to
be the case in real practice)
5.5.87 Explosive Mass
Explosive Mass
This is the amount of chemical that can be found in the vicinity of the jet within the
flammable limits (upper and lower flammability limits).
In some cases, due to the specificities of the scenario, concentrations higher than the LEL
are found in the limit of momentum region. In such a case, explosive mass would be found
in the intermediate region of the jet. The explosive mass out of the momentum region is not
taken into account when performing the jet’s explosive mass calculations. This mass can
be calculated with the appropriate linking of the turbulent free jet with a vapour cloud
dispersion model.
5.5.88 Explosive mass at time t
Explosive mass at time t

Explosive mass in gas cloud at time of study t (semi-continuous and instantaneous
releases) or at any time (continuous releases).
5.5.89 Exposure duration
© 2018 TNO
260 RISKCURVES
Example
NOTE 1: Future versions of the neutral gas dispersion model might take into account that
people inside houses will still be exposed to (lower) concentrations.
quicker.
5.5.90 Exposure duration to heat radiation
Exposure duration to heat radiation
Time of exposure of object/observer to heat radiation from the BLEVE or the pool fire.
5.5.91 Extrapolated time to empty pipeline
Extrapolated time to empty pipeline

Time needed to empty the whole pipeline without the model valid time. The Morrow model
is valid until the distance to the interface is larger then half-length of the pipeline. By
comparing the initial mass content in the pipeline with the mass removed it may appear
that the pipeline is not empty after the last time step. If so, it is recommended to continue
the predicted mass flow rate of the last time step until all remaining mass will be removed
(extrapolated mass flow rate). In the output box the extrapolated time is shown without the
time that is need for the Morrow model calculations.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.92 Filling degree (liquid volume/tank volume)
Filling degree (liquid volume/tank volume)

This is the percentage of the vessel’s volume which is full of liquid at initial conditions. A
vessel with no liquid in it has a 0% filling degree and a vessel only filled with liquid has a
100% filling degree.
Filling degree = 100% * Volume liquid / Volume vessel
Attention: Some older versions of EFFECTS / Riskcurves interpreted a filling degree as a

relative liquid height.
The liquid height in a sphere or a horizontal vessel is not linear with filling degree (or the
liquid volume). Example: A vessel with a total volume of 100 m 3 with 80% filling degree (80
m 3) gives a relative liquid height of 80% in a vertical vessel, but in a 80% filling degree
sphere of 100 m 3 a relative liquid height of 71%.
This field is not required when the vessel contains non-ideal gases or when the cause of
the failure is the decomposition of materials (Rupture of Vessel scenario).
5.5.93 Filling degree at time t
Filling degree at time t

This is the calculated filling degree at the time of study t.
The filling degree is the liquid volume in relation to the total vessel volume in terms of
percentage.
5.5.94 Fixed indoors outdoors toxic ratio

Fixed indoors outdoors toxic ratio
By default, the indoor toxic calculation uses a ratio of 1/10: lethality inside is one tenth of
lethality outside.
For long release durations, high exposures, or high ventilation ratios, this may be a very
optimistic assumption: even an outside dose which is much higher than 100% lethality still
has maximum 100% lethality, thus 10% lethality inside. For that reason it is advised to use
Toxic Indoor calculation method
© 2018 TNO
262 RISKCURVES
5.5.95 Flame path length
Flame path length

When utilizing the GAME method for explosion overpressure estimation the formula requires a flam
path length. This is the maxium distance that a flame can accelerate within a congestion area,
usually taken as the distance from the ignition center to the boundary of the flammable cloud.
In EFFECTS 10, it is possible to let the software determine the overlap of a flammable cloud with a
congestion area, If this approach is not used, the user will have to provide a flame path length, which
can be taken as "half of the length of the LFL contour" IF the full contour is captured. If only a part of
the flammable cloud is captured it is usually half of the longest distances within the congested space.
(assuming ignition in the centre)
5.5.96 Flame temperature
Flame temperature
Estimation of the temperature of the burning flame due to this chemical, default is 1200 K
(= 926.85 °C).
For other chemicals the following flame temperatures can be used:

Flammable material Temperature Flame
(K)
Liq. H2 1600
LNG 1500
Benzene 1490
Gasoline 1450
Kerosine 1480
JP-5 1250
Methanol 1300
Ethanol 1490
[Brabrauskas, V., Estimating Large

Pool Fire Burning Rates, Fire Technology, 1983, pp. 251-261]
5.5.97 Flame tilt
Flame tilt
Tilt angle of the flame (q), as indicated in the figure
© 2018 TNO
5.5.98 Flowrate inlet feed

Flowrate inlet feed
For the long pipeline model, by default it is assumed that the outflow is based upon the
contents of the pipeline itself: a blocked section of the pipeline. In reality one of the pipeline
ends may be subjected to an inlet flowrate, because a pump will continue to feed the pipeline
or the pipeline is connected to some other system providing a feed rate.
This implies that the flowrate in the decompressing pipe will never decrease to a zero level,
but will eventually stabilize at a specific feed rate, which can be entered in this input field.
5.5.99 Formation rate chemicals

Formation rate (chemical specific)
The Plume rise model is capable of monitoring / reporting concentrations for specific
components from a combustion process. It is suggested to link the plume rise model to a
"Combustion, Toxic combustion products" model, which will potentially predict the amount of
material being released from a fire. This is called the "formation rate" of a specific chemical.
Depending on the choice of the combustion product to monitor, the corresponding formation
rate of a substance is used, which can be taken from the results of a preceding "Combustion
products" model.
Potential chemicals are "Soot (unburned carbon), CO2, NO2, SO2, HCl, HBr and HF. The
resulting concentration contours (levels like PAC, ERPG's or AEGL can be chosen in
presentation settings) will related to the chosen combustion product.
5.5.100 Fraction combustion heat radiated
Fraction combustion heat radiated
© 2018 TNO
264 RISKCURVES
Fraction of the generated heat radiated from flame surface. This value is dependent of the
type of chemical and diameter of the pool.
The yellow book table 6.6 provides the following experimental values:
5.5.101 Fraction confined mass in ME
Fraction confined mass in Multi energy explosion method

The multi energy method for explosions has an important parameter "Fraction confined
mass".
Default this one is set to 8.0 %. Although this value is quite unrealistic, it appears to give
answers comparable to the old TNT method.
5.5.102 Fraction of CO2 in Atmosphere
Fraction of CO2 in Atmosphere

The amount of CO2 in the atmosphere can be used for transmissivity calculations of solar
light. An average value is 0.03%
5.5.103 Fraction of flammable cloud confined
Fraction of flammable cloud confined

That’s the volume percentage of the explosive cloud (part of the vapour cloud within
explosive limits) which is confined/obstructed.
As a default, the value from the the System Parameters value "Fraction confined mass
ME" will be used
The fraction of flammable cloud confined is of great importance, as the mass of chemical
found in the confined region is the one used by the model to do the calculations. This
© 2018 TNO
means that for a given scenario, the results obtained will be the same if we input 2,000 kg
in "Total mass in explosive range" and 50% in "Fraction of flammable cloud confined" (so
1,000 kg of confined explosive mass) or we input 10,000 kg in "Total mass in explosive
range" and 10% in "Fraction of flammable cloud confined" (1,000 kg of confined explosive
mass as well).
It has been experimentally demonstrated, as can be found in the 3rd edition of the Yellow
Book, that only the confined/obstructed parts of the explosive cloud contribute to the
deflagration/detonation phenomenon.
5.5.104 Fraction of liberated energy going to kinetic energy
Fraction of liberated energy going to kinetic energy

This is the fraction of the overall liberated energy that will be transformed into kinetic energy
of the fragments formed as consequence of the vessel’s failure.
In Yellow Book 3rd Ed some recommended values are found:

- 60% upper limit
- 20% rough estimate
- 4% in case of BLEVE
Note the importance of this value and its influence on the reliability of the final results. With
the rough estimate the initial velocity can sometimes be underestimated considerably.
When performing BLEVE fragment range calculations, a value of 4%, as suggested by

Yellow Book, is used.
5.5.105 Fraction of mortality at (Xd, Yd, Zd)
Fraction of mortality at (Xd, Yd, Zd)

This is the fraction of mortality at point of study Xd, Yd, Zd.
5.5.106 Fraction of the flame covered by soot
Fraction of the flame covered by soot
The fraction of the flame which is covered by soot influences the actual heat radiation of
the flame.
When soot fraction choice for 'Calculate/Default" is made, the Yellow Book value of 0.8 will
be used.
Within the "Two Zone pool fire" model, the soot fraction will be chemical dependent as
described in the
© 2018 TNO
266 RISKCURVES
publication of "Rew and Hubert".
If "User defined" is selected, the required value of the soot fraction can be defined
manually:
0 = no soot, clear flame,
1 = completely covered flame
5.5.107 Fragment distribution
Fragment distribution
Combo Box where the four different common types of fragment distribution after vessel
rupture are shown. Those are:
- 2 equal pieces
- 2 unequal pieces
- 2 caps and body
- Many equal pieces
The third case (3 unequal pieces) is the typical case for a cylinder that is ruptured in the
union between the main body and the two caps. It can not be selected if the vessel type is
a sphere.
5.5.108 Froude Number
Froude Number
Non-dimensional number used as a measure for the relative importance of initial
momentum and buoyancy.
5.5.109 Frustum lift off height (b)
Frustum lift off height (b)

As indicated in the figure, ‘b’ is the lift off height of the flame.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.110 GAME equivalent curve number

GAME equivalent curve number
This parameter defines, when using the GAME correlations, the resulting strength of the
explosion when comparing to the original curve numbers. It is directly related to the calculated
maximum overpressure. This equivalent curve number is used to (logarithmically) interpolate
values from the curves after the starting point Pmax has been found.
5.5.111 GAME expansion type

Game Expansion Type
This parameter defines, when using the GAME correlations, whether an open 3D
environment, or confined between parallel planes situation 2D situation applies. Choices are
3D or 2D
5.5.112 Graph Area of the cloud above LEL at release level vs. Time
Graph Area of the cloud above LEL at release level vs. Time
Equivalent graph in scales and limitations as the explosive mass vs. time but instead of
explosive mass, the area of the cloud (delimited by the LEL concentration) at the release
height is represented.
© 2018 TNO
268 RISKCURVES
5.5.113 Graph Circle circumscribed to maximum distance to threshold concentration

at Zd
Graph Circle circumscribed to maximum distance to threshold concentration at Zd
Graph where a horizontal contour plot (X-Y plane) is represented at Zd. The points of the
contour are all at the same distance from the release point; this distance is the maximum
distance from the release point at which the threshold concentration is reached.
The scale limitations are the same as for the Concentration contour plot.
That’s the graph obtained with the Concentration contour plot showed in the previous
paragraph; the maximum distance at which the threshold concentration is reached is 500m
so all the points of the plot are 500m from the release, located at x = y = 0m in that case.
5.5.114 Graph Concentration Contour Plot
Graph Concentration Contour Plot
Dense and Neutral gas dispersion models
Graph where a horizontal contour plot (so in the X-Y plane) is represented at Zd. The points
of the curve have a concentration of threshold (see "Threshold concentration") with an
associated accuracy (see "Contour plot accuracy").
The only limit in range is the minimum down-wind distance value, which is 1 cm above the
half-length of the source. No extrapolation is done to obtain a continuous contour (in up-
wind positions), neutral gas dispersion is only valid in down-wind locations out of the
source.
Turbulent free jet model
Graph where a contour plot (in the S-Y plane, containing to the jet’s axis) is represented.
The points of the curve have a concentration of threshold (see "Threshold concentration")
with an associated accuracy (see "Contour plot accuracy").
No extrapolation is done to obtain a continuous contour (out of the momentum zone), the
turbulent free jet model is only valid in the momentum zone.
5.5.115 Graph Concentration in the plume vs Distance
Graph Concentration in the plume center-line vs Distance from stack

Graph where the concentration in the plume’s center-line is represented as function of the
distance from the release point or stack (Xd).
© 2018 TNO
The range of the distance scale goes from the release point, which is situated at 0m to the
down-wind distance at which the maximum height of the plume is reached.
5.5.116 Graph Concentration vs Axial distance at Yd
Graph Concentration vs Axial distance at Yd

Graph where concentration of chemical is represented as function of the axial distance
from the jet’s release point, at the radial distance Yd the user chose in the inputs.
The range of the axial distance scale ranges from 0 (where the possible expansion of the
jet is finished) to the point of study (Sd). If Sd is higher than the limit of the momentum
region, the maximum distance of the range is the limit of the momentum region itself, as
the model is not valid out of the momentum region.
5.5.117 Graph Concentration vs. Down-wind distance at time t and (Yd, Zd)
Graph Concentration vs. Down-wind distance at time t and (Yd, Zd)

Graph where concentration is represented as function of the down-wind distance (Xd),
being all the locations on the line defined by Yd and Zd.
The range of the distance scale goes from 1 cm above the half-length of the source to Xd.
5.5.118 Graph Concentration vs. Time at (Xd, Yd, Zd)
Graph Concentration vs. Time at (Xd, Yd, Zd)

Graph where concentration is represented as function of the time since the release started,
at the down-wind location defined by Xd, Yd and Zd.
The range of the time scale goes from 0 to the time of study t.
This graph can only be obtained for instantaneous and semi-continuous releases.
5.5.119 Graph Distance from rupture to interface vs Time (COPY)
Graph Distance from rupture to interface vs Time

Graph where the distance from the rupture to the interface is represented as function of the
time from the start of the release.
© 2018 TNO
270 RISKCURVES
The Morrow model is valid until the distance to the interface is larger than half-length of the
pipeline. The time needed for the model’s calculations is shown in the output box ‘Model
valid until time’. After this the calculations continues with the predicted mass flow rate of
the last time step until all mass is removed.
The range of the time scale goes from 0 seconds (the moment at which the flow starts) to
the time of study t if the vessel has not been emptied. Otherwise, the maximum range of
the time is the time at which the vessel gets empty.
5.5.120 Graph Dynamic pressure vs Distance
Graph Dynamic pressure vs Distance

Graph where the peak dynamic pressure is represented as function of the distance from
the center mass of the confined explosive cloud.
The range of the distance scale goes from the center mass of the confined explosive cloud
(which is set to 0) to the point of study.
5.5.121 Graph Explosive mass vs. Time
Graph Explosive mass vs. Time

Graph where the explosive mass (only considered the one down-wind!) is represented as
function of time.
© 2018 TNO
The range of the time scale goes from 0s to the time of study t in case of instantaneous
release and to 1.1 * timerelease in case of semi-continuous release (for higher times the
explosive mass is 0).
This graph can only be obtained for instantaneous and semi-continuous releases; for a
continuous release we can only obtain the steady explosive mass value.
5.5.122 Graph Filling degree vs Time
Graph Filling degree vs Time

Graph where the filling degree inside the vessel is represented as function of the time from
the start of the release.
The filling degree is the liquid volume in relation to the total vessel volume in terms of
percentage.
5.5.123 Graph Fraction of mortality vs. Down-wind distance at (Yd, Zd)
Graph Fraction of mortality vs. Down-wind distance at (Yd, Zd)

Equivalent graph in scales and limitations as the toxic dose vs. down-wind distance but
instead of toxic dose, the equivalent fraction of mortality is represented.
5.5.124 Graph Height of the liquid inside the vessel vs Time
Graph Height of the liquid inside the vessel vs Time

Graph where height of the liquid inside the vessel is represented as function of the time
from the start of the release.
5.5.125 Graph Jet velocity vs Axial distance at Yd
Graph Jet velocity vs Axial distance at Yd
© 2018 TNO
272 RISKCURVES
Graph where the velocity of the jet is represented as function of the axial distance from the
jet’s release point, at the radial distance Yd the user chose in the inputs.
5.5.126 Graph Mass flow rate vs Time
Graph Mass flow rate vs Time

Graph where the mass flow rate exiting the piping is represented as function of the time
5.5.127 Graph Mass of liquid remaining in the vessel vs Time
Graph Mass of liquid remaining in the vessel vs Time

Graph where the mass of liquid remaining in the vessel is represented as function of the
5.5.128 Graph Mass of vapour remaining in the vessel vs Time
Graph Mass of vapour remaining in the vessel vs Time

Graph where the mass of vapour remaining in the vessel is represented as function of the
5.5.129 Graph Maximum concentration vs Downwind distance
Graph Maximum concentration vs. Down-wind distance
© 2018 TNO
Graph where the maximum concentration in time is represented as function of the down-
wind distance (x), being all the locations on the line defined by Yd and Zd.
This graph can only be obtained for instantaneous and semi-continuous releases; for a
continuous release the concentration in one location is steady, it has no dependency upon
time.
Depending of the model, the graph can be presented at release height, at ground level
(heavy gas) or at receiver height Zd
5.5.130 Graph Maximum range contour plot
Graph Maximum range contour plot

Graph where all the points in the ground plane where a fragment will land are represented.
In case two different types of fragments are obtained after the burst (if "2 unequal pieces"
or "2 caps and body" was selected in the "Fragment distribution" field), the largest range
will be used to generate the plot.
5.5.131 Graph Overpressure contour plot
Graph Overpressure contour plot

Graph where all the points in the ground plane where a certain threshold overpressure will
be reached are represented.
5.5.132 Graph Overpressure vs Distance
Graph Overpressure vs Distance

Graph where the peak overpressure is represented as function of the distance from the
center mass of the confined explosive cloud (Vapour Cloud Explosion scenario) or from
the center of the vessel (Rupture of Vessel scenario).
Range of the distance scale:

- From the center mass of the confined explosive cloud (which is set to 0) to
the point of study (Vapour Cloud Explosion scenario).
- From the first distance where the experimental graphs can be used (non
dimensional distance higher than 0.1) to Xd (if Xd is higher than this first
distance, else it is represented till 100m above this first distance) (Rupture of
Vessels scenario).
© 2018 TNO
274 RISKCURVES
5.5.133 Graph Plume sideview
Graph Plume sideview

Graph where the height of the center-line and concentration contours of a plume
(dispersion, plume rise) is shown as function of the distance from the release point or
stack (Xd).
By default, the x-axis unit will be [km] and Y-axis unit will be meter, which implies that the
graph is non-isometric. However, in some cases it is useful to have an isometric scale,
where X distances use the same scale as Y distances. To obtain an isometric scale, users
can switch the X-axis unit to [m] (identical unit as Y-axis) forcing an isometric scale.
Plume side view with height in [m] and distance in [km] or with identical units, showing an
isometric view
By showing height versus distance of concentration or center-lines this graph illustrates the
behavior of a plume on the vertical (Z) axis. This is specifically important for the plume rise
and heavy gas dispersion models, which may have an important vertical moving of the
plume. For neutral gas dispersion, the plume sideview will always be centered around the
height of release, although the mixing layer height may introduce some reflection behavior
on concentrations.
5.5.134 Graph Positive phase duration vs Distance
Graph Positive phase duration vs Distance

Graph where the duration of the positive phase of the blast wave is represented as function
of the distance from the center mass of the confined explosive cloud.
The range of the distance scale goes from the center mass of the confined explosive cloud
(which is set to 0) to the point of study.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.135 Graph Pressure at pipe exit vs Time
Graph Pressure at pipe exit vs Time

Graph where the pressure at the pipe exit is represented as function of the time from the
start of the release.
5.5.136 Graph Pressure impulse vs Distance
Graph Pressure impulse vs Distance

Graph where the pressure impulse is represented as function of the distance from the
center mass of the confined explosive cloud (Vapour Cloud Explosion scenario) or from
the center of the vessel (Rupture of Vessels scenario).
Range of the distance scale:

- From the center mass of the confined explosive cloud (which is set to 0) to
the point of study (Vapour Cloud Explosion scenario).
- The same as for the overpressure vs distance graph (Rupture of Vessels
scenario).
5.5.137 Graph Quality outflow at pipe exit vs Time
Graph Quality outflow at pipe exit vs Time

Graph where the quality of the outflow is represented as function of the time from the start
of the release.
The quality of the outflow is the vapour fraction in proportion to the total mass fraction.
Vapour outflow => quality = 1
Two-phase outflow => 0 < quality < 1
Liquid outflow => quality = 0
5.5.138 Graph Temperature at pipe exit vs Time
Graph Temperature at pipe exit vs Time
© 2018 TNO
276 RISKCURVES
Graph where temperature of the released gas, liquid or two-phase mixture at pipe exit is
represented as function of the time from the start of the release.
5.5.139 Graph Temperature vs Axial distance
Graph Temperature vs Axial distance

Graph where the temperature in the jet is represented as function of the axial distance from
the jet’s release point, at 0 radial distance (so in the jet’s axis).
5.5.140 Graph Total mass released vs Time
Graph Total mass released vs Time

Graph where the total amount of mass released through the piping is represented as
function of the time from the start of the release.
5.5.141 Graph Toxic Contour Plot
Graph Toxic Contour Plot

Graph where a horizontal contour plot (in the X-Y plane) is represented at Zd. The points of
the curve have a toxic dose or fraction of mortality of threshold (see "Threshold dose D",
"Threshold fraction of mortality F" and "Calculate contour by") with an associated accuracy
(see "Contour plot accuracy").
The scale limitations are the same as for the Concentration contour plot.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.142 Graph Toxic dose vs. Down-wind distance at (Yd, Zd)
Graph Toxic dose vs. Down-wind distance at (Yd, Zd)

Graph where the toxic dose reached at one location is represented as function of the
down-wind position, being all the locations on the line defined by Yd and Zd.
5.5.143 Graph Vessel pressure vs Time
Graph Vessel pressure vs Time
Graph where the pressure present in the vapour part of the vessel is represented as
function of the time from the start of the release.
5.5.144 Graph Vessel temperature vs Time
Graph Vessel temperature vs Time

Graph where the temperature in the vessel is represented as function of the time from the
start of the release.
5.5.145 Graph Void fraction at pipe exit vs Time
Graph Void fraction at pipe exit vs Time

Graph where the vapour mass fraction at pipe exit is represented as function of the time
© 2018 TNO
278 RISKCURVES
5.5.146 Grid resolution
Grid resolution
The resolution of the grid (the number of calculation points) for plotting the contour plots for
the different values of the heat radiation
5.5.147 Ground / Surface/ Bund temperature
Ground / Surface/ Bund temperature

The average yearly temperature of the subsoil that you want to use for pool evaporation
calculations. In general, the higher the temperature the larger the evaporation rate and
consequences.
5.5.148 Heat emission from fire surface
Heat emission from fire surface

This is the actual surface emissive power of the fire (pool fire, fireball…), which equals the
maximum surface emissive power when there is no soot formation.
For the calculation of the actual surface emissive power ( ) of a radiating body the
following equation is evaluated: , in which is the fraction of
the surface of the flame which is covered by soot. For the value as found by
Hägglund [Hägglund, B. and Persson, L.E. The heat radiation from petroleum fires, FOA
Rapport C201126-D6 (July 1976)] of .
5.5.149 Heat flux from solar radiation

Heat flux from solar radiation
Presents the resulting solar heat radiation flux as used in pool evaporation calculations. It can
be the actual value supplied as input, or calculated value, dependent on cloud cover, latitude
and day/month number
5.5.150 Heat of reaction per kg product
Heat of reaction per kg product

This is the heat liberated in the decomposition of the chemical(s) per kg of product. This
heat must always be positive.
This field is only required for "Decomposition of materials" as cause of the vessel’s failure.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.151 Heat radiation at Xd
Heat radiation at Xd
This is the heat radiation ( ) produced by the fireball (BLEVE) or fire (Chamberlain, Pool
fire) at a certain position Xd as defined in distance from release Xd.
The heat radiation is found by evaluating the following equation: .
5.5.152 Heat radiation damage probits

Heat radiation damage probits
By default, the vulnerability model (probit function) as described in the Green Book [4] has
been used for the exposure to heat radiation:
with q = the heat radiation level in [W/m 2] and t = the exposure duration in [sec], which is
assumed to be maximum 20 sec (defined by parameter max heat radiation exposure
duration). The probit value is transferred to a fraction of mortality (0..1) afterwards. This
implies a probit A of -36.38, Probit B = 2.56, and probit N = 4/3
Because some countries are accustomed to use other probits, these A, B and N values can
be modified.
The methodology described above is valid for individual and societal risk, but for inside
population a protection of 100% is assumed, as long as the level is lower than the heat
radiation total destruction level.
How to convert a probit to a fraction of mortality

The probit value Pr as mentioned several times in the chapters before varies between 2 and
9. To convert the probit value to a percentage of mortality, the table below is used.
The probit values are listed within the table itself. From the side and the top of the table, the
percentage of mortality can be read. For example: A probit value of 4.01 (second row)
corresponds with a value of 16% mortality.
% 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 2.67 2.95 3.12 3.25 3.36 3.45 3.52 3.59 3.66

10 3.72 3.77 3.82 3.87 3.92 3.96 4.01 4.05 4.08 4.12
20 4.16 4.19 4.23 4.26 4.29 4.33 4.36 4.39 4.42 4.45
30 4.48 4.50 4.53 4.56 4.59 4.61 4.64 4.67 4.69 4.72
© 2018 TNO
280 RISKCURVES
40 4.75 4.77 4.80 4.92 4.85 4.87 4.90 4.92 4.95 4.97
50 5.00 5.03 5.05 5.08 5.10 5.13 5.15 5.18 5.20 5.23
60 5,25 5.28 5.31 5.33 5.36 5.39 5.41 5.44 5.47 5.50
70 5.52 5.55 5.58 5.61 5.64 5.67 5.71 5.74 5.77 5.81
80 5.84 5.88 5.92 5.95 5.99 6.04 6.08 6.13 6.18 6.23
90 6.28 6.34 6.41 6.48 6.55 6.64 6.75 6.88 7.05 7.33
99 7.33 7.37 7.41 7.46 7.51 7.58 7.65 7.75 7.88 8.09
5.5.153 Heat Radiation Exposure Duration

Heat Radiation Exposure Duration
This value determines the maximum duration of exposure to heat load, as used in
consequence calculations. Default is set to: 20.0 seconds
5.5.154 Heat radiation level total destruction

This parameter defines the heat radiation level that will be associated with total destruction.
Anything above this level will result in 100% lethality
5.5.155 Heat radiation levels in contour plot
Heat radiation levels in contour plot

Heat radiation threshold values defined by the user for which the different contour plots are
to be generated.
5.5.156 Height (Zd)
Height (Zd)
Vertical (upward) coordinate of the point of study (i.e. the point where the concentration is
to be calculated). Not to be confused with Z (without the d), which is the height of the
release.
When using defaults in dispersion calculation, the System Parameters value "Toxic
Inhalation height" is .
NOTE: In the case that Zd = Z this means the release takes place in the same plane as the
point of study. In the case of Zd = Z = 0 then both release point and point of study are
located at ground level.
5.5.157 Height bottom of the fire ball
Height bottom of the fire ball

The lift-off height of the fireball (Hbleve) as indicated in the figure, is calculated according to
Hbleve = 2 * rfb, thus the height bottom of the fire ball equals the radius of the fireball.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.158 Height difference between pipe entrance and exit
Height difference between pipe entrance and exit

This is the maximum limiting height difference that the fluid will have to overcome during
the flow on the piping. It is expressed as the height at the exit of the piping minus the height
at the entrance; so if the fluid flows down from the beginning, the height difference will be
negative but if it has to flow up, it will be possible.
This input is present to take into account the height to overcome as an impediment to the
flow and the height to be flown down as an enhancement of the flow.
5.5.159 Height leak above tank bottom
Height leak above tank bottom
© 2018 TNO
282 RISKCURVES
This is the height of the hole in a vertical cylindrical vessel from the bottom of the vessel.
5.5.160 Height of confined pool above ground level

Height of the confined pool above ground level
This parameter can be used to define an elevated poolfire, such as a rooftop fire of oiltanks.
Because the poolfire is elevated, heat radiation may reach further, but at close distance
radiation will be lower due to the higher distance to the flame.
5.5.161 Height of congested area

Height of congested area
This parameter defines the height of a congestion zone, thus limiting the amount of explosive
mass which can be captured inside this area. The maximum mass will be calculated based
on the available volume within this height, when filled with a stochiometric concentration of the
chemical released.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.162 Height of construction

Height of construction
This parameter defines the height of a construction which can be defined as a vulnerable
area.
5.5.163 Height of liquid at time t
Height of liquid at time t
This is the height of the liquid phase inside the vessel at the time of study t.
5.5.164 Height of observer above ground level

Height of the observer position above ground level
This parameter can be used to define the receiver of the heat radiation to be at a specific
height.
Because the pool fire is modelled as a tilted cylinder, a receiver at height might be closer to
the flame leading to higher values downwind of the fire.
© 2018 TNO
284 RISKCURVES
5.5.165 Height of pool at T=0

Height of the pool at T=0
This parameter can be used to define an existing pool height at the start of the release.
5.5.166 Height of the plume's centre-line at Xd
Height of the plume's center-line at Xd

This is the height of the plume’s center-line at the down-wind point of study Xd.
This output is not calculated, so not shown, when the distance from release (Xd) is higher
than the distance at which the maximum height of the plume is reached (for positively
buoyant plumes) or higher than the distance where the plume’s touch-down occurs (for
negatively buoyant plumes).
5.5.167 Height to LEL at time t
Height to LEL at time t

Maximum height, at the time of study (semi-continuous and instantaneous releases) or at
any time (continuous releases) and Yd, at which a concentration of LEL is found.
5.5.168 Hole contraction coefficient
Hole contraction coefficient

This contraction coefficient for sharp edges is used in outflow calculations. Default is 0.62
© 2018 TNO
5.5.169 Hole diameter
Hole diameter
This is the diameter of the hole through which the gas, liquid or liquefied gas is released,
assuming that the hole has a circular shape
5.5.170 Hole rounding

Hole rounding
The hole rounding is a parameter that influences the discharge coefficient (in outflow models)
The discharge coefficient Cd is in fact determined by two factors: friction and contraction.
Contraction is caused by the fact that the fluid in the vessel is flowing into the opening from all
directions, having a velocity component perpendicular to the axis of the opening. The flowing
fluid must be bent in the direction parallel to the hole axis.
For sharp orifices contraction plays a part and friction is negligible. For this reason Hole
rounding choice
"sharp edges" corresponds to discharge coefficient:Cd = 0.62
For "rounded edges" contraction does not play a part and friction is small; the discharge
coefficient is set to Cd = 1.0
The choice "User defined" enables the input field "Discharge coefficient"
5.5.171 Hole type
Hole type
Combo Box where the kind of break in the pipeline through which the gas is released can
be chosen
- Guillotine break: Fully ruptured pipeline. At the
point of the rupture, the upstream and downstream ends of the
pipe are assumed to be totally separated in such a way that the
flow rates coming from the upstream and downstream pipe
regions are independent. The discharge coefficient (Cd) is in this
case always set to 1.
- Hole in a pipe: Release from a pipeline through a hole
in the pipe. For this type of release is necessary to know the
hole’s diameter.
5.5.172 Include overpressure effects

Include overpressure effects
© 2018 TNO
286 RISKCURVES
The BLEVE fireball model also allows to calculate overpressure generated by the explosive
evaporation effects. By default, this will be skipped, because the fireball phenomena is usually
dominant over overpressure, but these effects can be included by selecting "Yes" .
Overpressure is calculated by using the Bleve Blast method, which is also available as a
separate explosion model.
5.5.173 Indoor Ventilation ratio

Indoor Ventilation ratio
This parameter is used in the calculation of inside lethality by toxic exposure. The ventilation
ratio highly affects inside toxic exposure. The default value is 1 times per hour, representing
natural ventilation. Note that for mechanical ventilation situation values ranging from 2.5 (living
room) to 10 (bathrooms, moist environment) are common.
5.5.174 Initial density

Initial density
Presents the density of the gas in initial (at t=0) conditions.
5.5.175 Initial height of the liquid above release point
Initial height of the liquid above release point
The initial height of liquid above release point, the hole in the storage tank.
5.5.176 Initial jet pressure
Initial jet pressure
Initial pressure of the gas at (exit) hole or pipe hole, the point where the gas is released.
5.5.177 Initial jet temperature
Initial jet temperature

This is the temperature of the chemical at the release point. The turbulent free jet model
does not consider the expansion of the jet in case the pressure at the exit of the hole/pipe
is higher than the ambient pressure, so the temperature to be filled in this field is the one
reached after the expansion of the chemical.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.178 Initial liquid mass fraction
Initial liquid mass fraction

This is the mass fraction of liquid droplets contained in the released chemical. The liquid
remaining after the flash (forming a pool in the ground) does not have to be taken into
account, only the droplets in the gas phase.
This field is required only for instantaneous and jet releases. For evaporating pools, no
liquid is present in the release chemical.
5.5.179 Initial mass in vessel
Initial mass in vessel

This is the total mass of chemical initially present inside the vessel.
5.5.180 Initial plume density
Initial plume density

This is the density of the release at the stack exit.
The initial density will determine the behaviour of the plume (positively or negatively
buoyancy) so the composition of the plume should be taken into account (air or other inert
chemicals can decrease or increase the density of the release). The model is only valid for
pure chemicals, but a mixture can be taken into account in the calculation of the initial
density.
5.5.181 Initial pressure in pipeline
Initial pressure in pipeline

Initial absolute pressure of the gas or liquefied gas at the pipe orifice (point at which the
release will happen).
5.5.182 Initial pressure in vessel
Initial pressure in vessel

This is the absolute pressure in the vapour phase of the vessel before the start of the
outflow (rupture of the piping, failure of valve…), so at t = 0s.
© 2018 TNO
288 RISKCURVES
5.5.183 Initial source strength

Initial source strength
Presents the mass flow rate in initial (at t=0) conditions
5.5.184 Initial speed of fragment
Initial speed of fragment

This is the initial speed of the considered fragment after the rupture of the vessel.
5.5.185 Initial temperature in pipeline
Initial temperature in pipeline

Initial temperature of the gas or liquefied gas at the pipe orifice (point at which the release
will happen).
5.5.186 Initial temperature in vessel
Initial temperature in vessel

This is the temperature inside the vessel before the start of the outflow (for Outflow
models) or the burst of the vessel (for the Rupture of Vessels or BLEVE models).
When the selected model is the Rupture of Vessels, this field is not required in case the
cause of the vessel’s rupture is "Pressure liquefied gas, BLEVE" as the temperature can
be obtained from the vapour pressure - temperature data.
5.5.187 Inside fraction

Inside fraction
Defines the fraction of the population which is inside. This affects the number of victims in a
"vulnerable area" because they are partially protected for a toxic cloud (dependent of
ventilation ratio) and heat radiation.
5.5.188 Integration tolerance
Integration tolerance
If you observe one of the following symptoms when dealing with a semi-continuous
release:
· Sudden change of results (e.g. from anything to zero) when a small change
in the input has been made
· Oscillation of graphs
© 2018 TNO
Then reducing the integration tolerance (smaller value) will result in higher integration
accuracy and better results.
The software uses a Romberg integration method on various places in the model. This
means that the integration is started in coarse steps and those are gradually refined until
the contribution of the last integration step is smaller than the integration accuracy.
A Romberg integration is fast, powerful but has one major disadvantage: if the accuracy is
too low, it will miss small peaks in the integration domain and when the accuracy is too
high, it takes much calculation time to perform one single integration. The default value of
1% accuracy is an optimum between accuracy and calculation duration.
The integration tolerance is the error (in percent) that can be assumed to be the result of
the time-integral required in every semi-continuous concentration calculation. The integral
is solved numerically and so this tolerance is the ending condition of the numerical
resolution.
Key parameter for time consuming and accuracy of those calculations.
This field is required only for semi-continuous releases.
A lower value indicates a lower integration tolerance and results in higher integration
accuracy!
5.5.189 Inverse Monin-Obukhov Length (1/L)
Inverse Monin-Obukhov Length (1/L)

Length-scale which characterises the atmospheric stability in a continuous scale. When
pasquill stability class has been input, EFFECTS converts it to Monin-Obukhov length and
it appears as an output, with "used" at the end.
Internally, the program does its calculations with Monin-Obukhov lengths, not with
Pasquill’s 6 stability classes.
In the case the meteorological data is "Pasquill" this field is disabled.
5.5.190 Is the vessel elevated?
Is the vessel elevated?

Combo Box where the user can choose the relative position between the vessel and the
ground. Blast waves resultant from the failure of ground-based vessels get reflected in the
ground, so they lead to higher overpressure values.
© 2018 TNO
290 RISKCURVES
5.5.191 Jet velocity at (Sd, Yd)
Jet velocity at (Sd, Yd)

This is the velocity of the jet at the point of study Sd,Yd.
5.5.192 Latitude
Latitude
Scenario’s earth latitude (positive in °North or negative for °South), expressed in degrees.
The default value is the average in the Netherlands (51 degrees).
A latitude value is used to calculate the Coriolis parameter, which is one of the parameters
used to estimate the mixing height in dispersion models.
The latitude is also applied within the pool evaporation model to calculate the solar heat
radiation flux at a specific date and earth location.This value directly influences the angle
the sun and a horizontal earth surface, on a specified day an month number.
5.5.193 Length cylinder
Length cylinder
This is the length of the cylindrical vessel, assuming it is a geometrical cylinder (plane
caps). The inside diameter of the cylindrical vessel is internally calculated supposing
according to:
4.Volumevessel
Diameter vessel 
 .Lengthvessel
This field is not required for spherical vessels.
© 2018 TNO
In DIERS model, this is the total height of the vessel, since the model is only valid for
vertical cylindrical vessels.
5.5.194 Length of cloud (between LEL)
Length of cloud (between LEL)

This is the maximum distance (in wind direction, at 0 crosswind distance) between the
locations at which LEL is reached for a horizontal section of the cloud. In other words, it's
the length of the contour in this horizontal section, with LEL as threshold value. For neutral
gases, this horizontal section is taken at the height of the source. For dense gases, it is
taken at ground level.
Time t is the time of study entered by the user, time tmem is the time at which the
explosive mass is maximal, and time tmac is the time at which the area of the LEL-contour
is maximal.
In case of a continuous release, this is the steady state length of the cloud between LEL at
the height mentioned above.
5.5.195 Length of frustum (flame) (Rl)

Length of frustum (flame) (Rl)
As indicated in the figure, ‘Rl’ is the length of the frustum.
© 2018 TNO
292 RISKCURVES
5.5.196 Length of rectangular pool
Length of rectangular pool

The length (m) of the rectangular pool, in case of a rectangular pool fire.
5.5.197 Length of toxic contour
Length of toxic contour

This is the maximum distance in wind direction between two points of the toxic contour
plot.
5.5.198 Length source in wind (x), crosswind (y) and z-direction
Length source in wind (x), crosswind (y) and z-direction

Source dimensions in along-wind, cross-wind and vertical direction. The default values are
0 m, but the program automatically corrects the dimensions of the source-box consistent
with the density of the chemical at ambient conditions.
Whenever a dimension doesn't fit the amount of mass or the input mass rate, EFFECTS
re-calculates the dimensions of the source (based on atmospheric density, and in case of
continuous or semi-continuous releases, density and windspeed) and generates a log
message.
For example, a 10,000 kg instantaneous release of carbon monoxide in a cubic box of 1 m
sides implies a density (at ambient conditions) of 10,000 kg/m 3, far from the real density at
© 2018 TNO
atmospheric conditions. For this reason, the source dimensions will be redefined as a
cube with a 20 m side:
In case of instantaneous release, a cubic shape is assumed, in case of a continuous

release, the width and the height of a virtual window are determined:
Note:
When using higher values for initial source dimensions, the model will calculate the
initial concentration of the material based on the initial dimensions. This can be
used to model pre-diluted outflows.
Note 2:
If for a (semi) continuous release, a non-zero length of source is entered, this will
be used as an offset for the start of the contour. This can be used to model the
behaviour of an evaporating pool where the center of the pool is treated as the
release point. The used offset is half the source length.
© 2018 TNO
294 RISKCURVES
5.5.199 Length-Diameter ratio of the vessel
Length-Diameter ratio of the vessel

Ratio between the internal length and diameter of a cylindrical vessel.
This field is not required for spherical vessels.
5.5.200 Lethal fraction damage report

Lethal fraction damage report
In the reporting of calculations, a maximum distance to # % lethality is reported, whereas the

map will also display a surrounding contour for this % lethality distances. The exact level for
this lethality can be specified here, making it possible to display and present other relevant
lethality threshold levels, such as 5%, 10% or even 90%.
5.5.201 Lethal fraction flame contour

Lethal fraction for present in flame contour
This is the fraction of mortality is used within the dimensions of a flame contour.
Leave it to 100% unless you have good reasons to change it.
5.5.202 Lethal fraction flashfire

Lethal fraction for present in flash fire
This is the fraction of mortality that is used within the flame envelop of a flash fire.
Leave it to 1 unless you have good reasons to change it.
5.5.203 Lethal fraction Pressure indoors damage

Lethal fraction indoors damage (glass)
This value is only used in case of "Use threshold pressure level" pressure damage method.
Inside population, exposed to peak pressures between "total destruction" and "inside damage"
levels, will be treated with this corresponding inside damage lethality level.
This lethal fraction will only be applied in societal risk calculations, on inside population.
5.5.204 Lethal fraction pressure total destruction zone

Lethal fraction total destruction zone
Defines the lethality within the total destruction pressure level zone. By default 100% (fraction
1).
© 2018 TNO
In case of a "Probit relation" or "Pressure-Lethality relation" this 100% value will ONLY be
applied for INSIDE damage, assuming that houses will collapse above this threshold and
outside lethality is already described by the provided relations.
5.5.205 Liberated energy
Liberated energy
This is the overall estimated energy that will be liberated and lead to the rupture of the
vessel, the blast wave and the fragments propagation.
This field is only required when there are no known methods to estimate the liberated
energy from the contents and conditions of the vessel. This is the case of pressure vessel
burst and runaway reaction for non-ideal gases or vapours, and for pressurised liquefied
gases for which no expansion work data is available.
To obtain the value of the liberated energy in such cases, experimental data (from
pressure-enthalpy diagrams or tables to obtain the difference in internal energy between
the chemical at vessel and ambient conditions) is required or reconduct the calculations to
the ideal gas case.
5.5.206 Limit of momentum region
Limit of momentum region

This is the limit of the region in space in which the model’s equations and empirically fitted
constants are valid.
5.5.207 Liquid mass fraction in cloud

Liquid mass fraction in cloud
The liquid mass fraction in cloud presents the amount the mass in the cloud which is still in
liquid condition, e.g. dragged along with the flashing vapour as droplets.
Because the model uses the AMINAL approximation to calculate the total mass in the cloud,
this total "airborne mass" (mass remaining in air: not rained out) is partly vapour (the
adiabatic flash amount) and partly liquid droplets.
When using a dispersion model based on the calculated total mass, and there is liquid in the
cloud, it is suggested to use a "Dense dispersion model".
AMINAL- Belgium, "Nieuwe richtlijn voor het berekenen van flash en spray" doc.97/001,
which is original source of table 4.8 of Purple Book CPR 18E
© 2018 TNO
296 RISKCURVES
5.5.208 Mass flow rate at time t
Mass flow rate at time t

This is the calculated mass flow rate exiting the piping at time t after start release.
If the vessel is emptied at time empty before time t (tempty < t) all the outputs that should be
calculated at t will have been calculated at tempty . A warning will be generated to inform the
user about the emptying of the vessel and the time tempty at which this occurred.
5.5.209 Mass flow rate of the source
Mass flow rate of the source

Mass flow rate (only for the desired chemical) at the source.
This field is not required for instantaneous releases.
5.5.210 Mass of empty vessel
Mass of empty vessel

This is the mass of the vessel when completely empty.
5.5.211 Mass of fragment
Mass of fragment
This is the mass of the considered fragment when studying projectile effects. If the
fragment distribution selected was "2 equal pieces" or "Many equal pieces", just one type of
fragment (shape, area and mass) is possible so just one mass, initial speed and maximum
range will be shown in the output, but if "2 unequal pieces" or "2 caps and body" was
selected, two types of fragments are possible and two masses, initial speeds and
maximum ranges will be shown in the output.
5.5.212 Mass of heaviest piece
Mass of heaviest piece

This is the mass of the heaviest piece in pieces with different masses are formed after the
rupture of the vessel.
This field is required only when fragment distribution is "2 unequal pieces" or "3 unequal
pieces".
© 2018 TNO
5.5.213 Mass of liquid in vessel at time t
Mass of liquid in vessel at time t

This is the mass of chemical in liquid phase remaining in the vessel at the time of study t.
If the vessel is emptied at time tmax before time t (tmax < t) all the outputs that should be
calculated at t will have been calculated at tmax. A warning will be generated to inform the
user about the emptying of the vessel and the time tmax at which this occurred.
5.5.214 Mass of vapour in vessel at time t
Mass of vapour in vessel at time t

This is the mass of chemical in vapour phase remaining in the vessel at the time of study t.
5.5.215 Maximum area of explosive cloud
Maximum area of explosive cloud

When a cloud disperses in the wind direction, and is an instantaneous or semi continuous
release, the size of the cloud will vary depending upon the time.
This area is the horizontal (in the X-Y plane and at the height of release) section of the
cloud defined by the LEL value.
This maximum area of the cloud can only be calculated if the area of the cloud vs. time
graph has been generated.
At the height of the release we find, for neutral gases, the maximum section of the cloud.
In case of continuous release, as there’s no dependency upon time, the value presented is
the steady area of the cloud (also limited by the LEL).
5.5.216 Maximum Averaging Time

Maximum Averaging Time
The maximum value for averaging concentrations calculations, default 3600 sec
© 2018 TNO
298 RISKCURVES
5.5.217 Maximum concentration at (Yd, Zd)
Maximum concentration at (Yd, Zd)

Maximum possible concentration in time at any location along the Xd (wind) direction,
defined by coordinates Yd and Zd. In case of continuous release, as there’s no dependency
upon time, the value presented is the maximum concentration in the same direction.
This maximum concentration can only be calculated if the maximum concentration vs.
down-wind distance graph has been generated, in case of semi-continuous or
instantaneous releases.
5.5.218 Maximum Diameter Poolfire
Maximum diameter of the fire

This input of the plume rise model determines the starting dimension (width) of a smoke /
combustion products plume coming from a fire.
5.5.219 Maximum distance of source to LEL
Maximum distance of source to LEL

This is the axial distance between the jet’s release point (after possible expansion from
release pressure) and the point where the LEL concentration is reached.
In some cases, due to the specificities of the scenario, the LEL concentration is not
reached in the momentum region, and then the result.
5.5.220 Maximum distance to threshold

Maximum distance to threshold concentration
The maximum distance on which the threshold concentration, which has been supplied in the
input, can be found.
5.5.221 Maximum evaluation time

Maximum evaluation time
© 2018 TNO
The maximum time to evaluate the behaviour of the model. Time dependent graphs will be
presented until this value
5.5.222 Maximum explosive mass
Maximum explosive mass

Maximum explosive mass in time for a given release. This maximum explosive mass can
only be calculated if the explosive mass vs. time graph has been generated. This result is
not calculated in case of continuous release.
5.5.223 Maximum mass flow rate
Maximum mass flow rate

Maximum mass flow rate in the time area from t = 0 sec upon the time that’s given in the
result box ‘…Based upon time’.
5.5.224 Maximum plume height
Maximum plume height

This is the maximum height the center-line of the plume, either positively or negatively
buoyant, will reach according to the models.
5.5.225 Maximum range of fragment
Maximum range of fragment

This is the maximum possible distance from the center of the vessel to the position where
the considered fragment lands due to the rupture of the vessel.
5.5.226 Maximum release duration
Maximum release duration

The maximum time that a release of hazardous material can occur. This is used in outflow
models to limit the time of an outflow. By default the models will calculate the time until the
vessel is empty, however, the outflow can be limited to a specific time, to take into account
the existence of a "blocking system"
5.5.227 Maximum temperature difference

Maximum temperature difference
© 2018 TNO
300 RISKCURVES
(evaporation from water surface)
The maximum temperature difference between the liquid in the pool and the water.
When a volatile liquid is released, its temperature usually decreases. This causes the water
to also cool down.
In the model for heat transfer that is implemented in EFFECTS, there is no heat transfer by
convection (i.e. the water behaves like a rigid body).
This might lead to an under prediction of the heat transfer from the water to the pool, which
would lead to a under estimation of the temperature of the pool.
Therefore, the user may choose to set a maximum temperature difference between the pool
and the water.
Notes:
- The difference value is defined as the water temperature minus the pool temperature
(positive value implies that the pool has a lower temperature than the water)
- The maximum temperature difference does not affect pools that are warming up
- The maximum temperature difference does not affect pools that are boiling
- The maximum temperature difference must be greater than or equal to zero (in other words:
if the pool temperature is higher than that of the water, the heat transfer is not affected by it)
- Set the max. temperature difference to a very high value (e.g. 500 K) if you don't want it to
affect the outcome of the calculations
5.5.228 Meteorological Data
Meteorological Data
Combo Box where the user chooses the type of scale he will use to input the stability of the
scenario. This can be Pasquill or Monin-Obukhov.
If Pasquill is chosen, the software will ask for the Pasquill Stability Class.
If Monin-Obukhov is chosen, the software will ask for the Inverse Monin-Obukhov Length,
Mixing Height, and Standard Deviations of Turbulent Velocities
5.5.229 Minimum Averaging Time

Minimum Averaging Time
© 2018 TNO
The minimum value for averaging concentrations calculations, default 20 sec
5.5.230 Mixing Height
Mixing Height
Height of the turbulent boundary layer (above the ground). This layer is also called mixing
layer, and it is the atmosphere’s first layer, where turbulence occurs and so does
dispersion. Only is input when the user chooses to input meteorological data as Monin-
Obukhov type.
When the meteorological data is "Pasquill", the dispersion model estimates the mixing
height (from stability class, latitude and roughness length class) and it appears as an
output, with "used" at the end.
5.5.231 Model valid until time
Model valid until time
Wilson Model (gas outflow through pipelines)

The Wilson model aims at predicting the mass flow rate as a function of time depending on
the initial conditions. The model assumes a compressor to a trip when the decompression
wave in the pipelines reaches the compressor station at the other pipe end. When the
pressure wave traveling upstream reaches the opposite side of the pipeline the Wilson
model is not valid any more
Morrow model (liquefied gas through pipelines)

The Morrow model is valid until the distance to the interface is larger then half-length of the
pipeline. The time that is need for these model calculations is shown in this output box.
After this the calculations continues with the predicted mass flow rate of the last time step
until all mass is removed.
5.5.232 Molecular Formula

Molecular Formula
When using the choice for "solids" inside the combustion product model, the user can supply
a typical chemical formula for the substances being burned.
© 2018 TNO
302 RISKCURVES
This should be a combination of common applied chemical abbreviations like Cl, Br, C, H etc,
with the total weighted number of atoms inside the composition. This can be used to describe
a typical (mixed) average substance for warehouse fires. The default (currently advised in the
Netherlands) is C3.90H8.50O1.06Cl0.46N1.17S0.51P1.35 so consisting of Carbon,
Hydrogen, Oxygen, Chlorine, Nitrogen, Sulfur and Phosphor with fractions as provided by the
numbers.
5.5.233 n value
n value
This is the value of the expansion factor defined in Poisson’s law.
PV^n = constant
The value for n depends upon the expansion type (which can be chosen in the Expansion
type field),
- Adiabatic expansion: n = k, the so-called Poisson coefficient (k = CP / CV)
- Isothermal expansion: n = 1
- Polytropic expansion: 1 < n < k
This field is only required when a Polytropic expansion has been selected, as for the other
two types of expansion the values are predefined (1 for isothermal and the Poisson
coefficient, which is obtained from the database, for the adiabatic).
5.5.234 Net mass rained out

Net mass rained out
The amount of liquid that ends up in a liquid pool. Note that other still liquid material may
remain "airborne" defined by the liquid mass fraction in cloud This is also referred to as "spray
fraction"
5.5.235 NO2 conversion rate

NO2 conversion rate
The amount of Nitrogen that gets converted into NO2 during a nitrogen substance containing
fire (e.g. fertilizers) has not been internationally accepted or standardized. Therefore it can be
user defined.
The default would be 0.35, according to the Yellow Book, but "warehouse fires" guidelines
sometimes suggest to use a value of 0.15, thus requiring to adapt this value.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.236 Number of pieces
Number of pieces
This is the number of pieces into which the vessel is ruptured.
This field is only required when the fragment distribution is set to "Many equal pieces".
5.5.237 Offset between release location and LEL
Offset between release location and LEL

This is the distance between the release location and the first down-wind point (at 0
crosswind distance) where the concentration equals the LEL. In other words, it's the lowest
down-wind distance value of the contour with LEL as threshold value. This distance is
computed at the height of the source for neutral gases, and at ground level for dense
gases.
is maximal.
In case of a continuous release, this is the steady state offset of the LEL-contour at the
height mentioned above.
5.5.238 Offset between release point and cloud centre
Offset between release point and cloud center

This is the distance between the point where the release of the chemical started (from a
vessel, a broken pipe, an evaporating pool) and the position of the center mass of the
confined explosive cloud.
See figure in ‘Distance from release (Xd)’ for more information.
5.5.239 Outcome Phenomena

Outcome / Phenomena
In combined models, the calculation engine will automatically search for all possible
phenomena that might occur for the specific loss of containment event. Depending on the
type of chemical, toxic or flammable, multiple outcomes will be evaluated.
In some occasions, it is not rally useful to include "All"possible phenomena, for instance
because an ammonia pool can hardly be set on fire. In these occasions, the outcome can be
limited to only toxic, or any other specific phenomena.
© 2018 TNO
304 RISKCURVES
5.5.240 Outdoor concentration
Outdoor concentration
This is the concentration in the vicinity of the considered room. We can take into account
the concentration due to the toxic cloud which would be found in the center of the room (as
if there was no sheltering); it is not necessary to average the concentrations as if there was
no sheltering) in all the points of the room.
5.5.241 Outflow angle in XZ plane (0°=horizontal ; 90°=vertical)
Outflow angle in XZ plane (0°=horizontal ; 90°=vertical)

Orientation angle q (in the XZ plane) of the outflow
5.5.242 Outflow time

Outflow time of the continuous release
Presents the resulting outflow time for the continuous release: the initial mass of material
divided by the outflow rate
5.5.243 Output message level
Output message level
© 2018 TNO
The amount of detail in log reports are influences by this setting. A higher value gives more
detailed and larger logfiles.
5.5.244 Overpressure above liquid
Overpressure above liquid

This is the pressure above the liquid phase minus the ambient pressure (ambient pressure
= standard atmospheric pressure = 1.01325 bar = 101325 Pa).
If the overpressure is equal to 0 bar then the pressure above the liquid is the same as the
ambient pressure.
5.5.245 Pasquill stability class
Pasquill stability class

Combo Box with Pasquill stability classes, sometimes referred as A..F:
A very unstable
B unstable
C slightly unstable
D neutral
E stable
F very stable
When the selected model is the neutral or dense gas dispersion and the type of
meteorological data is "Monin-Obukhov" this field is disabled.
This stability class is strongly dependent of the wind speed, time of day and cloud cover
and can be selected using the table below:
© 2018 TNO
306 RISKCURVES
5.5.246 Peak dynamic pressure at Xd
Peak dynamic pressure at Xd

This is the maximum peak dynamic pressure that will be reached in the point of study Xd
for a given vapour cloud explosion scenario.
5.5.247 Peak overpressure at Xd
Peak overpressure at Xd
This is the maximum overpressure that will be reached in the point of study Xd for a given
vapour cloud explosion or vessel rupture scenario.
5.5.248 Peak pressure inside damage

Peak pressure inside damage (glass)
This pressure defines the minimum pressure level for inside damage. All areas with pressure
between "total destruction" and "inside damage" levels, will be treated with the corresponding
inside damage lethality level. The lethality fraction will only be applied in indoor calculations, on
inside population. The pressure level will also be used as a threshold level for pressure
contours presented by TNT or Multi Energy models.
5.5.249 Penetration factor

Penetration factor
This parameter is used in the plume rise model and expresses the fraction of the plume that
penetrates the mixing layer at its maximum height distance. When a rising plume penetrates
the mixing layer, this material will never reach height levels below mixing layer again. On the
other hand, the fraction of the cloud that remains below might actually be reflected by the
mixing layer, if the plume center line is below mixing layer.
5.5.250 Percentage of mortality

Percentage of mortality
The program can draw contours for specific consequence (lethality) levels.
Enter the treshold value for the lethality contour to be presented.
5.5.251 Perform maximum concentration vs. distance graph
Perform maximum concentration vs. distance graph
© 2018 TNO
Checkbox where the user can choose whether he wants EFFECTS to generate the
Maximum concentration vs. Down-wind distance at (Yd, Zd) graph or not, as it is one of the
time-consuming steps of the model and not all the studies require its calculation.
5.5.252 Perform time-dependent explosive graphs
Perform time-dependent explosive graphs

Checkbox where the user can choose whether he wants EFFECTS to generate the
Explosive mass vs. Time and Area of the cloud above LEL at release level vs. Time
graphs or not, as they are the most time-consuming step of the model (specially if the
release is semi-continuous!) and not all the studies require its calculation.
5.5.253 Perform toxic contour plot
Perform toxic contour plot

Checkbox where the user can choose whether he wants EFFECTS to generate the Toxic
Contour Plot at Zd graph and the response fraction grid (for population mortality
calculations) or not, as it is one of the time-consuming steps of the model and not all the
studies require its calculation.
5.5.254 Perform toxic indoors calculation

Perform toxic indoors calculation
The toxic exposure inside can be calculated based on the actual concentration time profile
and ventilation rate. This calculation is invoked by selecting "Yes" in this setting. The
calculation is performed inside the Dispersion Toxic dose models which will also present a
Inside lethality grid (expert parameter).
The inside lethality is strongly influenced by passage time of the cloud, and ventilation ratio.
5.5.255 Pipe contraction coefficient
Pipe contraction coefficient

This contraction coefficient for pipe endings edges is used in outflow calculations. Default is
0.82
5.5.256 Pipeline diameter
Pipeline diameter
This is the inside diameter of the pipeline connected to the vessel. The different models
assume the diameter is constant for the whole pipeline.
© 2018 TNO
308 RISKCURVES
5.5.257 Pipeline length
Pipeline length
This is the length of the pipeline connected to the vessel through which the gas, liquid or
liquefied gas is released.
The length is measured from the vessel up to the guillotine fracture or the hole in the
pipeline.
For the long pipeline models (gas and two phase, e.g Wilson and Morrow model), full
blocking of the pipeline length is assumed, and the release is based on the contents of the
pipe itself (as if no vessel attached).
In the combined models and universal release model the "long pipeline" models will be
activated if the length exceeds 1 km.
Gas outflow from long pipeline: Wilson model
In case of a full bore ruptured of a long pipeline according to the Wilson Model, the
parameter Lp (length pipeline) could be understood as the distance up to the guillotine
break. So, if the full-bore rupture happens 2 km after the initial point, in case of a 10 km
pipeline the total outflow is the outflow from a 2 km pipeline and an 8 km pipeline. The
outflow from both pipeline parts must be calculated with the Wilson model.
In case (1) Lp is 2 km and in case (2) Lp is 8 km.
For non-stationary gas outflow through small holes the Wies model (page 2.73 YB) is
valid.
This model regards the pipeline as a volume; in this case the pipeline length (lp) is the total
length of the pipeline. For this type of outflow the model will calculate the total mass outflow
at once.
© 2018 TNO
Two phase outflow: Morrow Model

In case of a double sided outflow, the release rate needs to be combined from the release
rates of two pipe parts. The outflow from both pipeline parts must be calculated with the
Morrow model.
5.5.258 Pipeline roughness
Pipeline roughness
This is the relative wall roughness of the pipeline walls(ratio between the wall roughness
and the pipe diameter). For the wall roughness the values in the table below (as proposed
in table 2.2 in the 3rd edition of the Yellow Book) can be used.
Material Pipeline roughness

Bronze, lead, glass 0.015 mm
Commercial steel, wrought iron 0.045 mm
Cast iron 0.250 mm
5.5.259 Pipeline volume
Pipeline volume
This is the total pipe volume calculated by the pipeline diameter and the pipeline length.
5.5.260 Plume shape
Plume shape
© 2018 TNO
310 RISKCURVES
This result, shown in the graph panel, illustrates the height of the center axis (shown in red)
and the boundaries of the socalled equivalent cloud height.
This can be use as a side view of the cloud and shows potential rising or descending
effects, occurring at dense gas dispersion.
5.5.261 Pool surface
Pool surface
This is the surface area of the liquid pool that is formed.
Dense gas dispersion model

This field is required only for evaporating pool release and is called "Fixed pool surface"
determining the initial source area.
Pool fire model

The field "maxium pool surface" is only required for the circular pool, and is used as the
maximum limiting size for the "fixed feed" situation. For Confined (instantaneous) situation,
this area determines the initial area of the pool fire (even if the mass is very low: there is no
minimum pool thickness applied for confined pool fires)
Other pool shapes like the rectangular pool, rim fire and polygonal pool will derive their
surface from provided dimensions.
Pool evaporation model

The maximum pool surface area will only be used if the pool is bunded (Type of pool
growth on land "spreading in bunds" or pool on water of type "confined water")
5.5.262 Pool temperature
Pool temperature
The actual temperature of liquid at the moment it is released into the pool.
Note that this temperature can never exceed the boiling temperature at atmospheric
pressure. For atmospheric storage systems, the actual storing temperature can be used, for
pressurized situation, the temperature should be the temperature after flashing or cooling
down to atmospheric boiling point.
5.5.263 Pool thickness
Pool thickness
Thickness of the pool on the ground
© 2018 TNO
5.5.264 Poolfire calculation type
Poolfire calculation type

The pool fire model supports two methods of calculating the pool fire.
By default, the Yellow Book is used (Paragraph 6.5.4).
Alternatively, the "Two-Zone poolfire" method can be used, which distinguishes a clear and a
sooty part of the flame, which have dedicated SEP (Surface Emissive Power) values
provided for a more extensive list of Chemicals.
The two-zone pool fire model is described in the document "Pool fire model
improvements.pdf" , which is installed in the installation folder, and is officially published in:
'Rew, P.J. & Hulbert, W.G. (1997) Modelling of Thermal radiation from external hydrocarbon
poolfires, in Trans IChemE, Vol.75 part B,' and
'Rew, P.J. & Hulbert, W.G. (1996), Development of a pool fire thermal radiation model’, HSE
Contract research report no. 96 '
In both situations, the pool burning rate will be based on values provided in the database
(which are based upon Rew & Hulbert publications). For non-listed other materials the
burning rate is calculated with Equation 6.67 on page 6.65 in the YB-2005 (Burgess, 1974)
The table below gives typical values as listed in this publication. The first column provides
burning rate, SEP max gives maximum surface emissive power (in kW/m2) and Ug
parameters give "unobscured ratio" for sevral pool diameters. The two zone table values are
providing clear flame and sooted flame radiation levels, including typical distribution of the
clear and sooted flame part heights.
© 2018 TNO
312 RISKCURVES
If the substances are not listed in the publication (chemicals are associated with their CAS
numbers or fuel name) the Burgess relation will be used for burning rate, and default (0.8) or
user provided soot fractions will be used to calculate heat radiation. In those cases, a (Yellow)
warning will be provided, listing the values used.
5.5.265 Population polygon

Population polygon
The area where population is present can be defined by using the edit button, this will start the
inline editor allowing to define a shape.
5.5.266 Positive phase duration at Xd
Positive phase duration at Xd
© 2018 TNO
This is the duration of the positive phase of the blast wave calculated for a given vapour
cloud explosion scenario at the point of study Xd.
5.5.267 Predefined concentration
Predefined concentration
Within the concentration model, an additional "user defined" concentration threshold can be
added. When selecting "user defined" the user defined threshold concentration needs to be
entered. This additional contour will be presented together with concentration contour
levels defined in presentation settings .
5.5.268 Predefined wind direction
Predefined wind direction

Combo Box containing the 16 directions of the wind rose.
The first option is user defined, in case the user desires another value. You can input it in
"Wind comes from (North = 0 degrees)".
The default is 270 degrees, implying wind FROM west implying that all contours will be
directed from left to right, pointing TO the east
5.5.269 Pressure at pipe exit at time t
Pressure at pipe exit at time t

This is the pressure at the pipe exit at time t after start release. Choking phenomenon is
usual and in this cases the pressure at pipe exit is greater than the ambient pressure.
5.5.270 Pressure at time T

Temperature at time T
If the user has specified "calculate at specified time" this filed will present the pressure inside
the vessel at this time.
© 2018 TNO
314 RISKCURVES
5.5.271 Pressure damage based on

Pressure damage based on
The translation to lethality caused by explosion overpressure can be defined by 4 different

methods:
1. Using two pressure levels: total destruction (indoors + outdoors) and a specific level for
indoors (glass) fragments damage.
2. Using a probit based on Peak pressure: Pr = A + B * ln(PeakPressure^N),
3. Using a probit based on exposed pressure impulse Pr = A + B * ln(Pressure Impulse^N)
4. Using a user defined pressure vs lethality level relation (fully customizable relation)
Note that for method 2,3,4, the total destruction damage level will only be applied to
indoor lethality
In case 3, the pressure impulse is calculated as (0.5 * peakpressure * positive phase

duration).
Method 3 cannot be applied when using the TNT overpressure calculation, because that
method does not provide a positive phase duration answer; one needs to use the Multi Energy
method for method 3.
Method 4 gives the freedom to define a fully customized relation between overpressure and
lethality by simply adding pressures and corresponding lethality levels (by default interpolation
will be used in between levels)
5.5.272 Pressure damage Probits

Pressure damage Probits
When using probits, the lethality will be using a probit function based on Peak pressure: Pr =
A + B * ln(PeakPressure^N) or as a probit based on exposed pressure impulse Pr = A + B
* ln(Pressure Impulse^N)
© 2018 TNO
The parameters define the values a, b and N, based on units Pascal and seconds.
See Heat radiation probits for translation into lethality.
5.5.273 Pressure lethality relation

Pressure Lethality relation
When applying a pressure-lethality relation, the user needs to define a range of pressure
levels with corresponding lethality levels. The table allows to switch units, by using <right
Mouse> click on the header title. Furthermore, a consistent increasing levels range is
expected.
The calculation will use interpolation inbetween these levels, unless the "Singapore block-
mode" is being activated (RISKCURVES only)
5.5.274 Pressure impulse at Xd
Pressure impulse at Xd
This is the pressure impulse calculated for a given vapour cloud explosion or vessel
rupture scenario at the point of study Xd.
5.5.275 Pressure in vessel at time t
Pressure in vessel at time t

This is the pressure present in the vapour part of the vessel at the time of study t.
© 2018 TNO
316 RISKCURVES
5.5.276 Pressure inside vessel determination

Pressure inside vessel determination
The model can work with the two possibilities:Use vapour pressure will use the equilibrium
pressure for the supplied temperature.
The choice "Use actual pressure" will use a user specified pressure, which may be higher
than vapour pressure.
During outflow, this overpressure will quickly disappear due to mass release.
5.5.277 Pressure level total destruction

Peak pressure level total destruction
This value is used to define the peak pressure level at which inside and outside lethality
is assumed to be 100% (total destruction zone). Default value is 300 mBar (0.3 Bar).
When using Pressure damage probits or a Pressure-Lethality relation, this level will only
be applied for indoor lethality.
5.5.278 Pressure level indoors damage (glass)

Pressure level indoors damage (glass)
This value is used to define the pressure level at which glass will brake, leading to an
indoor population lethality (glass damage). Default value is 100 mBar (0.1 Bar)
5.5.279 Probabilty FlashAndExplosion
5.5.280 Projection Systems

Projection System
© 2018 TNO
Projected coordinate systems, commonly used in GIS (Geographical Information Systems)

viewers, are coordinate systems designed to represent the spherical earth as a flat surface,
such as a printed map or a computer screen. 2D and 3D Cartesian coordinate systems
provide the mechanism for describing the geographic location and shape of features using x
and y values. Locations of geographic objects are defined relative to the origin, using the
notation (x,y), where x refers to the distance along the horizontal axis, and y refers to the
distance along the vertical axis. The origin is defined as (0,0).
The projection system contains a strict definition in what units, with which reference system
and which visualization angle (where is North) coordinates should be displayed.
The standard system to be used has to be defined in "Presentation settings": this offers a
huge list of standardized projection systems. The default choice here is WGS 84 Pseudo
Mercator. This choice defines the coordinate system to be used for all presentations in the
map GIS view.
It is important to emphasis that the choice of the project projection system should be the
first thing to decide when starting to work with a project. Changing the project system
after equipment locations and receiving objects have been placed will change the values
associated with the coordinate, and might lead to rotated or even disappearing maps and
locations: because there not "in view" in the changed system.
(For example, a back ground map in Dutch Amersfoort RD system will no longer show up when the
project is changed to Singapore SVY21 and will be rotated when displayed in Swedish National Grid
system).
5.5.281 Protection factor clothing

Protection factor clothing
The protection factor applied for clothing, used for societal risk calculations on heat radiation.
A probit calculation will be applied on heat radiation, leading to a lethality. This lethality is
corrected with this factor to obtain the damage in case of societal (protected) calculations
5.5.282 Radial distance from release (Yd)
Radial distance from release (Yd)

This is the perpendicular distance from the release point to the point of study.
© 2018 TNO
318 RISKCURVES
5.5.283 Radius at maximum plume rise
Radius at maximum plume rise

This is the radius of the plume at the down-wind position where the maximum height of the
plume is reached.
This output is only calculated for positively buoyant plumes.
5.5.284 Radius of flashfire

Radius of flashfire
If the total mass in the cloud will get ignited, it is assumed that it will create a flashfire/fireball
in the shape of half a sphere, which has a specific ground footprint.
The radius of this footprint is calculated on the base of mixing the total airborn mass to Upper
Explosion Limit.
5.5.285 Radius of the fireball
Radius of the fireball

The radius from the fireball is calculated from the quantity of combustible material which is
released in case of a complete failure of the tank, according to: rfb=3.24 * m0.325.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.286 Rainout mass

Rainout mass
This field present the amount of mass that will rainout and form a pool.
Basically the initial mass in the vessel is divided into a part that will remain in the cloud
(airborn), and a part that will rainout.
The rainout mass can be input for a pool evaporation model.
5.5.287 Related lethal fraction for peak overpressure

Related lethal fraction for peak overpressure
This is the fraction of mortality that Riskcurves uses when someone is present under the
provided setpoint 0.1 bar (10000 pascal) peak overpressure contour.
Do not make it zero or larger than 100%.
5.5.288 Related lethal fraction for peak overpressure_2

Related lethal fraction for peak overpressure
This is the fraction of mortality that is used when someone is present under the provided
indoor threshold set point (by default 0.1 bar=10000 pascal) peak overpressure contour.
Do not make it zero or larger than 100%.
© 2018 TNO
320 RISKCURVES
5.5.289 Release location

Release location
A release location consists of an X and Y coordinate value, in the units as defined in the
current coordinate projection system.
Note that changing the projection system will also change the value of the X and Y numbers,
because these are internally stored in a fixed Mercator map unit system and translated into
the current projection system when displayed on screen.
5.5.290 Reporting time cloud

Reporting time cloud
The flammable cloud dispersion model will report the flammable contour at a specific time,
which need to be set by the user. the model can search for the maximum area of the cloud,
the maximum explosive mass in the cloud, or report at specific user defined time.
At this specific "reporting" time step, the area, explosive mass, length and width of the cloud
will be reported
5.5.291 Representative density

Representative density
This is the density belonging to the chosen time period (the period in which the first 20% or
second 20% of the mass is released)
The graph of the "Purple book approximation of a time varying source" illustrates the first and
second highest time block.
5.5.292 Representative outflow duration

Representative outflow duration
Depending on whether the calculation is performed until a vessel is empty or until a user
specified time,
the representative outflow duration is
- the mass in the vessel divided by the 'representative outflow rate' or
© 2018 TNO
- the total mass outflow until the user specified time divided by the ' representative outflow
rate'
5.5.293 Representative pool radius

Representative pool radius
This is the pool radius belonging to the chosen time period (the period in which the first 20%
or second 20% of the mass is released)
5.5.294 Representative pressure

Representative pressure
This is the pressure belonging to the chosen time period (the period in which the first 20% or
second 20% of the mass is released)
5.5.295 Representative release rate

Representative release rate
This is the average release rate in the chosen time period (the period in which the first 20% or
second 20% of the mass is released).
5.5.296 Representative temperature

Representative temperature
This is the temperature belonging to the chosen time period (the period in which the first 20%
or second 20% of the mass is released)
© 2018 TNO
322 RISKCURVES
5.5.297 Representative vapour mass fraction

Representative vapour mass fraction
This is the vapour mass fraction belonging to the chosen time period (the period in which the
first 20% or second 20% of the mass is released)
5.5.298 Response fraction indoors
Response fraction indoors

This is the response fraction (fraction of mortality) which is found inside the room due to
the considered release. We assume the concentration is constant in the whole volume of
the room
5.5.299 Response fraction outdoors
Response fraction outdoors

This is the response fraction (fraction of mortality) which would be found in the position of
the room if there was no sheltering due to the considered release.
5.5.300 Room volume
Room volume
This is the volume in which the persons would look for shelter in case of a toxic accident.
This volume is supposed to be all situated at the down-wind position x, y, z.
5.5.301 Roughness length description
Roughness length description

Define classes for the roughness of the terrain, z0:
See table 44 from the Purple Book:
Number Roughness Description

length
© 2018 TNO
1 0.0002 m Open water, at least 5 km
2 0.005 m Mud flats, snow, no vegetation
3 0.03 m Open flat terrain, grass, few isolated objects
4 0.1 m Low crops, occasional large obstacles, x/h > 20
5 0.25 m High crops, scattered large objects, 15 < x/h < 20
6 0.5 m Parkland, bushes, numerous obstacles, x/h < 15
7 1.0 m Regular large obstacles coverage (suburb, forest)
8 3.0 m City centre with high- and low rising buildings
x = typical upwind obstacle distance, h = the height of the corresponding major obstacles
The previous Effects versions used a different classification:
1. Flat land: z0 = 0.03 m (e.g. polder land with few trees).

2. Arable land: z0 = 0.1 m (e.g. airfield, agricultural land, polder with many trees).
3. Cultivated land: z0 = 0.3 m (e.g. glass-house land, open area with much overgrowth,
scattered houses).
4. Habitated land: z0 = 1.0 m (e.g. area with densely located but low buildings, wooded area,
industrial area with obstacles which are not too high).
5. Cities and towns: z0 = 3.0 m (e.g. a big city with high buildings, industrial area with high
obstacles).
The roughness length is an artificial length-scale appearing in relations describing the wind
speed over a surface, and which characterizes the roughness of the surface. Note that the
sizes of the elements causing the roughness can be more than ten times larger than the
roughness length
5.5.302 Shape Definition

Shape definition
The drawing of a specific shape or polygon, is activated by pressing the button in the input
field list. Make sure the "Map" tab is activated and a background map is available, otherwise
definition of a shape makes no sense. Shapes are used to define congestion areas,
vulnerable areas, or pool shapes.
Potentially zoom in on the area of interest (use mouse wheel for zooming, right mouse drag
for moving the map), lock the scale to avoid re-dimensioning of the background map, and
select the edit button. This will change the shape of the cursor into a hand with a cross
illustrating the "draw mode".
Start pinpointing coordinates on the map, thus defining the shape (polygon) of the habituated
area. Each point which is clicked on the map will leave a small red dot. Adding more dots will
create additional points creating a more complicated polygon.
© 2018 TNO
324 RISKCURVES
Points can be added, moved or deleted:
Add a point: Simply click on the map and a point will be added next to the current active (red)
point.
Move a point: Select a point and drag the point with the <left mouse button>.
Delete a point: select any point of the polygon, which will give the active point a red color.
Clicking it again will remove this point.
Select the blue <edit> button again to finish the shape definition.
5.5.303 Solar Radiation Flux

Solar Radiation Flux
The pool evaporation model uses an overall heat balance for the pool to calculate the
evaporation. This heat balance also includes solar heat radiation.
Users can choose whether to use a fixed value for solar heat radiation, or calculate the actual
value based on day, month, cloud cover and latitude of the location.
The solar heat radiation flux is the actual value for the heat flux as used in pool evaporation
calculations.
Note that values may range from negative (at night: earth radiates towards sky) to 1500
Watts/m 2 depending on the latitude, cloud coverage, and day of the year.
When the actual value has to be calculated, several other input values are required: earth
location latitude value, cloud cover and day/month of the year.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.304 Sound speed in liquid phase
Sound speed in liquid phase

Speed of sound in the pressure liquefied gas. The speed of sound of chemicals that are
commonly stored as a pressure liquefied gas like propane, ammonia and chlorine, is not
easily found in literature as is its pressure dependency. Most liquids have a speed of sound
between 900 m/s and 1500 m/s, and on average about 1250 m/s. Liquid propane and
propane are both one of the exceptions. An increase of pressure will increase the speed of
sound. In most cases a pressure increase of about 100 bar will increase the speed of
sound in liquids about 5-15%. The speed of sound in liquid phase of a few chemicals at a
temperature of 288.15 K [NTIS] are presented in the table:
Chemical Pv°(T) (105 N/m2) us,L (m/s)

propane .31 .9
propene .91 .1
ammonia .27
butane .82 .6
Pv(T) = saturation pressure [N/m 2]

us,L = speed of sound in liquid [m/s]
5.5.305 Speed of released chemical at the source
Speed of released chemical at the source

This is the linear speed of the considered chemical at the stack exit (plume rise model) or
jet’s release point (turbulent free jet model, chamberlain model).
The speed of the chemical depends upon the amount released, the quality of the release
(possible presence of liquid) and the density of the release. The model is only valid for pure
chemicals, but a mixture can be taken into account in the calculation of the initial speed.
5.5.306 Spray calculation type
Spray calculation type

The spray release model supports three methods of calculating the spray fraction and rain-
out.
By default, the Yellow Book is used (paragraph 2.5.3.7) which uses relations of Kukkonen et
al.
Alternatively, the Aminal Rule can be used, which applies a straightforward rule of thumb to
calculate the spray fraction ('AMINAL - Richtlijn voor het berekenen van Flash en Spray,
1997').
© 2018 TNO
326 RISKCURVES
This Aminal rule defines that the spray fraction is the minimum of [1 minus adiabatic flash, 4
times adiabatic flash], and rainout fraction is calculated as: 1 minus (Flash fraction plus spray
fraction).
A third option is the use of a "Statistical Spray Release" method. This method utilizes a
statistical sampling method to create a droplet size distributions, and is described in the
document "Statistical Spray Release Model.pdf " which is installed within the installation
folder.
C. Hulsbosh-Dam, An Approach to Carbon Dioxide Particle Distribution in Accidental

Releases,in Chemical Enigineering Transactions Vol.26, 2012,
ISBN 978-88-95608-17-4; ISSN 1974-9791
5.5.307 Standard deviation of turbulent velocity in vertical and horizontal direction
Standard deviation of turbulent velocity in vertical and horizontal direction

Standard deviations of velocities in cross-wind and vertical direction used in the estimation
of the dispersion parameters. Preferably, use should be made of measured values.
When the meteorological data is "Pasquill", EFFECTS estimates the standard deviations of
turbulent velocities (from pasquill stability class and roughness length class) and it appears
as an output, with "used" at the end.
5.5.308 Standard pipe roughness
StandardPipeRoughness
The roughness of a pipe is used in pipe flow pressure drop calculations, default 4.5E-5 m
5.5.309 Start of exposure (after moment of release)
Start of exposure (after moment of release)

This is the time at which we consider that humans will begin to be exposed to a toxic cloud.
Normally, a default value of 0s is used, which means that the exposure is supposed to
begin immediately after the release.
Example:
A person could be sheltering inside a house when a release takes place. When this person
comes out of the house after say 1 hour (start of exposure = 3600s), the release might be
ended and concentrations outside (which this model calculates) might have decreased to
safe levels. On the other hand, if a person leaves the house after 10 minutes (start of
exposure = 600s), dangerous concentrations might still be present and higher toxic values
reached. In this way one can model the sheltering behaviour of people.
© 2018 TNO
Graph 1
5.5.310 Step size for contour searching
Step size for contour searching

In case the program doesn’t find a contour (it will generate a warning to say it to the user, in
which the step size used will be shown) but the user is sure the plot exists, he can input a
different value (than the one found in the warning) of the step size to try to find the contour.
The "step size", in meters, is the step size we want the program to use in the first step of a
contour plot calculation: finding the contour. If no value is entered, EFFECTS estimates the
size of the step itself for finding the contour (in case it exists for the given release case and
threshold value). If for example the threshold value is higher than the maximum
concentration, the contour doesn’t exist).
A contour is normally not found if it has a length lower than 5m, and the internal stepsize
estimation hasn’t found the appropriate value.
If we can estimate the position of the center of the contour, even if it is a 5 cm long contour,
the stepsize to be used is the following:
© 2018 TNO
328 RISKCURVES
We add one centimeter to the half-length of the source to ensure we are not making
calculations within the source, where the Gaussian distribution is not valid. It also means
that clouds completely located within the first centimeter will never be found, but this is not
a real limitation for practical use.
5.5.311 Subsoil / water temperature

Subsoil / water temperature
The temperature of the subsoil or water that you want to use for pool evaporation calculations.
In general, the higher the temperature the larger the evaporation rate and consequences.
5.5.312 Subsoil Roughness

Subsoil Roughness
In practical situations the pool will spread until it reaches some minimum thickness which is
related to the surface roughness. As typical values a lower limit of 5 millimeters for smooth
surfaces, and for very rough surfaces several centimeters are used.
The classification provided here is based on table 3.1 from the Yellow Book:
Subsoil Average roughness

flat sandy soil, concrete, tiles, 0.005 m
plant-yard
relatively flat sandy soil, gravel 0.010 m
rough sandy soil, arable land, 0.020 m

meadows
very rough overgrown sandy soil 0.025 m
with holes
5.5.313 Subsoil type
Subsoil type
Is used for pool spreading and determines the minimum layer for a pool thickness.
5.5.314 Surface area of a cylinder

Surface area of a cylinder
© 2018 TNO
This is the surface area of the frustum, when it is approximated to a cylinder, as ‘tried’ to
indicate in the figure.
5.5.315 Surface area of shape

Surface area of shape
For areas drawn, this surface describes the associated footprint area.
For a 3D object, such as a jet fire frustum, this area describes the total surface area of the
object.
© 2018 TNO
330 RISKCURVES
5.5.316 Surface emissive power (actual)

Surface emissive power (actual)
The actual surface emissive power of the frustum, which equals the maximum surface
emissive power when there is no soot formation.
For the calculation of the actual surface emissive power ( ) of a radiating body the
following equation is evaluated: , in which is the fraction of the
surface of the flame which is covered by soot. For the value as found by Hägglund
[Hägglund, B. and Persson, L.E. The heat radiation from petroleum fires, FOA Rapport
C201126-D6 (July 1976)] of .
5.5.317 Surface emissive power (max)

Surface emissive power (max)
The maximum surface emissive power of the frustum
© 2018 TNO
The value of the maximum surface emissive power from a flame without soot is calculated
by: , in which = fraction of the generated heat which is
radiated from the flame surface, = burning rate [ ], = heat of combustion [ ], =
average height of the flame [m], =pool diameter [m].
5.5.318 Take protective effects of clothing into account?
Take protective effects of clothing into account?
Combo Box with the option, whether yes or no, to take protective clothing into account
5.5.319 Temperature after release
Temperature after release

The definition of this field depends upon the type of release.
In an evaporating pool, the temperature of release is, by definition, the boiling temperature
at ambient pressure of the chemical (so it depends upon the chemical and the database;
the user cannot modify it, the field is disabled).
In vertical and horizontal jets, this is the temperature of the material after the expansion into
atmospheric pressure.
In instantaneous releases, this is the temperature of the material at the instant it is

released.
5.5.320 Temperature at pipe exit at time t
Temperature at pipe exit at time t

This is the temperature at the pipeline exit at time t after start release.
5.5.321 Temperature at Sd
Temperature at Sd
© 2018 TNO
332 RISKCURVES
This is the temperature in the jet at the point of study Sd. No specific calculation can be
done for the variation of the temperature in the jet for different radial distances Yd, so we
have to assume that the same temperature will be reached in all the points at the same
axial distance (Sd).
5.5.322 Temperature at time T

Temperature at time T
If the user has specified "calculate at specified time" this filed will present the temperature
inside the vessel at this time.
5.5.323 Temperature in vessel at time t
Temperature in vessel at time t

This is the temperature in the vessel at the time of study t.
5.5.324 Temperature of the pool
Temperature of the pool
The input parameter describes the initial temperature of the liquid in the pool.
In the pool evaporation model the pool temperature will gradually decrease, because
evaporation heat is being taken from the material.
This effect is presented as a graph of temperature versus time
5.5.325 Temperature vapour/liquid

Temperature vapour/liquid
This field will present the corresponding boiling temperature of the chemical at atmospheric
conditions. It is assumed that the vessel contents will cool down because of the flashing
behaviour.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.326 Threshold concentration

chemical database).

exposure duration.
5.5.327 Threshold fraction of mortality F
Threshold fraction of mortality F

This input is no longer a specific model input but can be provided as required "contour
level"
5.5.328 Threshold heat radiation level

5.5.329 Threshold overpressure

© 2018 TNO
334 RISKCURVES
5.5.330 Threshold toxic dose D

Threshold toxic dose D
Although the toxic dispersion models will usually provide lethality contours according to the %
levels defined in presentations settings, it is possible to draw contours for dosages lower than
associated with 1% (for example injury related dosages).
This filed allows to define a specific toxic dose level. Note that for dosage the default unit will
be (mg/m3)n.min, and translation to ppm and kg based units involve both molar weight and probit N
5.5.331 Tilt angle central axis flare (ab)

Tilt angle central axis flare (ab)
As indicated in the figure, ‘ab’ is the tilt angle of the central axis of the flare.
5.5.332 Time needed to empty pipe (extrapolated)
Time needed to empty pipe (extrapolated)

Time needed to empty the whole pipeline. By comparing the initial mass content in the
pipeline with the mass removed it may appear that the pipeline is not empty after the last
time step. If so, it is recommended to continue the predicted mass flow rate of the last time
step until all remaining mass will be removed (extrapolated mass flow rate).
© 2018 TNO
5.5.333 Time needed to empty vessel
Time needed to empty vessel

This is the time during which there is outflow from the vessel, so the time the vessel needs
to reach an internal pressure of 101325 N/m 2.
5.5.334 Time pool has evaporated

Time pool has totally evaporated
Presents the time at which the pool has totally been evaporated. If the user has supplied a
maximum time which is smaller than the required evaporation time, or the pool stops
evaporating due to low temperature, this filed may be empty.
5.5.335 Time pool spreading ends
Time pool spreading ends
Presents the time at which the pool has the maximum dimensions. This might be the time at
which the pool reaches the wall of the bund, or the time the pool start shrinking again.
5.5.336 Time t after cloud arrival
Time t after cloud arrival

This is the time after the arrival of the cloud at the position where the room is found at
which we want to make the calculations of dose and concentration indoors
5.5.337 Time t after start release
Time t after start release

Time at which the time dependent output parameters (such as concentration, explosive
mass of the cloud, pressure and temperature inside the vessel, etc.) are calculated
For the outflow models, in case the time after release is larger than the emptying time of
the vessel/pipe, the outflow parameters shown by the program will have been calculated at
the emptying time of the vessel/pipe.
For the dispersion models, the contours of interest will be drawn at this time t. When using
Dynamic Concentration Presentation the contour can be illustrated using a color grid at any
time.
5.5.338 Total combustion energy
Total combustion energy

This is the overall energy released due to the combustion of the given amount of chemical.
© 2018 TNO
336 RISKCURVES
5.5.339 Total mass in cloud

Total mass in cloud
Basically the initial mass in the vessel is divided into a part that will remain in the cloud
(airborn), and a part that will rainout.
The total mass in the cloud describes the total airborn mass, and can be used as input for a
dispersion model.
The airborn mass may be partly vapour and partly liquid. If there is liquid in the cloud, it is
suggested to use a "Dense dispersion model".
5.5.340 Total mass in explosive range
Total mass in explosive range

This is the amount of flammable chemical which is found in concentrations between the
LEL (Lower Explosive Limit) and the UEL (Upper Explosive Limit) limits in the vapour cloud.
The program will take into account the fraction of this mass which is confined (See
Fraction of flammable cloud confined).
5.5.341 Total mass in vessel
Total mass in vessel
Total (initial) mass of the chemical in the vessel at time = 0 sec
5.5.342 Total mass involved in BLEVE
Total mass involved in BLEVE
An important result of the BLEVE fireball models is the calculation of the amount of mass
which is involved in the BLEVE phenomenon.
Depending on the temperature of the pressurized liquefied gas, the Flash fraction will change.
For LNG for instance storage temperatures below -150 dgC will imply that only a small
fraction of the PLG will actually be superheated if the vessel will break. Based on empirical
information, the mass that will actually take part of the rapid evaporation is taken as 3 times
the (adiabatic) flash of the storage vessel.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.343 Total mass of decomposable chemical in vessel
Total mass of decomposable chemical in vessel

This is the mass of chemical that is considered to suffer the decomposition that will lead to
the rupture of the vessel. Note that not all the chemicals stored can decompose and, for
the chemical considered to decompose, not all his mass will decompose at the same time
(so not all the mass will supply energy to the blast wave and to the fragments
propagation).
This field is only required for "Decomposition of materials" as cause of the vessel’s failure.
5.5.344 Total mass released
Total mass released

Total amount of mass (only for the desired chemical) released.
In dispersion models, this field is required only for instantaneous releases.
5.5.345 Total mass released at time t
Total mass released at time t

This is the total amount of mass released through the piping from the start of the outflow
until the time of study t.
The total mass released is calculated by integrating the mass flow rate vs time data at
each time step.
where
Mtotal = total mass flow [kg]

fm = mass flow rate [kg/s]
te = ending time model calculation [s]
5.5.346 Toxic dose indoors
Toxic dose indoors
© 2018 TNO
338 RISKCURVES
This is the toxic dose which is found inside the room due to the considered release. We
assume the concentration is constant in the whole volume of the room.
5.5.347 Toxic dose outdoors
Toxic dose outdoors

This is the toxic dose which would be found in the position of the room if there was no
sheltering due to the considered release.
5.5.348 Toxic Exposure Duration

Example
NOTE 1: Different methods of applying this exposure duration are possible, see "exposure
duration based on" parameter.
NOTE 2: By using the option "perform toxic indoors calculation" the dispersion model can
take into account that people inside houses will still be exposed to (lower) concentrations.
quicker.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.349 Toxic Exposure Duration based on
Toxic Exposure Duration based on

Toxic exposure can be limited with the use of the toxic exposure duration parameter.
However different approaches of applying a exposure limit can be applied.
1. Based on time until sheltering (starting to count at t=start exposure after release, default 0
sec)
2. Based on cloud exposure (starting at arrival time of the cloud)
3. Based on limiting the release duration itself (no real limit for exposure)
By default, it is assumed that the exposure is limited due to the fact that people will seek for
shelter (approach 1). In this case the maximum time exposure time will be limited to this Time
Exposure duration, starting at t start exposure (default 0 sec after release).
However since a (semi continuous) toxic cloud will need a specific time to arrive at a
location Xd, the arrival time of the cloud can be different for every location Xd. Since the
reaction of people (seeking shelter) may be triggered by the smell of the toxic, a more
conservative approach would be to start counting the exposure when the cloud arrives.
(This is also the method as referred to in the Purple book.)
To take this effect into account it is also possible to select the "time limit for cloud
exposure" method.
The last method is by limiting the release duration. This approach is used by the Dutch
BEVI guidelines. Note that if a continuous release is selected (Neutral gas dispersion
© 2018 TNO
340 RISKCURVES
model), the release itself will be forced into a "semi continuous"mode, and the release
duration will be maximized to the entered value for "exposure duration"
5.5.350 Toxic Inhalation Heigth
Toxic Inhalation Heigth

This values is used as default height to calculate the toxic dose.
5.5.351 Transition time to vapour flow
Transition time to vapour flow

The transition time is the time that a two-phase outflow in the vessel changes into a vapour
outflow.
After a sudden depressurization, the liquid in the vessel will flash, and due to the presence
of vapour bubbles in the tank the liquid will expand. If the liquid level reaches the hole in the
vessel or pipeline, a two-phase outflow in the shape of a churn or a bubbly flow will occur.
During the blow-down the amount of liquid may decrease so that the swelled liquid level will
drop and pure vapour outflow may become apparent. This is the point of time the two-
phase flow changes into a vapour outflow. Next time step the model switches to the gas
release model. The calculation restarts with the vessel conditions at the moment of the
switch.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.352 Turbulent Free Jet Pressure
TurbulentFreeJetPressure
Value that determines the pressure above which a turbulent free jet will occur, the default is
200000 Pa (2 bar).
This value is used to determine which model should be called first when calculating a gas
release when it is connected to a dispersion program. Above 2 bar, the turbulent free jet
model is called while below 2 bar, the gas release model (no jet) is called.
5.5.353 Type of calculation
Type of calculation
Combo box where the user can choose the time range of the time-dependent graphs and
the time at which the time-dependent outputs will be calculated:
1. Calculate until specified time: model runs until a specific time given in the
input box ‘Maximum Release Duration’. Calculation ends at this provided maximum
duration
2. Calculation until device is empty: model runs until the pressure at the exit
of the pipeline or vessel is equal to the atmospheric pressure (Ambient pressure =
101325 N/m 2). At that moment the vessel is considered to be empty, since no more
chemical will be released.
5.5.354 Type of confinement
Type of confinement
Combo Box where the two different types of circular pool fires are shown (confined and
unconfined)
A circular pool can be confined or unconfined.

In case of confined, the pool surface has to be given as input.
In case of unconfined, the maximum size which the pool can reach is calculated according
to the following input variables :
- hole diameter of the release point
- diameter of the (exit) hole at the release point
- discharge coefficient
- flow coefficient (C0) through a circular hole
- initial height of the liquid above release point
- cross-sectional area of the tank
- pool thickness
© 2018 TNO
342 RISKCURVES
5.5.355 Type of flow inside the vessel
Type of flow inside the vessel

In the combo box ‘type of flow inside the vessel’ there are two possible choices.
Churn flow
Increasing flow velocity breaks down the slug flow bubbles and leads to an unstable
regime. Flow is of an oscillatory nature.
Bubbly flow
Liquid paths are continuous and contain a dispersion of bubbles. The gas or vapour
bubbles are of approximate uniform size. Void fractions range from the extreme case of a
single isolated bubble in a large container to the quasi continuum flow of foam. Different
bubble shapes and trajectories can occur as a result of the interactions between forces
due to surface tension, viscosity, inertia and buoyancy.
The expected regime of two-phase flow has to be selected: bubbly flow or churn flow.
Unfortunately, no general applicable criterion exists, which could support this choice. Two
governing parameters are liquid dynamic viscosity and surface tension. The DIERS
literature suggests that when the dynamic viscosity is below 0.1 Pa.s the flow regime will
be churn-turbulent; otherwise it will be bubbly. However, for liquids with viscosity well below
0.1 Pa.s, it is known that reduction of the surface tension leads to foamy bubble flow. The
value at which this phenomenon occurs depends on the particular liquid.
The assumption that gives the most conservative result is bubble flow, as this yields the
largest amount of discharged pressurised liquefied gas.
5.5.356 Type of flow of the jet
Type of flow of the jet
Combo Box where the two different type of flow of the jet are shown:
- Choked flow
- Unchoked flow.
Choked flow is also denoted as ‘critical’ flow, the speed of the outflow of the gas is so fast
(becomes critical in the sense that it reaches the ‘speed of sound’) due to the outflow
conditions compared to the ambient conditions, that the outflow becomes choked.
Unchoked flow is when the speed of the outflow is lower than the ‘critical’ speed.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.357 Type of pool
Type of pool
As of version 10, the pool fire model in EFFECTS is capable of calculation heat radiation for
various shapes of the pool fire:
1. Circular poolfires (Default)
2. Rimfire (a ring shaped fire), requires the definition of a (outer) diameter, and width of the
rim. (This means that inner diameter = Outer diameter - [2 x width])
3. Rectangular (described by a width and length and rotation angle)
4. Polygonal shape, this allows the user to actually draw the shape on a map, for example the
use the boundaries of a tank pit to describe the shape of the pool.
Note that these choice only apply for "confined releases" because a spreading pool based on
a specific release rate will always need to be circular !
RISKCURVES currently only support circular pool fires because other shapes would require
recalculation for every wind-direction.
The heat radiation from these arbitrary shaped pool fires are calculated using a discretised
radiation method, which is described in the "poolfire model improvements" document in the
installation directory.
5.5.358 Type of release
Type of release
Combo Box where the type of release can be chosen.
The releases with which outflow models can deal are:
-
Release through a hole in a vessel.
-
Release from vessel trough (a hole in) pipe.
© 2018 TNO
344 RISKCURVES
The releases the pool-evaporation model can deal with are:

- Instantaneous (when the whole content is released in a very short time)
- Continuous (for continuous releases like leaks)
Note that in both situations, the spreading behaviour of the pool is modelled, resulting
in a time varying pool area.
The releases with which the neutral gas dispersion model can deal are:
- Instantaneous (when the whole content is released in a very short time)
- Semi-continuous (for finite time releases)
- Continuous (for continuous releases like stacks, chimneys etc)
The releases with which the dense gas dispersion model can deal are:
- Evaporating pool
- Horizontal jet release
- Vertical jet release
- Instantaneous
The evaporating pool and horizontal and vertical jet releases are semi-continuous releases;
no continuous release can be calculated for a dense gas release.
WARNING!
Semi-continuous releases require complex calculations and can be very time consuming,
especially when the explosive calculations are performed.
5.5.359 Type of spreading

Type of Spreading
Possible choices are spreading or spreading in bunds. Note that in either case, the model will
calculate a pool radius versus time. However, in case of a bunded pool, the maximum area is
limited.
5.5.360 Type of subsoil

Type of subsoil
The type of subsoil on which the pool is spreading. Several different classes are supplied
here where the type determines the heat transfer rate.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.361 Type of vapour release calculation

Type of vapour release calculation
The vapour release outflow calculation can utilise two different approaches: either use a
straightforward outflow model, OR use the DIERS top venting approach. This DIERS top
venting model includes accounting for liquid getting thrown out on top of the (PLG) vessel due
to foaming or bubbling effects. This implies that Diers will almost always have a higher
outflow rate than the simple vapour model: including a small liquid fraction.
5.5.362 Type of TNT equivalency
Type of TNT equivalency

Combo Box where the user can make the choice between the two different types of TNT
equivalency:
- Based upon energy
- Based upon mass
The TNT equivalency is used to obtain the mass of TNT to be considered for the explosion
equivalent to the mass of chemical in the considered scenario.
In the "based upon mass" equivalency, TNT mass is obtained directly through the product
of the chemical mass by the equivalency factor. In the "based upon energy" equivalency,
TNT mass is obtained through the product of the chemical mass by the equivalency factor
and the ratio of combustion energies of TNT and the considered chemical.
5.5.363 Typical obstacle diameter

Typical obstacle diameter
This parameter defines, when using the GAME correlations, the typical diameter of obstacles
inside a congested area.
© 2018 TNO
346 RISKCURVES
5.5.364 Use 50% LEL
Use 50% LEL

For dispersion explosive models, the flammable contour is usually based on LEL
concentration for the chemical.
However, due to the stochastic nature of the weather conditions, there is a degree of
uncertainty in the exact location of this concentration contour. To have a more conservative
approach, some users prefer to work with 50% LEL concentrations for flammability.
By selecting this "Yes" to this "Use 50% LEL concentration" the contours presented will be
based on this reduced concentration. When using the GAME method to derive the overlap of
the flammable cloud with a congestion area, this overlap calculation will also be based on
50% LEL concentration. Note that the explosive MASS within the cloud will always be based
on "mass above 100% LEL" which can be limited to "Mass between LEL and UEL
concentration"
5.5.365 Use dynamic concentration

Use dynamic concentration
This choice allows to extend the reporting of the dispersion model with presentation of a time
dependent concentration grid.
If this choice is set to "yes", the map view will include a dynamic concentration presentation
5.5.366 Use doublesided outflow

Use doublesided outflow
This choice (Yes/No) can be used to consider outflow from both sides of the rupture, basically
doubling the outflow, assuming breaking in the middle of the defined length.
5.5.367 Use Game overpressure

Use game Overpressure
Instead of defining a blast strength by its "Multi Energy" curve number, the blast strength can
be calculated using the GAME correlations.
If these correlations are used, the maximum overpressure will be calculated using typical
congestion parameters like volume blockage ratio and average diameter of the obstacles
according to the formulations below:
In which:
VBR = Volume Blockage Ratio [fraction]
© 2018 TNO
Lp = Flame path length [m]
Davg = Average diameter of the obstacles [m]
Sl = Laminar Burning velocity of the chemical [m/s] which is a substance dependent property
taken from the chemical database
Especially in case a congestion area has been defined, this method allows to calculate
overpressure based on overlap with a flammable cloud.
5.5.368 Use mass between LEL and UEL

Use mass between LEL and UEL
This parameter is used in the calculation of explosive mass. By default, it is assumed that all
mass above LEL (lower Explosion Limit)concentration will take part of the ignition. However,
although mixing with air is heavily enforced during ignition, one may argue that mass above
UEL (Upper Explosion Limit) will not ignite, because it is too rich.
To deal with this situation, users can define to either use all mass above LEL, or just the
mass between LEL and UEL
5.5.369 Use Singapore block mode

Use Singapore block mode
This parameter can be used to translate a resulting continuous lethality footprint into a block-
level level footprint according to Singapore QRA guidelines.
These guideline require to use THREE (or four for fire) lethality levels: 3%, 10% and 50%, and
assume that in between the 3% and 10% contours, the averaged level is 6.5%. For the next
level, in between 10% and 50%, the average lethality is 30%. Within the 50% contour, levels
range from 100% to 50%, with an average of 75%.
As of version 10.1.8 this parameter allows to select "Yes Off-site fatality risk method"
or 'Yes On-site fatality risk method".
The reason for this is a specific requirement for heat radiation based risks in Singapore. For
On-site fatality risk, the standard 3%, 10%, 50% and 100% dose based fatality levels are
being applied, which is identical to previous versions. However, when applying Off site
fatality risk method, specific RADIATION levels are used to describe hazard zones:
>37.5 kW/m2 = 100% fatality (also to be applied as total destruction heat radiation
level)
exposure)
exposure)
4 - 15.3 kW/m2 = 6.5% fatality
© 2018 TNO
348 RISKCURVES
Although a value of 4 kW/m2 does not create any fatality based on a heat dose calculation (30
seconds, using Singapore probits), the current guidelines specifically require this rather
conservative criteria as an "Off site fatality level" . This will lead to a larger heat radiation
hazard footprint when applying "Yes Offsite fatality risk method".
Note that for On site overpressure damage, the overpressure vulnerability levels
(overpressure psi to fraction of lethality) may need to be specifically tuned to the building
construction type.
For flammable contours, the 100% lethality area (or 37.5 kW/m2 for Offsite) is explicitly added
to the existing three levels. The lethality vs distance graphs and lethality footprint will be
translated according to these distinct levels:
For resulting lethality grids, the result of using this "block mode" is quit obvious: the
continuously decreasing lethality levels are translated into blocks of 75%, 30% and 6.5%
lethality.
(For fire hazard, a 100% level is also taken into account)
© 2018 TNO
5.5.370 Use which representative step

Use which representative step
Use this parameter to choose which 'period' of the five time periods that are calculated is
considered to be representative.
Background
The Purple Book, paragraph 4.6 describes the coupling between outflow models and vapour
cloud dispersion models.
According tho the description there, EFFECTS approximates the time-varying source term
into five discrete time segments with constant outflow conditions by dividing the total mass
released evenly over these 5 time segments.This purple book steps graph of the rate is
always available in the list of graphs
Then the following rules can be followed:

For flammable substances, the outflow conditions are equal to the conditions of the first
(highest) segment,
having approximated the time-varying release with five time segments.
For toxic substances, the outflow conditions are equal to the conditions of the second
(second highest) segment,
© 2018 TNO
350 RISKCURVES
having approximated the time-varying release with five time segments.
Therefore, it is recommended (and the default behaviour of the program) to choose "First ..."
for flammable substances, and "Second ..." for toxic substances.
5.5.371 Used sauter mean diameter

Used sauter mean diameter
Is a typical diameter in the range of droplet diameters occurring in the spray of a two phase
outflow.
5.5.372 User comment

User comment
This free text field can be used to add a description, for instance about the origin of the
information provided in the input fields.
5.5.373 Vapour temperature after expansion
Vapour temperature after expansion

The temperature of the gaseous part of the outflow after expansion phenomena has taken
place.
© 2018 TNO
5.5.374 Ventilation rate at daytime
Ventilation rate at daytime

The neutral gas dispersion model is able to calculate toxic effects inside, based on an
ventilation rate. For this purpose an exact ventilation rate should be specified, default is 1.0
per hour.
5.5.375 Ventilation rate at nighttime
Ventilation rate at nighttime

See daytime description, except this one is used for nightime calculations.
5.5.376 Ventilation ratio
Ventilation ratio
This is the frequency with which the whole air volume of a room gets renewed. This
parameter influences the toxic exposure for indoor population. The higher the ventilation
ratio, the more the toxic load outside gets transported indoors.
For well insulated (northern European style) houses a value of 1/hour can be applied.
For southern countries, situations with no windows, or typical industrial ventilation much
higher values should be applied (10 refreshments/hour).
5.5.377 Vessel emptying duration

Vessel emptying duration
This parameter is used in so called G2 Loss Of Containment scenario's. By default, these

models will calculate the size of a hole corresponding to an outflow within 10 minutes.
However, the required emptying duration can be modified by altering this parameter.
5.5.378 Vessel Type
Vessel Type
Combo Box where the three different vessel types for which calculations can be performed
are shown. Those are:
- Vertical cylinder
- Horizontal cylinder
- Sphere
© 2018 TNO
352 RISKCURVES
The shape of the vessel is important in for the outflow models to calculate the evolution of
the liquid height, and so the hydrostatic pressure, inside the vessel.
5.5.379 Vessel Volume
Vessel Volume
This is the total volume of the considered vessel.
5.5.380 View factor
View factor
The estimation of the heat radiation surrounding a fire requires the characterization of the
flame geometry. The computation of the heat intensity at a give location around a fire
requires the computation of the geometric view factor. The current EFFECTS
implementation contains the calculation algorithms for several flame geometries as
described by Mudan in reference [Mudan, K.S., Geometric View Factors for Thermal
Radiation Hazard Assessment, Fire Safety Journal 12, 1987, pg. 89-96].
BLEVE model
The view factor at a distance X from the fire ball is calculated as: Fview =
(RadiusFireBall/X)2
© 2018 TNO
Chamberlain model
For the specific case of a jet fire the expressions for a tilted cylinder are implemented.
5.5.381 Volume Blockage Ratio

Volume Blockage Ratio
This parameter defines, when using the GAME correlations, the amount of free space that is
available for expansion of a burning cloud. The higher the value, the less possibility for
expansion, leading to more severe overpressure effects.
The parameter should be estimated based on the total occupied space by obstacles (fraction
of volume), which can be equipment, support construction, pipes, vessels, but also trees,
bushes or cars on a car park.
The value is dimensionless and is defined as a fraction or percentage.
© 2018 TNO
354 RISKCURVES
5.5.382 Volumetric fraction of chemical at release point
Volumetric fraction of chemical at release point

This is the concentration (in volumetric fraction) of the chemical at the release point (stack
exit). Air or other inert chemicals can dilute the release.
5.5.383 Water temperature
Water temperature
The average yearly temperature of the water that you want to use for pool evaporation on
water calculations. In general, the higher the temperature the larger the evaporation rate and
consequences.
5.5.384 Weight ratio of CO2/chemical
Weight ratio of CO2/chemical

Weight ratio of product (burned) gas CO2/chemical.
5.5.385 Weight ratio of H2O/chemical
Weight ratio of H2O/chemical

Weight ratio of product (burned) gas H2O/chemical.
5.5.386 Weight ratio of HCl/chemical
Weight ratio of HCl/chemical

Weight ratio of product (burned) gas HCl/chemical.
5.5.387 Weight ratio of NO2/chemical
Weight ratio of NO2/chemical

Weight ratio of product (burned) gas NO2/chemical.
5.5.388 Weight ratio of SO2/chemical
Weight ratio of SO2/chemical

Weight ratio of product (burned) gas SO2/chemical.
5.5.389 Width of cloud (between LEL)
Width of cloud (between LEL)
© 2018 TNO
This is the width of a horizontal section of the cloud, whose limits are defined by the LEL
value. In other words, it's the width of the contour in this section with LEL as threshold
value. For neutral gases, this horizontal section is taken at the height of the source. For
dense gases, it is taken at ground level.
is maximal.
In case of a continuous release, this is the steady state length of the cloud between LEL at
the height mentioned above.
5.5.390 Width of frustum base (W1)
Width of frustum base (W1)

As indicated in the figure, ‘W1’ is the width of the frustum base.
5.5.391 Width of frustum tip (W2)
Width of frustum tip (W2)

As indicated in the figure, ‘W2’ is the width of the frustum tip.
© 2018 TNO
356 RISKCURVES
5.5.392 Width of toxic contour
Width of toxic contour

This is the maximum distance in crosswind direction between two points of the toxic
contour plot.
5.5.393 Wind comes from (North = 0 degrees)
Wind comes from (North = 0 degrees)

Sense and direction where the wind blows from (if User defined was selected in
"Predefined wind direction"). It uses compass based angles where North = 0 degrees or
West = 270 degrees. Selection of a wind-angle from the combobox will display the
associated angle.
5.5.394 Wind direction for damage

Wind direction for damage
Whenever a congestion area or vulnerable area has been defined, the damage to this area
can be calculated for a worst case situation, but also for one specific direction of the wind.
In case of "worst case situation "the calculation will search for the maximum overlap of a
damage effect with the defined area.
© 2018 TNO
The other possible choice is "defined by model" which implies that only the wind direction as
defined in the damage model will be used to evaluate damage.
5.5.395 Wind speed at 10m height
Wind speed at 10m height

Average wind speed at a reference height of 10m above ground level.
5.5.396 X or Z offset dispersion

X and Z offset dispersion
If a dispersion is proceeded by a turbulent jet expansion phase, the actual start of passive
dispersion may be shifted in X location and if the jet was pointing upwards, even at an
elevated level. This can be dealt with by defining an X or Z offset for the start of dispersion.
5.5.397 X, Y - coordinates of release
X, Y - coordinates of release
GIS coordinates of the release point. Only visible for products with GIS capabilities. Not to
be confused with Xd and Yd which are the point of study (where the effect is calculated).
5.5.398 Z - coordinate (height) of release
Z - coordinate (height) of release
Gas dispersion models
Coordinate of the release in vertical direction. 0 (zero) height is at ground level. Not to be
confused with Zd, which is the height of the point of study (where the effect is calculated).
Plume model
This is the height above ground level of the stack where the gas is released. The reference
0 height is the ground level.
5.6 Risk parameters

Enter topic text here.
5.6.1 Base frequency

Base frequency
© 2018 TNO
358 RISKCURVES
The failure frequency for the scenario, expressed per year. Although this parameter has a
default, it is highly recommended to modify this according to the actual failure frequency.
5.6.2 Bleve fraction

Bleve fraction:
The probability of a Bleve event taken place. A BLEVE (Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour
Explosion) can only occur with a instantaneous release and may be one of the immediate
ignition events (other immediate ignition event can be a poolfire). This parameter only has
influence in case of multiple phenomena and is only applied in case of instantaneous two
phase releases of flammable materials.
5.6.3 Cell size for risk grids
Cell size for risk grid

This parameter defines the grid resolution of the contour map. Note that contours will be
calculated based on a Iso Risk grid. By default a cell size of 10 meter is used. However if
the range of the affected area becomes very big (routes of many kilometers, toxic events
with effect areas upon many kilometers) this might lead to enormous grid (> 10^6 cells). In
those situations a re-sampling will be performed avoiding large memory usage.
As of version 9.012, this parameter is also used to influence the accuracy of the societal
risk calculation:
After the consequence calculation, the resulting lethality footprint is translated into a
"societal risk response" grid to be able to superimpose (a wind direction and stability class
dependent) lethality on the population. The cell resolution of these grids can be adjusted
with the provided value.
However, for large effect phenomena, this would lead to huge memory loads, because all
weather classes and every potential wind-direction has its own list of or "affected" cells.
For that reason, scenario's that would use more than 100*100 cells as its "response
footprint" will be forced to use an increased cell size. Furthermore, scenario’s with shorter
maximum effect distances (less than 100 mtr) will always be calculated at the standard
accuracy of 10 mtr cells.
The usage of this relatively small "response grid" size ensures that even when using a
population distribution in much bigger cells (50 mtr), an accurate estimation of the number
of lethal victims is achieved. (e.g. in case of a partial overlap of the lethal footprint with the
population grid)
Note that population grids, used for calculation of societal risk, have a cell size that
deviates from the risk grid cell size.
5.6.4 Cell size for population grids
Cell size for population grids

This parameter defines the grid resolution for the population grid which is being used to
calculate the societal risk.
It also determines the resolution of any societal risk maps, if these are calculated.
© 2018 TNO
For standard situations, a cell size of 50 mtr is advised, however, if small scale
phenomena are involved (like jet fire of 20 mtr) a smaller cell size could be chosen to
improve the accuracy of the calculation. However, using smaller cells will increase
calculation time and size of the resulting project files.
5.6.5 Chance delayed ignition

Chance delayed ignition
The probability that a delayed ignition (flash fire and/or vapour cloud explosion) event takes
place.
Note that the sum of Direct ignition and Delayed ignition does NOT have to be one:
1 - (Fraction direct + Fraction delayed) = fraction No Ignition
5.6.6 Chance direct ignition

Chance direct ignition
The probability that a direct (immediate) ignition event takes place. This parameter is only
relevant for scenario's in which multiple phenomena (poolfire and vapour cloud explosion,
jetfire and vapour cloud explosion) are possible (combined models). In case of damage
definitions, the calculation is restricted to a single event: an explosion damage definition
already assumes that the explosion takes place.
By default a value of 0.8 is used, but this value can be altered, because it is dependent of the
type chemical (flammability) or release rate.
Some guidelines, like the Dutch BEVI, give a table where this value is dependent of the
release rate and flammability classification of the substance.
For stationary equipment:
And for transport equipment:
© 2018 TNO
360 RISKCURVES
5.6.7 Create Societal Risk Maps

Create Societal Risk Maps
If societal risk calculation is included in the project, there is an option to include the calculation
of societal risk maps, which is a visualization method to illustrate the level and range of the
societal risk.
5.6.8 Cumulate transport routes

Cumulate transport routes in FN curve
By default, the transport societal risk will be expressed per km of route length and wil have an
FN graph per transport route, and not per calculation set.
However, to have an idea of the contribution of transport scenarios on the societal risk, it can
be useful to include the transport scenarios in the standard FN curve. This can be done by
selecting YES in this input field.
5.6.9 Fraction frequency in daytime hours

Fraction frequency in daytime hours
The base frequency is the total frequency for daytime and nighttime. Users can define
activities to take place only at daytime hours (fraction daytime = 100%), only at nighttime
(fraction = 0%) or any other value. The value entered here will determine which part of the
total frequency is used for daytime situation.
This input box is only available if "frequency equally distributed day/night" has a "No" as input.
© 2018 TNO
5.6.10 Fraction with explosion phenomena

Fraction with explosion phenomena
Given the occurrence of a vapour cloud explosion (which is regarded upon as a delayed
ignition), this event may have overpressure effects. This parameter describes which fraction
of those events will have overpressure effects.
Note different from other QRA tools, TNO assumes that all delayed ignitions will have a flash
fire phenomenon, and only a part of these flash fires will ALSO have overpressure effects.
This implies that given a delayed ignition, a flammable cloud drifting away from the source, a
delayed flash fire will always occur, and in a fraction of the situations this includes
overpressure phenomena.
5.6.11 Frequency Correction Factor

Frequency correction factor
A scenario frequency might deviate from "standardized" situations, due to risk reduction
measures, dedicated situation etc.
By using a correction factor instead of adjusting the base frequency, adjustments can be
made more traceable. This value is used for Stationary Equipment, for transport equipment
the correction factor can be modified per location, leading to a third column in the route
definition.
5.6.12 Frequency equally distributed day/night

Frequency equally distributed day/night:
By default, it is assumed that a frequency of an scenario is equally distributed over nighttime

and daytime; that is according to its meteorological occurrence. However, some activities
(loading unloading etc) may have a certain preference for either day or nighttime. By changing
this choice to "No", users can define user specified (so deviating from meteorological
distribution) value.
5.6.13 Inter accident distance FN

Inter accident distance FN
This factor is used to influence the inter-accident distance during societal risk calculations.
Consider the following example:
The above example illustrates a road transport. RISKCURVES will generate accident points
and calculate the size of the gas clouds.
© 2018 TNO
362 RISKCURVES
In the left situation the accident points are separated too far and therefore the calculation
misses an important object because the clouds can not reach it. In the right in situation, more
accident points are generated and the object is hit.
The factor defaults to 50 mtr which means that possible accident points are located 50 meter
from each other. When using scenario's with maximum effect distances much lower than 50
mtrs, is is advised to narrow the inter accident distance.
5.6.14 Inter accident distance FX

Inter accident distance FX
When calculating individual risk contours along a transport route, contours can become
“caterpillar” shaped instead of a smooth line. This is caused when the inter-accident distance
used to calculate individual risk is too large. The factor defaults to 50 mtr which means that
possible accident points are located 50 meter from each other. When using scenario's with
effect distances lower than 50 mtrs, is is advised to narrow the inter accident distance.
5.6.15 Is temporary (population)

Is temporary (population)
When defining population by using population polygons, there is a possibility to define specific
areas as "temporary" population, allowing to associate a specific "utilisation fraction" to this
area.
These kind of temporary population is intended to be used for specific non-permanent

population like pop festivals, camping sites, sport-matches etc, were large number of people
might occur during a short period of time. Note that these population concentrations might
affects societal risk, because of the large amount of people involved.
Apart from the "utilisation fraction" , the part of the time that this population is present, for both
day and night, these temporary polygons can also have a dedicated "inside fraction" because
this population might not be protected by buildings, but be "unprotected outside".
Note: THIS IS NOT TO BE USED FOR STANDARD SITUATIONS. When using many (say
more than 10) temporary polygons that can be exposed to the same event (when they are
close to one another, so within the potential lethality footprint of a single event), this procedure
can get time consuming because all potential combinations of these areas need to be
evaluated!!. As an example, just for three temporary population area’s we need to evaluate: A
and B and C exposed, A and B exposed, A and C exposed, B and C exposed, only A, only B ,
only C, and no area (just base population) exposed, where every combination has its own
probability of occurrence!
5.6.16 Level interpolation method

Level interpolation method
A damage definition is usually defined by providing specific threshold lethality footprints. By

default, an interpolation will be used within these contours, to mimic a continuous decreasing
lethality footprint, similar as derived from an effect model calculation.
© 2018 TNO
However, in some occasions, it might be required to use fixed level within every contour. This
can be done by using a "blockmode" distribution in a damage definition, resulting in fixed
levels within the defined contours (see illustration below).
5.6.17 Lowest significant frequency
Lowest significant frequency

This is the lowest frequency that will be taken into consideration. If the frequency of an
event is lower than this value, it will be neglected.
5.6.18 Maximum accident points per route

Maximum number of accident points
To limit an enormous number of calculations when RISKCURVES want to generate accident

points for long routes but small consequences, this is the maximum number of accident
points it will use
5.6.19 Maximum toxic exposure duration

Maximum toxic exposure duration
By default the toxic exposure is limited to 1800 seconds (half an hour). If the actual passage
time of a cloud is shorter, the dose is calculated based on the actual concentration time
profile
© 2018 TNO
364 RISKCURVES
5.6.20 Meteorological Daytime Fraction

Meteorological Daytime Fraction
Depending on the latitude of the country where the QRA is to be performed, the
daytime/nighttime ratio will differ.
Since the QRA calculation will be based on the usage of daytime / nighttime populations, and
distinguished daytime/nighttime weather conditions, one needs to define the fraction of
daytime situation.
Note: In previous RISKCURVES versions this was incorporated within the meteorological
definition, the current meteorological distribution is based on 100% daytime total and 100%
nighttime total.
5.6.21 Number subsectors FN

Number subsectors FN calculation
By default RISKCURVES defines 12 wind directions. This implies however that

RISKCURVES can “miss” some population concentrations when it performs societal risk
calculations.
This is shown in the left drawing. Two clouds for a 30° wind direction (=360/12) miss the
important object resulting in risk underestimation. In the right drawing, 15° wind direction (=24
wind directions) were chosen resulting in a hit of the object.
The value in this field defaults to 9 (108 wind directions).
5.6.22 Number subsectors FX

Number of subsectors for FX calculation
About the same explanation as for FN calculations holds for individual risk calculations. Again,
a hypothetical person could be “missed”, especially where he stands far away from the cloud
and the cloud tip is relatively small when compared with the sector circumference. In general
when this factor is increased (values up to 20 are useful) the individual risk will decrease as
Riskcurves will calculate more accurately the risk caused by overlap/underlap of a cloud
compared with the sector width. The drawback is more calculation duration. More narrow
clouds have a smaller risk than wide clouds which is obvious as wide clouds can overlap to
adjacent sectors. This methodology takes it all into account at a value of 20.
© 2018 TNO
5.6.23 Perform societal risk calculation

Perform Societal Risk Calculation
A risk calculation can be performed while skipping the societal risk calculation, which will be
much faster. This will also eliminate the need to enter population data.
5.6.24 Probabilty FlashAndExplosion
5.6.25 Utilisation fraction

Utilisation fraction
Utilisation fraction is a property of temporary polygons: it is the part of the time that this
population is present, which can be defined or both day and night situation.
© 2018 TNO
Appendices 367
6 Appendices
6.1 List of chemicals

The full list of chemicals in the extended (DIPPR) database can be found in a separate
document.
The following chemicals are included in the standard YAWS database of

EFFECTS/RISKCURVES:
Acetic acid
Acetonitrile
Acrolein
Acrylonitrile
Air
Allylamine
Allylchloride
Ammonia
Arsine
Benzene
Bromine
Butadiene (1,3,)
Butane (n-)
Butene (1,)
Butylamine (n-)
Butylamine (s-)
Butylamine (t-)
Carbon monoxide
Carbondioxide
Carbondisulfide
Carbonic dichloride (phosgene)
Carbonyl fluoride
Chlorine
Chloroacetaldehyde
Chloroacetyl chloride
Chloroform
Chloroprene
Cumene
Cyanogen
Cyclohexane
Diborane
Dichloroethene (1,1,)
Dichloromethane
Dimethyl amine
Ethane
Ethene
Ethyl acrylate
Ethyl amine
Ethyl mercaptan
Ethylbenzene
Ethylene dichloride
Ethylene oxide
Ethyleneimine
© 2018 TNO
368 RISKCURVES
Fluorine
Formaldehyde
Formic acid
Gasoline
Hexafluoroacetone
Hydrazine
Hydrogen
Hydrogen bromide
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen cyanide
Hydrogen fluoride
Hydrogen peroxide
Hydrogen sulfide
Isobutyl amine
Isobutylene
Isoprene
Isopropyl amine
Ketene
Methane
Methanol
Methyl acrylate
Methyl amine
Methyl bromide
Methyl chloride
Methyl iodide
Methyl mercaptan
Methyl methacrylate
Nitro propane (2,)
Nitrogen
Nitrogen dioxide
Nitrous oxide
Oxygen
Pentane (n-)
Perchloryl fluoride
Phosphine
Propane
Propene
Propyl mercaptan
Propylamine (n-)
Propylene oxide
Styrene
Sulphur dioxide
Sulphur trioxide
Tetrachloroethylene
Tetrahydrofuran
Toluene
Trimethyl amine
Water
Xylene (m-)
6.2 Low level error messages

In some cases an error happens at such a low level that the software can not link this to an
explanation string and it only displays a cryptic dialog.
© 2018 TNO
Appendices 369
In case of reproducible situation, you might send an email to the help-desk, describing the
actions you performed that raised this error.
Note that the help-desk will not provide support for internal Windows errors, or errors that
cannot be reproduced on a standard, clean, system.
Apart from the details information provided in the message, it is very often useful to include
the .RISKX projects file that has triggered the error as an attachment to the email .
It is strongly advised to describe the circumstances under which the error happened.
© 2018 TNO
370 RISKCURVES
6.3 Known limitations

Ignition points
RISKCURVES is not yet capable of working with location dependant ignition propabilities or
ignition points. This implies that by default the so-called "free field" method is used for both
individual risk and societal risk calculations. The free field method assumes explosion
occurring at the point where the LEL cloud has reached its maximum size. (Time of LEL
contour is set as tMac as reported by dispersion explosives model). The flammable cloud
models allow to adjust the time of ignition to either tMac (maxium area cloud) , tMem (Maxium
Explosive mass) or tUser defined (free choice for ignition time of flammable cloud)
Pool evaporation
1) When evaporation is higher than the mass flow into the pool, the pool thickness decreases
until the minimum pool thickness (surface roughness) is reached. After that, the pool will
shrink in size.
For pools in bunds on water, that model has not been implemented completely; for those
pools, after the maximum area (bund area) has been reached, the pool thickness keeps
decreasing until it is zero, while the pool area is constant. (artifact 35366)
2) The transition from non-boiling to boiling for cryogenic substances works for spills on land,
but not on water. The calculation stops when the boiling temperature is reached. The
workaround here is to set the initial temperature of the spilled substance equal (or slightly
higher than) to the boiling temperature. (artifact 32938)
3) Volatile liquids on water.

When a volatile liquid is released, its temperature usually decreases. This causes the
water to also cool down. In the model for heat transfer that is implemented in EFFECTS,
there is no heat transfer by convection (i.e. the water behaves like a rigid body). Therefore,
the user may choose to set a maximum temperature difference between the pool and the
water to limit the temperature decrease of the pool.
When the maximum temperature difference is reached, the chart of “heat flux from subsoil
versus time” is not correctly presented: the heat flux from subsoil as calculated is not
sufficient to keep the temperature constant. An additional heat flux term, stemming from
heat transfer by convection of the water, would keep the pool at a constant temperature.
Combined models
For continuous release of liquefied gases, the heavy gas dispersion model always uses the
‘horizontal jet’ as source mode, even if the pool evaporation is dominant relative to the spray
release.
© 2018 TNO
Index 371
Chemical database manager 146
Index Chemical database sources

Chemical database structure
147
33
Chemical name 238
cloud cover 239
-A- Cloud passage time 239
Combined models 226
Absorption speed 231
Combustion product to show 240
Absorption surface 231
Combustion rate 239
Accuracy parameters 172
Command button panel 109
Accuracy settings 144
Comparison sets 50, 191
Accuracy, Resolution of the time consuming graphs
Concentrating averaging time flammables 139, 241
231
Air relative humidity 181, 232 Concentrating averaging time toxics 139, 241
Ambient pressure 232 Concentration at (Sd, Yd) 241
Ambient relative humidity 232 Concentration at (Xd, Yd, Zd, t) 241
Ambient temperature 181, 232 Concentration at maximum plume rise 241
Amount of CO2 in atmosphere 232 Concentration at plume touch-down 242
Analysis points 100, 193 Concentration at plume's centre-line at Xd 242
Angle between hole and flame axis 233 Concentration averaging time 242
Area Contourarea 233 Concentration indoors at time t 243
at distance 233 Concentration reduction at t 243
at distance to the source 233 Confined mass in explosive range 245
at time t 234 Consequence Risk 23, 50, 101
Atmospheric pressure 181, 234 Consequence Risk levels 83, 189
Atmospheric transmissivity 234 Contour plot accuracy 246
Average mass flow rate 234 Converting Vs9 user chemicals 159
Average release rate (1st 20%) 234 Create societal risk maps 360
Average release rate (2nd 20%) 235 Creating chemical mixtures 156
Axial distance from release (Sd) 235 Cross-sectional area of the tank 247
Cumulate transport FN graphs 360
Cumulation of sources 228
-B- Cumulation sets 50, 191
Curve Number 247
Base frequency 97, 357 CurveNumber for Multi energy explosion method
based upon time 236 139, 248
Blast-wave shape at Xd 236
Bleve fraction 97, 358
Burst pressure vessel 237 -D-
Damage (general description) at Xd 249
-C- Damage definition 194
Damage to brick houses at Xd 249
Calculate toxic contour by 237 Damage to structures (empirical) at Xd 249
Calculation Set 50, 95, 171 Damage to typical American-style houses at Xd
Calculation Settings 50, 171 250
day month year number 250
CalculationSet definition 95 Default mixingheight 139, 251
Case description 237 Define population by 251
Cause of vessel failure 238 Density gas at pipe exit at time t 251
Cell size population grids 358 Diameter of expanded jet 251
Cell size Risk grids 172, 358 Diameter of the tank 252
Chance delayed ignition 97, 359 DIERS top venting (vessel only) 214
Chance direct ignition 97, 359 Discharge coefficient 252
Chemcial Mixtures 37 Display units 133
© 2018 TNO
372 RISKCURVES
Distance from center of the pool (Xd) 253 Formula 151

Distance from centre mass of confined explosive cloud Formula ID 151
to point of study 253 Fraction combustion heat radiated 263
Distance from centre mass of the cloud at which Fraction confined mass in Multi energy explosion
threshold overpressure is reached 253 method 139, 264
Distance from centre of vessel (Xd) 253 Fraction daytime hours 97, 360
Distance from release (Xd) 254 Fraction explosion phenomenon 97, 361
Distance perpendicular to wind direction (Yd) 255 Fraction of CO2 in Atmosphere 181, 264
Distance to clothing burning dose 255 Fraction of flammable cloud confined 264
Distance to plume touch-down 255 Fraction of liberated energy going to kinetic energy
Distance to toxic dose D or fraction of mortality F 265
256 Fraction of mortality at (Xd, Yd, Zd) 265
Dose at (Xd, Yd, Zd) 256 Fraction of the flame covered by soot 265
Dose reduction at t 256 Fragment distribution 266
Doublesided outflow 346 Frequency correction factor 97, 361
Duration of the fire 256 Frequency equally distributed 97, 361
Duration of the release 257 Froude Number 266
Frustum lift off height 266
-E-
Editing constant properties 151
-G-
Editing properties of chemicals 151 GAME equivalent curve number 267
Editing temperature-dependent properties 151 GAME expansion type 267
Effective release height 257 Gas release from a long pipeline 212
Environment parameters 181 Gas release from a vessel or pipe 211
Environment settings 143 Geo-referencing 161
Equipment 50, 185 Graph Area of the cloud above LEL at release level vs.
Equipment definition 96 Time 267
Equivalency factor 257 Graph Circle circumscribed to maximum distance to
Equivalent TNT mass 258 threshold concentration at Zd 268
Error messages 368 Graph Concentration Contour Plot 268
Evacuation time 258 Graph Concentration in the plume centre-line vs
Exit vapor mass fraction 258 Distance from stack 268
Exit vapour mass fraction at time t 258 Graph Concentration vs Axial distance at Yd 269
Expansion type 259 Graph Concentration vs. Down-wind distance at time t
and (Yd, Zd) 269
Expert Parameter settings 139
Graph Concentration vs. Time at (Xd, Yd, Zd) 269
Explosive Mass 259
Graph display panel 103
Explosive mass at time t 259
Graph Distance from rupture to interface vs Time
Exposure duration 259
269
Exposure duration to heat radiation 260
Graph Dynamic pressure vs Distance 270
Extrapolated time to empty pipeline 260
Graph Explosive mass vs. Time 270
Graph Filling degree vs Time 271
-F- Graph Fraction of mortality vs. Down-wind distance at
(Yd, Zd) 271
Filling degree (liquid volume/tank volume) 261 Graph functionality 105
Filling degree at time t 261 Graph Height of the liquid inside the vessel vs Time
Fixed indoors outdoors toxic ratio 174, 261 271
Flame path length 262 Graph Jet velocity vs Axial distance at Yd 271
Flame temperature 262 Graph Mass flow rate vs Time 272
Flame tilt 262 Graph Mass of liquid remaining in the vessel vs Time
Formation rate 263 272
© 2018 TNO
Index 373
Graph Mass of vapour remaining in the vessel vs Time

272
Graph Maximum concentration vs. Down-wind -I-
distance at (Yd, Zd) 272
Graph Maximum range contour plot 273 Include overpressure effects 285
Graph Overpressure contour plot 273 Individual Risk 203
Graph Overpressure vs Distance 273 Indoor Ventilation ratio 286
Graph Plume sideview 274 Initial height of the liquid above release point 286
Graph Positive phase duration vs Distance 274 Initial jet pressure 286
Graph Pressure at pipe exit vs Time 275 Initial jet temperature 286
Graph Pressure impulse vs Distance 275 Initial liquid mass fraction 287
Graph Quality outflow at pipe exit vs Time 275 Initial mass in vessel 287
Graph selection box 112 Initial plume density 287
Graph Temperature at pipe exit vs Time 275 Initial pressure in pipeline 287
Graph Temperature vs Axial distance 276 Initial pressure in vessel 287
Graph Total mass released vs Time 276 Initial speed of fragment 288
Graph Toxic Contour Plot 276 Initial temperature in pipeline 288
Graph Toxic dose vs. Down-wind distance at (Yd, Zd) Initial temperature in vessel 288
277 Inside fraction 288
Graph Vessel pressure vs Time 277 Installation of the software drivers for the dongle 16
Graph Vessel temperature vs Time 277 Integration tolerance 288
Graph Void fraction at pipe exit vs Time 277 Inter accident distance 172, 362
Grid resolution 278 Inter accident distance FN 172, 361
Ground / Surface/ Bund temperature 181, 278 Introduction 15
Inverse Monin-Obukhov Length (1/L) 289
Is the vessel elevated? 289
-H- Iso Risk Contours 23, 203
Heat emission from fire surface 278

Heat of reaction per kg product
Heat radiation at Xd 279
278 -J-
Heat radiation damage probits 174, 279 Jet velocity at (Sd, Yd) 290
Heat Radiation Exposure Duration 174, 280
Heat radiation levels in contour plot
174, 280
280
-K-
heatflux solar radiation 278, 304 Known limitations 370
Height (Zd) 280
Height bottom of the fire ball 280
Height cylinder 290 -L-
Height difference between pipe entrance and exit
281 Latitude 290
Height leak above tank bottom 281 Length cylinder 290
Height of congested area 282 Length of cloud (between LEL) at time tmac 291
Height of construction 283 Length of frustum (flame) (Rl) 291
Height of liquid at time t 283 Length of rectangular pool 292
Height of the plume's centre-line at Xd 284 Length of toxic contour 292
Height to LEL at time t 284 Length source in wind (x), crosswind (y) and
z-direction 292
Hole contraction coefficient 139, 284
Length-Diameter ratio of the vessel 294
Hole diameter 285
Lethal fraction for present in flash fire 174, 294
Hole rounding 285
Lethal fraction for present in poolfire 174, 294
Hole type 285
Level interpolation method 362
How to use the built-in GIS system 115
Liberated energy 295
© 2018 TNO
374 RISKCURVES
Limit of momentum region 295

Limitations for mixtures 37, 156
Liquefied gas from long pipeline 219 -O-
Liquefied gas release 213
Offset between release location and LEL at time tmac
List of chemicals 367 303
LOC scenario 50, 185 Offset between release point and cloud centre 303
Log Panel 127 Options 131
Lowest_significant_frequency 172, 363 Outdoor concentration 304
Outflow angle in XZ plane (0°=horizontal ; 90°=vertical)
-M- 304
Output message level 304
Map display panel 113 Overpressure above liquid 305
Mass and volume calculator 160
Mass flow rate at time t
Mass flow rate of the source
296
296
-P-
Mass of empty vessel 296 Pasquill stability class 305
Mass of fragment 296 Peak dynamic pressure at Xd 306
Mass of heaviest piece 296 Peak overpressure at Xd 306
Mass of liquid in vessel at time t 297 Peak pressure inside damage 306
Mass of vapour in vessel at time t 297 Penetration factor 306
Maximum area of explosive cloud 297 Perform maximum concentration vs. distance graph
Maximum Averaging Time 297 306
Maximum concentration at (Yd, Zd) 298 Perform societal risk calculation 365
Maximum distance of source to LEL 298 Perform time-dependent explosive graphs 307
Maximum explosive mass 299 Perform toxic contour plot 307
Maximum mass flow rate 299 Perform toxic indoors calculation 174, 307
Maximum plume height 299 Pipe contraction coefficient 139, 307
Maximum range of fragment 299 Pipeline diameter 307
Maximum Release Duration 299 Pipeline length 308
Maximum toxic exposure duration 363 Pipeline roughness 309
Maxium number of accident points 172, 363 Pipeline volume 309
menu bar 90 Plume shape 309
Meteorological Data 50, 183, 300 Pool evaporation 335
Meteorological Daytime Fraction 364 Pool spreading 335
Meteorological distribution 141 Pool surface 310
Minimum valid and maximum valid temperatures pool temperature 310
151 Pool thickness 310
Mixing Height 301 Poolfire calculation type 311
Mixture properties 38, 156 Population 50, 184
Model valid until time 301 Population polygon 312
Modelset 50, 188 Positive phase duration at Xd 312
Mortality Probit calculator 161 Predefined concentration 313
Predefined wind direction 313
-N- Presentation settings

Presenting Model Results
135
105
N value 302 Pressure at pipe exit at time t 313
Node input panel 110 Pressure damage based on 174, 314
Number of pieces 303 Pressure damage Probits 174, 314
Number subsectors FN 172, 364 Pressure impulse at Xd 315
Number subsectors FX 172, 364 Pressure in vessel at time t 315
Pressure level total destruction 174, 316
© 2018 TNO
Index 375
Pressure-lethality relation 174, 315 Step size for contour searching 327
Probabilty FlashAndExplosion 139, 316, 365 subsoil 344, 345
Project file 205 Subsoil type 328
Project tree 93 subsoil water temperature 328
Protection factor clothing 174, 317 Surface area of a cylinder 328
Surface area of shape 329
-Q- Surface emissive power 330

Surface emissive power (actual) 330
System requirements 16
Quick start 62
-R- -T-
Take protective effects of clothing into account? 331
Radial distance from release (Yd) 317
Temperature after release 331
Radius at maximum plume rise 318
Temperature at pipe exit at time 331
Radius of the fireball 318
Temperature at Sd 331
Related lethal fraction for peak overpressure 319
Temperature in vessel at time t 332
Release location 320
Temperature of the pool 332
Report panel 124
Temporary population 362
Representative density 320
The basic GUI 49
Representative outflow duration 320
Representative pool radius 321
Threshold concentration 83, 189, 333
Representative pressure 321
Threshold fraction of mortality F 333
Representative release rate 321
Threshold overpressure 83, 189, 333
Representative temperature 321
Tilt angle central axis flare (?b) 334
Representative vapour mass fraction 322
Time needed to empty pipe (extrapolated) 334
Response fraction indoors 322
Time t after cloud arrival 335
Response fraction outdoors 322
Time t after start release 335
Result panel 103
Time to empty vessel 335
Risk transects 165
TNO software products 15
Room volume 322
toolbar 91
Roughness length description 322
Total combustion energy 335
Total mass in explosive range 336
-S- Total mass in vessel
Total Mass Involved BLEVE
336
336
Saving your data and checking the function 151 Total mass of decomposable chemical in vessel
Scenario 50, 185 337
Scenario definition 97 Total mass released 337
Scenario panel 108 Total mass released at time t 337
Shape Definition 323 Toxic dose indoors 337
Societal Risk 202 Toxic dose outdoors 338
Societal Risk (FN) Curve 23, 204 Toxic Exposure Duration 174, 338
Societal Risk Map 23, 205 Toxic Exposure Duration based on 339
Sound speed in liquid phase 325 Toxic Inhalation Heigth 139, 340
Speed of released chemical at the source 325 Transition time to vapour flow 340
Spray calculation type 325 Transport equipment 50, 185
SR map 23, 205 Tree nodes 50
Standard deviation of turbulent velocity in vertical and TurbulentFreeJetPressure 341
horizontal direction 326 Type of BLEVE 236
StandardPipeRoughness 139, 326 Type of calculation 341
Start of exposure (after moment of release) 326 Type of confinement 341
Stationary equipment 50, 185 Type of flow inside the vessel 342
© 2018 TNO
376 RISKCURVES
Type of flow of the jet 342 Wind comes from 356

Type of pool 343 Wind direction for damage 356
Type of release 343 Wind speed at 10m height 357
Type of TNT equivalency 345 World file 161
Typical obstacle diameter 345
-X-
-U- X, Y - coordinates of release 357
Uninstalling the software 17
Upgrading
Use 50% LEL
19
346 -Z-
Use Game overpressure 346
Z - coordinate (height) of release 357
Use mass between LEL and UEL 174, 347
Use which representative step 349
User comment 350
Utilisation fraction 365
-V-
Vapour release from vessel or pipe 215
Ventilation rate 174, 351
Ventilation rate at daytime 350, 351
Ventilation rate at nighttime 351
Ventilation ratio 174, 351
Vessel emptying duration 351
Vessel Type 351
Vessel Volume 352
View factor 352
Viewing graphs of the toxicity parameters 151
Volume Blockage Ratio 353
Volumetric fraction of chemical at release point 354
Vulnerability parameters 174
Vulnerability settings 142
-W-
Water temperature 181, 354
Weight ratio of CO2/chemical 354
Weight ratio of H2O/chemical 354
Weight ratio of HCl/chemical 354
Weight ratio of NO2/chemical 354
Weight ratio of SO2/chemical 354
What is RISKCURVES 22
What's new 32
Which input 23
Which results 23
Which tasks 22
Width of cloud (between LEL) at time tmac 354
Width of frustum base 355
Width of frustum tip 355
Width of toxic contour 356
© 2018 TNO

Risk Curves Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Risk Curves Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TNO Safety software

Quick Start Guide and User Manual

TNO Built Environment & Geosciences

Chapter II Quick Start Guide 49

Chapter III The user interface in detail 89

Chapter IV Advanced features 131

Chapter V Technical backgrounds 171

Calculation Set.......................................................................................................................................................... 171

Average m ass ..........................................................................................................................................................

Graph Positive ..........................................................................................................................................................

Latitude .......................................................................................................................................................... 290

Standard pipe ..........................................................................................................................................................

Chapter VI Appendices 367

1.1 TNO software products

Contact via email: info.riskcurves@tno.nl or http://www.tno.nl/RISKCURVES.

YAWS and licensed DIPPR database

DIPPR includes "Non ideal gas" behaviour

1.2.2 The protection key

1.2.3 Installation and de-installation

1.2.4 Upgrading from version 9

1.2.5 Upgrading from older versions

Upgrading from RISKCURVES 7

To use RISKCURVES 7 projects in RISKCURVES 9, they need to be converted with the

Note that some models in RISKCURVES 9 require additional parameters compared to

By default all scenarios with input data will be converted.

User defined chemicals

The filter field can be used to search for chemicals.

Upgrading from RISKCURVES 4 (DOS version)

There is no build-in support for RISKCURVES project older than version 7.

1.3 What is RISKCURVES

Al information from this Purple Book is implemented within RISKCURVES, providing a

1.3.1 Which task can RISKCURVES perform

RISKCURVES is capable of performing physical effect, probability and consequence

1.3.2 What is the required input

A LOC scenario is provided as a pre-calculated consequence zone, called footprint definition

In general, the following information is required to perform a QRA:

2. Definition of Meteorological probability distributions: this includes stability class / wind

5. Vulnerability conditions describe relations between phenomena and resulting damage

6. In case of societal risk calculations you will need a population distribution

1.3.3 What kind of results are obtained?

The specific levels of interest to be shown in the contours must be defined as a

If the associated contour dimensions of specified weatherclasses need to be reported, the

SR (Societal Risk) Maps is basically a geographical "Area Specific Societal Risk"

- the SR Area map shows areas with restrictions

1.4 What's new in version 10

See Upgrading from version 9 for choices to make during upgrading.

1.4.1 Chemical database structure

New layout for Chemical Editor

1.4.2.1 Limitations for mixtures

RISKCURVES uses straightforward mixing rules to derive properties of mixtures. Many

Warning 2: The database editor to create a mixture of every combination of components,

1.4.2.2 Calculation of properties of mixtures

- Toxic properties (Probits, Threshold concentrations): Determined by "Most toxic" or

1.4.2.3 Evaluating mixture properties

1.4.3 Usage of Projection systems

Properties and distortion in map projections

1.4.4 New and adapted models

1.4.5 Support for tile servers

2 Quick Start Guide

2.1 The Graphical User Interface

2.2 The concepts behind the tree nodes

Furthermore, the calculation of a “Societal Risk” requires the definition of a population

Copying and Pasting of Nodes

A calculation set is a combination of system setting, a meteorological definition, population